Maine Mineral and Gem Museum Bethel, Maine

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM
MUSEUM
ADDITION AND RENOVATION
PROJECT
99 and 103 Main Street

Bethel, Maine
PROJECT MANUAL
AND SPECIFICATIONS
Project #221-1
August 31, 2012

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1-A Instructions to Bidders
SECTION 2 CONTRACT FORMS
00 11 13 Notice to Building Contractors

00 41 13 Contractor Bid Form
2-C-1 AIA Document A310 Bid Bond
2-C-2 AIA Document A312 Performance Bond
2-C-3 AIA Document A312 Payment Bond
00 51 00 Notice of Award
2-D AIA Document A101 Construction Agreement
2-E AIA Document G702 Application and Certification for Payment
Lien Waver Form - Conditional
Lien Waver Form - Unconditional
A704 AIA Document G704 Certificate of Substantial Completion
SECTION 3 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00 71 00 Definitions
A201 AIA Document A201 General Conditions
SECTION 4 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 Summary
01 29 00 Price and Payment Procedures (includes Allowances, Unit Prices and Alternates)
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements
01 40 00 Quality Requirements
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Project sign graphic
01 60 00 Product Requirements
01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 78 39 Record Documents
DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 26 00 Asbestos Removal
02 41 13 Site Demolition
02 41 20 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 OF 5

BETHEL, MAINE
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
NOT USED
DIVISION 5 METALS
05 52 00 Handrails Railings
DIVISION 6 WOODS AND PLASTICS
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
06 17 53 Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses
06 40 20 Exterior Architectural Woodwork
06 40 20 Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing
07 13 00 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing
07 14 10 Foundation Waterproofing System
07 20 00 Building Insulation
07 31 10 Organic Roofing Shingles
07 46 46 Cement Fiber Siding
07 53 23 EPDM Membrane Roofing
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS
08 14 33 Stile & Rail MDF Doors

08 52 00 Wood Windows
08 71 00 Finish Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09 29 00 Gypsum Board Assemblies

09 30 00 Tile
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceiling
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring, Base, and Accessories
09 68 00 Carpeting
09 91 00 Painting
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 14 00 Signage
10 21 13 Metal Toilet Compartments
10 28 13 Toilet Accessories

BETHEL, MAINE
10 44 00 Fire-Protection Specialties
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
Not Used
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14 24 23 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators
DIVISION 15-20
Not Used
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13 Fire Suppression Systems
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 00 00 Plumbing
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 00 00 HVAC System
23 05 00 Supplemental Mechanical General Requirements
23 05 93 Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems
23 07 00 Insulation
23 08 00 Ductwork and Accessories
23 09 00 Automatic Temperature Controls
DIVISION 24-25
Not Used
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 Electrical
DIVISIONS 27 - 30
Not Used

BETHEL, MAINE
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
31 20 00 Earthwork
31 25 13 Erosion Control Devices
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16 Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving

32 16 00 Curbing
32 92 00 Lawns and Grasses
32 93 00 Exterior Plants
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES
33 10 00 Water and Sewer Distribution

33 40 00 Storm Drainage
SECTION 6 PLANS
LIST OF DRAWINGS:
T1.1 Title Sheet
Civil/Site
C1 Site Plan & Details
Architectural
A1.1 Basement Floor Plan

A1.2 First Floor Plan
A1.3 Second Floor Plan
A2.1 Reflected Ceiling Plans
A3.1 Roof Plan and Details
A4.1 Building Elevations
A4.2 Building Elevations
A5.1 Building Sections
A5.2 Wall Sections
A7.1 Room Finish Schedule and Window Types
A7.2 Door Schedule and Types
A8.1 Interior Elevations
A10.1 Enlarged Stair Plans, Sections, and Details
A10.2 Elevator Sections and Details
Structural
S1.1 Foundation Plan and Details

S2.1 First Floor Framing Plan
S2.2 Second Floor and Roof Framing Plans

BETHEL, MAINE
Mechanical and Plumbing
M1.1 Basement Mechanical Plan

M1.2 First Floor Mechanical Plan
M1.3 Second Floor Mechanical Plan
M2.1 Basement Plumbing Plan
M2.2 First Floor Plumbing Plan
M2.3 Second Floor Plumbing Plan
M3.1 Mechanical Details and Legend
M3.2 Mechanical Schedules and Details
M3.3 Mechanical Details
M3.4 Mechanical Details
Electrical
E1.1 Basement Electrical Plan

E1.2 First Floor Lighting Plan
E1.3 Second Floor Lighting Plan
E2.1 Basement Power Plan
E2.2 First Floor Power Plan
E2.3 Second Floor Power Plan
E2.4 Attic Power Plan
E3.1 Notes, abbreviations, symbols, legend, and light fixture schedule
E3.2 Panel Schedules and Details
ED1.1 Electrical Demolition Plan Basement
ED1.2 Electrical Demolition Plan First Floor
ED1.3 Electrical Demolition Plan Second Floor

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 1-A
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. At the time of the opening of Proposals, each Bidder will be presumed to have inspected the
site and to have read and be thoroughly familiar with the Contract Documents, Plans,
Specifications, and Addenda. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine
any form, instrument, or document shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obligation in
respect to his Proposal. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Proposals
as may best serve the interests of the Owner.
2. General Contractors will be furnished by the Architect one (1) copy of the "Proposal Form
for General Contractor" which shall be filled out and signed and sent to the Owner to arrive
on or before the time specified in the "Notice to Building Contractors," Section 2-A.
Proposal by a General Contractor shall be submitted on the form provided.
3. No Proposal may be withdrawn during a period of thirty (30) calendar days immediately
following the opening of the General Contract Proposals.
4. No Contract may be assigned, sublet or transferred without the written consent of the Owner.
5. The Selected General Contractor will be required to furnish a 100% Performance Bond and a
100% Payment Bond to cover the execution of the Contract in conformity with the Form of
Bonds shown in Sections 2-C2 and 2-C3.
6. Prior to the awarding of a contract, Contractor may be required, at the discretion of the
Owner, to furnish a statement of business experience, record of accomplishments, and
financial responsibility.
7. (a) The Date of Completion is stated in the Proposal Form Section 2-B-1. If the Owner finds
that the Work was delayed because of conditions beyond the control and without the fault of
the Contractor, he may extend the Date of Completion in such amount as, in his judgement,
the conditions warrant. The said new Date of Completion shall then be in full force and
effect the same as though it were the original Date of Completion.
(b) Time is an essential element of the Contract and it is important that the Work be pressed
vigorously to completion. The cost to the Owner of administration of the contract,
inspection, and supervision will be increased as the time occupied in the Work is lengthened.
(c) For each calendar day that any Work shall remain uncompleted after the Date of
Completion specified in the Contract, the amount per day, listed below in the Schedule of
Liquidated Damages, shall be deducted from any money due the Contractor, not as a penalty
but as Liquidated Damages, provided, however, that due account shall be taken of any
adjustment of the Date of Completion granted under the provisions of Paragraph (a) above.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM

BETHEL, MAINE
Page 1 of 2 Sec. 1-A
SCHEDULE OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Amount of Liquidated Damages
Original Contract Amount Per Day
More than $10,000 and less than $100,000 $100.00

More than 100,000 and less than 250,000 150.00
More than 250,000 and less than 500,000 250.00
8. The Proposal shall be based on the Materials, Methods, Equipment, and Products as
specified.
Any Materials, Methods, Equipment, and Products not herein specified but deemed worth
of consideration by any General Contractor or Subcontractor may be introduced by a
separate letter attached to his Proposal. He shall state the cost comparison with the specified
Materials, Methods, Equipment, and Products and the reason for the suggested substitution.
It shall be understood by the General Contractor or Subcontractor that the attached letter
describing the proposed change will not be used in determining the low General or
Subcontract proposal submitted unless the General or Subcontractor shall have submitted the
list to the Architect/Engineer 10 days prior to the date set for the receipt of the respective
proposals and shall have received written approval by the Architect/Engineer.
9. OSHA - Safety Regulations. This Project is subject to compliance with all requirements of
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Volume 36, No. 105 of the Federal
Register, U. S. Department of Labor published Saturday, May 29, 1971 as amended.
10. Any proposal that contains an Escalation Clause will be invalid.
11. Any and all Architect/Engineers' interpretations and/or clarifications of bidding documents
must be in the form of written addenda issued from the Architect/Engineer's office to all
bidders who are on record at the Architect/Engineers office not later than 72 hours prior to
scheduled receipt of bids. (No verbal interpretations and/or clarifications shall be allowed as
a substitute for written addenda.)

BETHEL, MAINE
Page 2 of 2 Sec. 1-A
00 41 13
Contractor Bid Form
To:
Maine Mineral and Gem Museum
PO Box 500, 103 Main Street
Bethel, Maine 04217
Attn: Barbra Barrett
1. The undersigned, or "Bidder", having carefully examined the form of contract, general conditions,
specifications and drawings dated August 31, 2012, prepared by Smith Reuter Lull Architects for
Maine Mineral and Gem Museum, as well as the premises and conditions relating to the work,
proposes to furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for and reasonably incidental to the
construction and completion of this project for the Base Bid amount of:
__________________________________________________________________________ Dollars
$ ____________________
Allowances are included on this project.

The bid amount above includes the following Allowances:
Plaster Patch Allowance of 400 sf $
2. Alternate bids are included on this project.

Any dollar amount line below that is left blank by the Bidder shall be taken as a bid of $0.00.
Alternate bid prices are as follows:
Alternate No. Title of Alternate Dollar amount

1 Add Alternate - Replace existing siding on Oddfellows $ ____________________
2 Add Alternate - Replace existing windows on Oddfellows $ ____________________
3 Add Alternate - Additional Exhibit Hall Track Lighting $ ____________________
4 $ ____________________
5 $ ____________________
(formerly Section 2-B)

03-00 41 13 Contractor Bid Form (2) Page 1 of 3 00 41 13
00 41 13
Contractor Bid Form
3. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda to the specifications and drawings:
Addendum No. ____ Dated: ________

4. Bid security is required on this project.

The Bidder shall include a satisfactory Bid Bond (section 00 43 13) or a certified or cashier's check
for 5% of the bid amount with this completed bid form submitted to the Owner.
5. Filed Sub-bids are not required on this project.

The bid amount includes the following Filed Sub-bids which were submitted to the Bidder and to the
Maine Construction Bid Depository.
Name of Filed Sub-bidder MasterFormat section number and title Dollar amount
______________________ 00 00 00 $ ___________________
______________________ 00 00 00 $ ___________________
______________________ 00 00 00 $ ___________________
______________________ 00 00 00 $ ___________________
______________________ 00 00 00 $ ___________________
6. The Bidder agrees, if this bid is accepted by the Owner, to sign the designated Owner-Contractor
contract and deliver it, with any and all bonds and affidavits of insurance specified in the Bid
Documents, within twelve calendar days after the date of notification of such acceptance, except if the
twelfth day falls on a State of Maine government holiday or other closure day, a Saturday, or a
Sunday, in which case the aforementioned documents must be received before 12:00 noon on the day
following the holiday or other closure day, Saturday or Sunday.
As a guarantee thereof, the Bidder submits, together with this bid, a bid bond or other acceptable
instrument as and if required by the Bid Documents.

00 41 13
Contractor Bid Form
7. This bid is hereby submitted by:
Signature: _______________________________________________________________
Printed name and title: _______________________________________________________________
Company name: _______________________________________________________________
Mailing address: _______________________________________________________________
City, state, zip code: _______________________________________________________________
Phone number: _______________________________________________________________
Email address: _______________________________________________________________
State of incorporation,
_______________________________________________________________
if a corporation:
List of all partners,

_______________________________________________________________
if a partnership:

Signed and sealed this day of ,

®
AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA
Init. ®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any
portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document
2
/ was produced by AIA software at 08:09:44 on 12/16/2010 under Order No.8983374958_1 which expires on 09/21/2011, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (877885814)
§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein
by reference.
§ 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation
under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3.
§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise
after
.1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering
declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a
conference among the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the
Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of
the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner
shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1
shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the
Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to
perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any,
subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;
.2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the
Surety; and
.3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the
Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.
§ 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a
failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations,
except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.
§ 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense
take one of the following actions:
§ 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;
§ 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent
contractors;
§ 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for
performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the
Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds
executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the
amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner
as a result of the Contractor Default; or
§ 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with
reasonable promptness under the circumstances:
.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as
practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or
.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.
§ 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed
to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety
demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any
remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the
payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to
enforce any remedy available to the Owner.
®
AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected
Init. ®
by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in
severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software
2
/ at 08:14:57 on 12/16/2010 under Order No.8983374958_1 which expires on 09/21/2011, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (1312978519)
§ 7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall
not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to
the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment
by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for
.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the
Construction Contract;
.2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and
resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and
.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual
damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.
§ 8 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this
Bond.
§ 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the
Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such
unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its
heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
§ 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to
related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.
§ 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in
the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a
declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after
the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this
Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the
jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
§ 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page
on which their signature appears.
§ 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement
shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be
deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
§ 14 Definitions
§ 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction
Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts
received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the
Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the
Construction Contract.
§ 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page,
including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
§ 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise
to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.
§ 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as
required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the
§ 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
®
Init. ®
3
User Notes: (1312978519)
§ 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this
Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.
§ 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows:
(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)
Signature: Signature:
Name and Title: Name and Title:
Address: Address:
®
Init. ®
4
User Notes: (1312978519)
§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance
of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.
§ 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds
harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,
materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the
Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.
§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this
Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in
Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity
seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract
and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.
§ 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense
defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit.
§ 5 The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:
§ 5.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor,
.1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy
the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was,
furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after
having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and
.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13).
§ 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety
(at the address described in Section 13).
§ 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to
satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1.
§ 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall
promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:
§ 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim,
stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and
§ 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
§ 7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to
constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed
amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its
obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s
fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.
§ 8 The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s
fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith
by the Surety.
§ 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the
performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond.
By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor
in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety
under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.
®
AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by
Init. ®
U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in
2
User Notes: (945960491)
§ 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are
unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of
any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on
behalf of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
§ 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to
related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.
§ 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent
jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the
expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2
or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were
furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this
Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the
jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
§ 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown
on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be
sufficient compliance as of the date received.
§ 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where
the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement
shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be
deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
§ 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and
Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
§ 16 Definitions
§ 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:
.1 the name of the Claimant;
.2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;
.3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was
furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;
.4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished;
.5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use
in the performance of the Construction Contract;
.6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of
the Claim;
.7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and
.8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the
date of the Claim.
§ 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the
Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The
term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable
mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond
shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power,
light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and
engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors,
and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or
equipment were furnished.
§ 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page,
including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
®
Init. ®
3
User Notes: (945960491)
§ 16.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as
required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the
§ 16.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
§ 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this
Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.
§ 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows:
(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY
Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)
Signature: Signature:
Name and Title: Name and Title:
Address: Address:
®
Init. ®
4
User Notes: (945960491)
SECTION 00 51 00
NOTICE OF AWARD
TO: PROJECT: Maine Mineral & Gem Museum
99 and 103 Main Street

Bethel, ME
The Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you for the above described Work in response to
its Invitation to Bid dated the day of , 2012, and Information for Bidders. You are
hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for work in the amount of
$________________ __.
You are required to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Performance
Bond and Payment Bond within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice of Award to
you.
If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Bonds within ten (10) days from the
date of this Notice of Award, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of
the Owner's acceptance of your Bid as abandoned. The Owner will be entitled to such other
rights as may be granted by law.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to the Owner.
Dated this day of , 20

(Owner)
By: Barbra Barrett
Title: Executive Director
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice to

Proceed is hereby acknowledged.
By:
this the ________ day of _______ _, 20___
By:
Title:
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT
3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
4 CONTRACT SUM
5 PAYMENTS
6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10 INSURANCE AND BONDS
ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed
in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and
are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the
entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or
agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in
Article 9.
ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in
the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.
ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

§ 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated
below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.
(Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the date
will be fixed in a notice to proceed.)
« »
If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages and other security interests,
the Owner’s time requirement shall be as follows:
« »
§ 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement.
§ 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than « » ( « » ) days from the
date of commencement, or as follows:
(Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of
commencement. If appropriate, insert requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the
Work.)
AIA Document A101™ – 2007. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal 2
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 16:14:21 on
11/03/2010 under Order No.8983374958_1 which expires on 09/21/2011, and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2018988374)
« »
Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date
, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.

(Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to achieve Substantial Completion on time or for
bonus payments for early completion of the Work.)
« »
ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM

§ 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the
Contract. The Contract Sum shall be « » ($ « » ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract
Documents.
§ 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract
Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner:
(State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If the bidding or proposal documents permit the
Owner to accept other alternates subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other
alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.)
« »
§ 4.3 Unit prices, if any:

(Identify and state the unit price; state quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)
Item Units and Limitations Price Per Unit ($0.00)
§ 4.4 Allowances included in the Contract Sum, if any:

(Identify allowance and state exclusions, if any, from the allowance price.)
Item Price
ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS
§ 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§ 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for
Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the
Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§ 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of
the month, or as follows:
« »
§ 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the « » day of a month,
the Owner shall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the « » day of the « » month.
If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be
made by the Owner not later than « » ( « » ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment.
(Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.)
§ 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the
Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract
Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported
User Notes: (2018988374)
by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the
Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
§ 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end
of the period covered by the Application for Payment.
§ 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be
computed as follows:
.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by
multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum
allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of « » percent ( « » %).
Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute
shall be included as provided in Section 7.3.9 of AIA Document A201™–2007, General Conditions
of the Contract for Construction;
.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and
suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved
in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less
retainage of « » percent ( « » %);
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and
.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment
as provided in Section 9.5 of AIA Document A201–2007.
§ 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Section 5.1.6 shall be further modified under
the following circumstances:
.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the
full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete
Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and
(Section 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201–2007 requires release of applicable retainage upon
Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.)
.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the
Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Section 9.10.3 of AIA Document
A201–2007.
§ 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:

(If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from
the percentages inserted in Sections 5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.)
« »
§ 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for
materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.
§ 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT

§ 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the
Contractor when
.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct
Work as provided in Section 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201–2007, and to satisfy other requirements,
if any, which extend beyond final payment; and
.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.
§ 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the
Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:
« »
User Notes: (2018988374)
« »
« »
« »
« »
« »
« »
§ 8.5 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the
other party.
§ 8.6 Other provisions:
« »
ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

§ 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated in
the sections below.
§ 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed AIA Document A101–2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner
and Contractor.
§ 9.1.2 The General Conditions are AIA Document A201–2007, General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction.
§ 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:
Document Title Date Pages
§ 9.1.4 The Specifications:

(Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
« »
Section Title Date Pages
§ 9.1.5 The Drawings:

(Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
« »
Number Title Date
§ 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any:
Number Date Pages
Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding
requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.
§ 9.1.7 Additional documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents:
.1 AIA Document E201™–2007, Digital Data Protocol Exhibit, if completed by the parties, or the
following:
User Notes: (2018988374)
« »
.2 Other documents, if any, listed below:

(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA
Document A201–2007 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid,
Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor’s bid are not part of the Contract
Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be
part of the Contract Documents.)
« »
ARTICLE 10 INSURANCE AND BONDS

The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of AIA Document
A201–2007.
(State bonding requirements, if any, and limits of liability for insurance required in Article 11 of AIA Document
A201–2007.)
Type of insurance or bond Limit of liability or bond amount ($0.00)
This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.
OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

« »« » « »« »
(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)
User Notes: (2018988374)
®
TM
AIA Document G704 – 2000
Certificate of Substantial Completion
PROJECT: PROJECT NUMBER: / OWNER:
(Name and address) CONTRACT FOR: General Construction
ARCHITECT:
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM CONTRACT DATE:
MUSEUM CONTRACTOR:
99 AND 103 MAIN STREET
BETHEL, MAINE FIELD:
TO OWNER: TO CONTRACTOR: OTHER:
(Name and address) (Name and address)
PROJECT OR PORTION OF THE PROJECT DESIGNATED FOR PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE SHALL INCLUDE:
The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Architect’s best knowledge, information and belief,
to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated
portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for
its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated above is the date of issuance established
by this Certificate, which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except
as stated below:
Warranty Date of Commencement
Smith Reuter Lull Architects

ARCHITECT BY DATE OF ISSUANCE
A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise agreed to in
writing, the date of commencement of warranties for items on the attached list will be the date of issuance of the final Certificate
of Payment or the date of final payment.
Cost estimate of Work that is incomplete or defective: $0.00
The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within Zero (0) days from the above date of
Substantial Completion.
CONTRACTOR BY DATE
The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion as substantially complete and will assume full possession at (time) on
(date).
OWNER BY DATE
The responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance
shall be as follows:
(Note: Owner’s and Contractor’s legal and insurance counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and
coverage.)
AIA Document G704™ – 2000. Copyright © 1963, 1978, 1992 and 2000 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:
This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®
Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible 1
under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:22:38 on 11/01/2010 under Order No.8983374958_1 which expires on 09/21/2011,
and is not for resale.
User Notes: (875985014)
00 71 00
Definitions
1. Definitions
1.1 Addendum: A document issued by the Architect that amends the Bid Documents. Addenda shall not
be issued less than seventy-two hours prior to the specified bid opening time.
1.2 Allowance: A specified dollar amount for a particular scope of work or service included in the Work
that is identified in the Bid Documents and included in each Bidder's Bid. The Contractor shall
document expenditures for an Allowance during the Project. Any unused balance shall be credited to
the Owner. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the Owner of anticipated expenses greater
than the specified amount and the Owner is responsible for those additional expenses.
1.3 Alternate Bid: The Contractor’s written offer of a specified dollar amount, submitted on the Bid
Form, for the performance of a particular scope of work described in the Bid Documents. The Owner
determines the low bidder based on the sum of the base Bid and any combination of Alternate Bids
that the Owner selects.
1.4 Architect: The Architect or Engineer acting as Professional-of-Record for the project. The Architect
is responsible for the design of the Project.
1.5 Architectural Supplemental Instruction (ASI): A written instruction from the Architect for the
purpose of clarification of the Contract Documents. An ASI does not alter the Contract Price or
Contract Time. ASIs may be responses to RFIs and shall be issued by the Architect in a timely
manner to avoid any negative impact on the Schedule of Work.
1.6 Bid: The Contractor’s written offer of a specified dollar amount or amounts, submitted on a form
included in the Bid Documents, for the performance of the Work. A Bid may include bonds or other
requirements. A base Bid is separate and distinct from Alternate Bids, being the only cost component
necessary for the award of the contract, and representing the minimum amount of Work that is
essential for the functioning of the project.
1.7 Bid Bond: The security designated in the Bid Documents, furnished by Bidders as a guaranty of good
faith to enter into a contract with the Owner, should a contract be awarded to that Bidder.
1.8 Bidder: Any business entity, individual or corporation that submits a bid for the performance of the
work described in the Bid Documents, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.
1.9 Bid Documents: The drawings, procurement and contracting requirements, general requirements, and
the written specifications -including all addenda, that a bidder is required to reference in the
submission of a bid.
1.10 Bureau: The State of Maine Bureau of General Services in the Department of Administrative and
Financial Services.
1.11 Calendar days: Consecutive days, as occurring on a calendar, taking into account each day of the
week, month, year, and any religious, national or local holidays.
1.12 Certificate of Substantial Completion: A document developed by the Architect that describes the
final status of the Work and establishes the date that the Owner may use the facility for its intended
purpose. The Certificate of Substantial Completion also include a provisional list of items (a "punch
(formerly Section 3-A)

00 71 00 Definitions 17 Jun 11 Page 1 of 5 00 71 00
00 71 00
Definitions
list") remaining to be corrected by the Contractor, if any, and identifies a date from which the project
warranty period commences.
1.13 Certificate of Occupancy: A document developed by a local jurisdiction such as the Code
Enforcement Officer that grants permission to the Owner to occupy a building.
1.14 Change Order (CO): A document that modifies the contract and establishes the basis of a specific
adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, or both. Change Orders may address
correction of omissions, errors, and document discrepancies, or additional requirements. Change
Orders should include all labor, materials and incidentals required to complete the work described. A
Change Order is not valid until signed by the Contractor, Owner and Architect and approved by the
Bureau.
1.15 Change Order Proposal (COP): Change proposed by the Contractor in the contract amount,
requirements, or time, which becomes a Change Order when approved by the Owner.
1.16 Clerk of the Works: The authorized representative of the Architect on the job site. Clerk of the
Works is also called Architect's representative.
1.17 Construction Change Directive (CCD): A written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the
Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to final agreement with the Contractor on
adjustment, if any, in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or both.
1.18 Contract: A written agreement between the Owner and the successful bidder which obligates the
Contractor to perform the work specified in the Contract Documents and obligates the Owner to
compensate the Contractor at the mutually accepted sum, rates or prices.
1.19 Contract Bonds (also known as Payment and Performance Bonds): The approved forms of security,
furnished by the Contractor and their surety, which guarantee the faithful performance of all the terms
of the contract and the payment of all bills for labor, materials and equipment by the Contractor.
1.20 Contract Documents: The drawings and written specifications (including all addenda), Standard
General Conditions, and the contract (including all Change Orders subsequently incorporated in the
documents).
1.21 Contract Price: The dollar amount of the construction contract, also called Contract Sum.
1.22 Contract Time: The designated duration of time to execute the Work of the contract, with a specific
date for completion.
1.23 Contractor: Also called the "General Contractor" or "GC" the individual or entity undertaking the
execution of the general contract work under the terms of the contract with the Owner, acting directly
or through a duly authorized representative. The Contractor is responsible for the means, methods
and materials utilized in the execution and completion of the Work.
1.24 Drawings: The graphic and pictorial portion of the Contract Documents showing the design, location
and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and
diagrams.

00 71 00
Definitions
1.25 Filed Sub-bid: The designated major Subcontractor's (or, in some cases, Contractor’s) written offer
of a specified dollar amount or amounts, submitted on a form included in the Bid Documents, for the
performance of a particular portion of the Work. A Filed Sub-bid may include bonds or other
requirements.
1.26 Final Completion: Project status indicating when the Work is fully completed in compliance with the
Contract Documents. Final Completion is documented by a date on which the Contractor’s
obligations under the contract are complete and accepted by the Owner and final payment becomes
due and payable.
1.27 General Requirements: The on-site overhead expense items the Contractor provides for the Project,
typically including, but not limited to, building permits, construction supervision, Contract Bonds,
insurance, field office, temporary utilities, rubbish removal, and site fencing. Overhead expenses of
the Contractor's general operation are not included. Sometimes referred to as the Contractor's General
Conditions.
1.28 Owner: The State agency which is represented by duly authorized individuals. The Owner is
responsible for defining the scope of the Project and compensation to the Architect and Contractor.
1.29 Owner’s Representative: The individual or entity contracted by the Owner to be an advisor and
information conduit regarding the Project.
1.30 Overhead: General and administrative expenses of the Contractor’s principal and branch offices,
including payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor employees, deductibles paid on any
insurance policy, charges against the Contractor for delinquent payments, and costs related to the
correction of defective work, and the Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on capital used
for the work.
1.31 Performance and Payment Bonds (also known as Contract Bonds): The approved forms of security,
furnished by the Contractor and their surety, which guarantee the faithful performance of all the terms
of the contract and the payment of all bills for labor, materials and equipment by the Contractor.
1.32 Post-Bid Addendum: Document issued by the Architect that defines a potential Change Order prior to
signing of the construction contract. The Post-Bid Addendum allows the Owner to negotiate contract
changes with the Bidder submitting the lowest valid bid, only if the negotiated changes to the Bid
Documents result in no change or no increase in the bid price.
A Post-Bid Addendum may also be issued after a competitive construction Bid opening to those
Bidders who submitted a Bid initially, for the purpose of rebidding the Project work without re-
advertising.
1.33 Project: The construction project proposed by the Owner to be constructed according to the Contract
Documents. The entire public improvement project may also include separate construction and other
activities conducted by the Owner or other contractors. The Owner shall inform all contractors of the
scope of the entire public improvement project relative to each individual contract.
1.34 Proposal: The Contractor’s written offer submitted to the Owner for consideration containing a
specified dollar amount or rate, for a specific scope of work, and including a schedule impact, if any.

00 71 00
Definitions
A proposal shall include all costs for overhead and profit. After acceptance by all parties a proposal
amends the contract and is implemented by the Contractor.
1.35 Proposal Request (PR): An Owner's written request to the Contractor for a Change Order Proposal.
1.36 Punch List: A document that identifies the items of work remaining to be done by the Contractor at
the Close Out of a Project. The Punch List is created as a result of a final inspection of the work only
after the Contractor attests that all of the Work is in its complete and permanent status.
1.37 Request For Information (RFI): A Contractor’s written request to the Architect for clarification,
definition or description of the Work. RFIs shall be presented by the Contractor in a timely manner
to avoid any negative impact on the Schedule of Work.
1.38 Request For Proposal (RFP): An Owner's written request to the Contractor for a Change Order
Proposal.
1.39 Requisition for Payment: The document in which the Contractor certifies that the Work described is,
to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, complete and that all previous
payments have been paid by the Contractor to Subcontractors and suppliers, and that the current
requested payment is now due. See Schedule of Values.
1.40 Retainage: The amount, calculated at five percent (5%) of the contract value or a scheduled value,
that the Owner shall withhold from the Contractor until the work or portion of work is declared
substantially complete or otherwise accepted by the Owner. The Owner may, if requested, reduce the
amount withheld if the Owner deems it desirable and prudent to do so. (See Title 5 M.R.S.A.,
Section 1746.)
1.41 Sample: A physical example provided by the Contractor which illustrates materials, equipment or
workmanship and establishes standards by which the Work will be judged.
1.42 Schedule of the Work: The document prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Owner that
specifies the dates on which the Contractor plans to begin and complete various parts of the Work,
including dates on which information and approvals are required from the Owner.
1.43 Schedule of Values: The document prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Owner before the
commencement of the Work that specifies the dollar values of discrete portions of the Work equal in
sum to the contract amount. The Schedule of Values is used to document progress payments of the
Work in regular (usually monthly) requisitions for payment. See Requisition for Payment.
1.44 Shop Drawings: The drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work
by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion
of the Work.
1.45 Specifications: The portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements of the
Work for materials, equipment, systems, standards, workmanship, and performance of related
services.
1.46 Subcontractor: An individual or entity undertaking the execution of any part of the Work by virtue
of a written agreement with the Contractor or any other Subcontractor. Also, an individual or entity

00 71 00
Definitions
retained by the Contractor or any other Subcontractor as an independent contractor to provide the
labor, materials, equipment or services necessary to complete a specific portion of the Work.
1.47 Substantial Completion: Project status indicating when the Work or a designated portion of the Work
is sufficiently complete in compliance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or
utilize the Work for its intended purpose without unscheduled disruption. Substantial Completion is
documented by the date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion signed by the Owner and the
Contractor.
1.48 Superintendent: The representative of the Contractor on the job site, authorized by the Contractor to
receive and fulfill instructions from the Architect.
1.49 Surety: The individual or entity that is legally bound with the Contractor and Subcontractor to insure
the faithful performance of the contract and for the payment of the bills for labor, materials and
equipment by the Contractor and Subcontractors.
1.50 Work: The construction and services, whether completed or partially completed, including all labor,
materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor and Subcontractors to
fulfill the requirements of the Project as described in the Contract Documents.

INDEX Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses
(Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) 2.4.1, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
Architect’s Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect’s Approvals
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7
Acceptance of Work Architect’s Authority to Reject Work
9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Access to Work Architect’s Copyright
3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 1.1.7, 1.5
Accident Prevention Architect’s Decisions
10 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3,
Acts and Omissions 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3
10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Architect’s Inspections
Addenda 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
1.1.1, 3.11.1 Architect’s Instructions
Additional Costs, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Architect’s Interpretations
Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.11, 4.2.12
9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architect’s Project Representative
Additional Insured 4.2.10
11.1.4 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor
Additional Time, Claims for 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5,
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18,
Administration of the Contract 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5,
3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5,
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 15.2
1.1.1 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors
Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7
4.2.13 Architect’s Representations
Allowances 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
3.8, 7.3.8 Architect’s Site Visits
All-risk Insurance 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Asbestos
Applications for Payment 10.3.1
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, Attorneys’ Fees
11.1.3 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3
Approvals Award of Separate Contracts
2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 6.1.1, 6.1.2
4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
Arbitration Portions of the Work
8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 5.2
ARCHITECT Basic Definitions
4 1.1
Architect, Definition of Bidding Requirements
4.1.1 1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1
Architect, Extent of Authority Binding Dispute Resolution
2.4.1, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1,
9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance
Architect, Limitations of Authority and 11.3.2
Responsibility Bonds, Lien
2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, Bonds, Performance, and Payment
9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4
User Notes: (1280405870)
Building Permit Completion, Substantial
3.7.1 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
Capitalization 12.2, 13.7
1.3 Compliance with Laws
Certificate of Substantial Completion 1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4,
9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6,
Certificates for Payment 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3
4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, Concealed or Unknown Conditions
9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval Conditions of the Contract
13.5.4 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4
Certificates of Insurance Consent, Written
9.10.2, 11.1.3 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1,
Change Orders 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, Consolidation or Joinder
5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 15.4.4
8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
12.1.2, 15.1.3 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
Change Orders, Definition of 1.1.4, 6
7.2.1 Construction Change Directive, Definition of
CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1
2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.4.1, 8.3.1, Construction Change Directives
9.3.1.1, 11.3.9 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,
Claims, Definition of 9.3.1.1
15.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor’s
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 5.4, 14.2.2.2
15.4.1 Continuing Contract Performance
Claims for Additional Cost 15.1.3
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of
Claims for Additional Time 1.1.2
3.2.4, 3.7.46.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR
Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for SUSPENSION OF THE
3.7.4 5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14
Claims for Damages Contract Administration
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating
Claims Subject to Arbitration to
15.3.1, 15.4.1 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1
Cleaning Up Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of
3.15, 6.3 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3
Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to Contract Documents, Definition of
2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 1.1.1
6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, Contract Sum
15.1.4 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4,
Commencement of the Work, Definition of 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4,
8.1.2 15.2.5
Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Sum, Definition of
Administration 9.1
3.9.1, 4.2.4 Contract Time
Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4,
3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2,
9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND Contract Time, Definition of
9 8.1.1
CONTRACTOR
3
User Notes: (1280405870)
Contractor, Definition of Cutting and Patching
3.1, 6.1.2 3.14, 6.2.5
Contractor’s Construction Schedules Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contractors
Contractor’s Employees 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3,
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2.4
11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to the Work
Contractor’s Liability Insurance 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4.1, 11.3.1, 12.2.4
11.1 Damages, Claims for
Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,
and Owner’s Forces 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Damages for Delay
Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of
11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 8.1.2
Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 8.1.3
3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, Day, Definition of
6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 8.1.4
10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Decisions of the Architect
Contractor’s Representations 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3,
3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,
Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2
Work Decisions to Withhold Certification
3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3
Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
3.2 Rejection and Correction of
Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2,
9.7 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1
Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract Definitions
14.1, 15.1.6 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,
Contractor’s Submittals 15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, Delays and Extensions of Time
9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,
Contractor’s Superintendent 10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
3.9, 10.2.6 Disputes
Contractor’s Supervision and Construction 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2
Procedures Documents and Samples at the Site
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 3.11
7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Drawings, Definition of
Contractual Liability Insurance 1.1.5
11.1.1.8, 11.2 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of
Coordination and Correlation 3.11
1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Effective Date of Insurance
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 8.2.2, 11.1.2
1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Emergencies
Copyrights 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4
1.5, 3.17 Employees, Contractor’s
Correction of Work 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,
2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Equipment, Labor, Materials or
1.2 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13.1, 3.15.1,
Cost, Definition of 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
7.3.7 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Costs Execution and Progress of the Work
2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5,
7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2,
11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3
User Notes: (1280405870)
Extensions of Time Insurance, Loss of Use
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.3
10.4.1, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Insurance, Owner’s Liability
Failure of Payment 11.2
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Insurance, Property
Faulty Work 10.2.5, 11.3
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance, Stored Materials
Final Completion and Final Payment 9.3.2
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, INSURANCE AND BONDS
12.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11
Financial Arrangements, Owner’s Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 9.9.1
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Intent of the Contract Documents
11.3.1.1 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4
GENERAL PROVISIONS Interest
1 13.6
Governing Law Interpretation
13.1 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1
Guarantees (See Warranty) Interpretations, Written
Hazardous Materials 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4
10.2.4, 10.3 Judgment on Final Award
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 15.4.2
5.2.1 Labor and Materials, Equipment
Indemnification 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
11.3.7 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Information and Services Required of the Owner Labor Disputes
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 8.3.1
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, Laws and Regulations
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13.1, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
Initial Decision 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,
15.2 13.6.1, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4
Initial Decision Maker, Definition of Liens
1.1.8 2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8
Initial Decision Maker, Decisions Limitations, Statutes of
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1
Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority Limitations of Liability
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,
15.2.5 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3,
Injury or Damage to Person or Property 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
10.2.8, 10.4.1 Limitations of Time
Inspections 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7,
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,
9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5,
Instructions to Bidders 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15
1.1.1 Loss of Use Insurance
Instructions to the Contractor 11.3.3
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2 Material Suppliers
Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5
1.1.7 Materials, Hazardous
Insurance 10.2.4, 10.3
3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11 Materials, Labor, Equipment and
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12,
11.3.2 3.13.1, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2,
Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1,
11.1 14.2.1.2
Insurance, Effective Date of
8.2.2, 11.1.2
User Notes: (1280405870)
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Owner’s Financial Capability
Procedures of Construction 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Owner’s Liability Insurance
Mechanic’s Lien 11.2
2.1.2, 15.2.8 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors
Mediation 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2
8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work
15.4.1 2.4, 14.2.2
Minor Changes in the Work Owner’s Right to Clean Up
1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 6.3
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to
13 Award Separate Contracts
Modifications, Definition of 6.1
1.1.1 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work
Modifications to the Contract 2.3
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work
10.3.2, 11.3.1 14.3
Mutual Responsibility Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract
6.2 14.2
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 and Other Instruments of Service
Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11.1, 3.17,
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 4.2.12, 5.3.1
9.10.4, 12.2.1 Partial Occupancy or Use
Notice 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5
2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, Patching, Cutting and
9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 3.14, 6.2.5
13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Patents
Notice, Written 3.17
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, Payment, Applications for
9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1,
15.2.8, 15.4.1 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Notice of Claims Payment, Certificates for
3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1,
Notice of Testing and Inspections 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
13.5.1, 13.5.2 Payment, Failure of
Observations, Contractor’s 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
3.2, 3.7.4 Payment, Final
Occupancy 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3.1,
2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Orders, Written Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4
13.5.2, 14.3.1 Payments, Progress
OWNER 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
2 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Owner, Definition of 9
2.1.1 Payments to Subcontractors
Owner, Information and Services Required of the 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, PCB
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 10.3.1
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Owner’s Authority 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4
1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws
4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2
7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, OF
12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 10
User Notes: (1280405870)
Polychlorinated Biphenyl Samples, Definition of
10.3.1 3.12.3
Product Data, Definition of Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
3.12.2 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings Samples at the Site, Documents and
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 3.11
Progress and Completion Schedule of Values
4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 9.2, 9.3.1
Progress Payments Schedules, Construction
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Project, Definition of Separate Contracts and Contractors
1.1.4 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2
Project Representatives Shop Drawings, Definition of
4.2.10 3.12.1
Property Insurance Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
10.2.5, 11.3 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Site, Use of
10 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Regulations and Laws Site Inspections
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, Site Visits, Architect’s
15.2.8, 15.4 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Rejection of Work Special Inspections and Testing
3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Releases and Waivers of Liens Specifications, Definition of
9.10.2 1.1.6
Representations Specifications
3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14
9.8.2, 9.10.1 Statute of Limitations
Representatives 13.7, 15.4.1.1
2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, Stopping the Work
5.1.2, 13.2.1 2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stored Materials
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4
Retainage Subcontractor, Definition of
9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 5.1.1
Review of Contract Documents and Field SUBCONTRACTORS
Conditions by Contractor 5
3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Subcontractors, Work by
Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,
Architect 9.6.7
3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Subcontractual Relations
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1
Samples by Contractor Submittals
3.12 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3,
Rights and Remedies 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3
1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, Submittal Schedule
6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7
13.4, 14, 15.4 Subrogation, Waivers of
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 6.1.1, 11.3.7
3.17 Substantial Completion
Rules and Notices for Arbitration 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
15.4.1 12.2, 13.7
Safety of Persons and Property Substantial Completion, Definition of
10.2, 10.4 9.8.1
Safety Precautions and Programs Substitution of Subcontractors
3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 5.2.3, 5.2.4
User Notes: (1280405870)
Substitution of Architect Time Limits on Claims
4.1.3 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2
Substitutions of Materials Title to Work
3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 9.3.2, 9.3.3
Sub-subcontractor, Definition of Transmission of Data in Digital Form
5.1.2 1.6
Subsurface Conditions UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
3.7.4 WORK
Successors and Assigns 12
13.2 Uncovering of Work
Superintendent 12.1
3.9, 10.2.6 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown
Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, Unit Prices
7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 7.3.3.2, 7.3.4
Surety Use of Documents
5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3
Surety, Consent of Use of Site
9.10.2, 9.10.3 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Surveys Values, Schedule of
2.2.3 9.2, 9.3.1
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Architect
14.3 13.4.2
Suspension of the Work Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
5.4.2, 14.3 9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6
Suspension or Termination of the Contract Waiver of Claims by the Owner
5.4.1.1, 14 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Taxes Waiver of Consequential Damages
3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Termination by the Contractor Waiver of Liens
14.1, 15.1.6 9.10.2, 9.10.4
Termination by the Owner for Cause Waivers of Subrogation
5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 6.1.1, 11.3.7
Termination by the Owner for Convenience Warranty
14.4 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7
Termination of the Architect Weather Delays
4.1.3 15.1.5.2
Termination of the Contractor Work, Definition of
14.2.2 1.1.3
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Written Consent
CONTRACT 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,
14 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
Tests and Inspections Written Interpretations
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 4.2.11, 4.2.12
9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Written Notice
TIME 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7,
8 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14,
Time, Delays and Extensions of 15.4.1
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, Written Orders
10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1,
Time Limits 15.1.2
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2,
5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5,
13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4
User Notes: (1280405870)
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
§ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the
Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in
the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment
to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written
order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the
Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,
other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or
proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements.
§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT

The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written
or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the
Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner
and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the
Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the
Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.
§ 1.1.3 THE WORK

The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or
partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by
the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECT

The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole
or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors.
§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS

The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and
dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS

The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,
equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.
§ 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE

Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the
tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their
respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies,
surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.
§ 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER

The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in
accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2.
§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by
one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent
consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the
indicated results.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be
performed by any trade.
§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATION
Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of
numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.
§ 1.4 INTERPRETATION
In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and
articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in
another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective
Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and
other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or
equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to
meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as
publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.
§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use
and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All
copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service.
The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the
Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the
specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants.
§ 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM

If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form,
they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already
provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§ 2.1 GENERAL
§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means
the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.
§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information
necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such
information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,
usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.
§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER

§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide
reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the
Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the
Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3)
the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due.
The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or
the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not
materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,
including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,
assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent
changes in existing facilities.
§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for
the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of
information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the
Work.
§ 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control
and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the
Contractor’s written request for such information or services.
§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of
the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.
§ 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK

If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as
required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the
Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such
order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part
of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent
required by Section 6.1.3.
§ 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK

If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails
within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such
default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner
may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including
Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect
or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the
Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor
shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§ 3.1 GENERAL
§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the
jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means
the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.
§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests,
inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.
§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become
generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the
Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as
the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing
conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These
obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the
purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor
shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the
Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the
Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional,
unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable
laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor
shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a
request for information in such form as the Architect may require.
§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the
Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or
3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations
of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been
avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or
omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract
Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules
and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.
§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract
Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific
instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall
evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite
safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the
Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from
the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely
responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures.
§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or
on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that
such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent
and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections
3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the
Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other
persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly
skilled in tasks assigned to them.
§ 3.5 WARRANTY
The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will
be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further
warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,
except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or
equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes
remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or
insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the
Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
§ 3.6 TAXES
The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are
legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled
to go into effect.
§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS

§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building
permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper
execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally
required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.
§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility
for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1)
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily
found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions
are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly
investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or
decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions
at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the
terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the
reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as
provided in Article 15.
§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial
markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately
suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such
notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume
the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but
shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the
Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in
Article 15.
§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES
§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items
covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,
User Notes: (1280405870)
but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable
objection.
§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

.1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and
all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but
not in the allowances; and
.3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted
accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference
between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs
under Section 3.8.2.2.
§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.
§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance
at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner
through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14
days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the
proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply
within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent,
which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.
§ 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and
Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits
current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the
Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter
as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval.
The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be
coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review
submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase
in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.
§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to
the Owner and Architect.
§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE

The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change
Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made
during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required
submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the
Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of
the Work.
§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards
by which the Work will be judged.
§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is
to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design
concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents
require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals
upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in
accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal
schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of
the Owner or of separate contractors.
§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to
the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified
materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and
coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal
and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been
approved by the Architect.
§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued
authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof.
§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the
absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of
the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s
responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be
required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the
Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings
and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear
such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled
User Notes: (1280405870)
to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or
provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will
review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract
Documents.
§ 3.13 USE OF SITE

The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably
encumber the site with materials or equipment.
§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING

§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make
its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition
existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by
excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor
except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
§ 3.15 CLEANING UP
§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or
rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste
materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about
the Project.
§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner
shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.
§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK

The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever
located.
§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS

The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement
of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but
shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular
manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are
contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a
patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the
Architect.
§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,
Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,
losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the
Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death,
or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the
negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or
anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is
caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce
User Notes: (1280405870)
other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section
3.18.
§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,
a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT
§ 4.1 GENERAL
§ 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing
architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the
Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.
§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents
shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect.
Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom
the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the
Architect.
§ 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be
an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment.
The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract
Documents.
§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed
with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,
and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when
fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will
not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the
Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1.
§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and
quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract
Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and
deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the
Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or
charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or
employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION

Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially
authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about
matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be
through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the
Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review
and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the
Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the
User Notes: (1280405870)
Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to
exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,
material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the
Work.
§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals
such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be
taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved
submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional
judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the
accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for
installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as
required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the
Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval
of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component.
§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor
changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and
recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.
§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date
of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the
Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and
assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section
9.10.
§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in
carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of
such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the
Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests
will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.
§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable
from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations
and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not
show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.
§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The
Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with
reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and
Specifications in response to the requests for information.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor”
does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-
subcontractor.
§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as
practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of
persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in
writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or
entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within
the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the
Contractor has made reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but
rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall
be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively
in submitting names as required.
§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.
§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS

By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by
terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents,
assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically
provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the
Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The
Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the
Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may
be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of
such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS

§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided
that
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to
Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the
Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the
Contract.
When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and
obligations under the subcontract.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s
compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.
§ 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a
successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity,
the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the
subcontract.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

§ 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
§ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s
own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or
operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those
portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15.
§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations
on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes
each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate
contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with
other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any
revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction
schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until
subsequently revised.
§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations
related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations
and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without
excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.
§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by
the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly
report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable
for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that
the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the
Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor
because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be
responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly
timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.
§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.
§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are
described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the
Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

§ 7.1 GENERAL
§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the
Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction
Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the
Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the
Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive
or order for a minor change in the Work.
§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS

§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and
Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 The change in the Work;
.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and
Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes
in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the
Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change
Order.
§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be
based on one of the following methods:
.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation;
.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or
percentage fee; or
.4 As provided in Section 7.3.7.
§ 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
§ 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in
the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,
provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.
§ 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith,
including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall
be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,
the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of
those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an
amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a
reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form
as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following:
.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;
.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or
consumed;
.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the
Contractor or others;
.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to
the Work; and
.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a
net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and
credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall
be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor
may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment.
The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs
and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be
reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis
as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.
§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the
adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such
agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be
issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.
§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or
extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be
effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
§ 8.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in
the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.
§ 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically
defined.
§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement
the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely
commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be
User Notes: (1280405870)
furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the
effective date of such insurance.
§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion
within the Contract Time.
§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by
changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other
causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or
by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change
Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.
§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of
the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

§ 9.1 CONTRACT SUM
The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by
the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the
various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as
the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing
the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under
Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by
such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of
requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract
Documents.
§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in
the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the
Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.
§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the
Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by
others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and
equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance
by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location
agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon
compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable
insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.
§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for
Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the
User Notes: (1280405870)
Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims,
security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.
§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT

§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to
the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is
properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification
in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,
based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the
best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that
the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to
an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of
subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further
constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance
of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-
site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers
and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION

§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary
to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot
be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised
amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to
make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of
subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to
such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor
is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or
equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the
unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
or
.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts
previously withheld.
§ 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option,
issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the
Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the
Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such
payment on the next Certificate for Payment.
§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the
Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to
the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate
agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar
manner.
§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on
account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid
Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted
Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact
Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an
obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.
§ 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided
in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,
payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by
the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under
contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any
fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity
to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT

If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days
after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding
dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect,
stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended
appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-
down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the
Work for its intended use.
§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept
separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or
designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not
included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so
that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor
shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification
by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the
Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written
acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if
any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment
shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE

§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when
such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented
to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the
Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided
the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,
retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in
writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract
Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use
shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement
between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect
the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the
Work.
§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance
and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the
Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect
will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information
and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in
accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the
Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will
constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being
entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.
§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected
with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts
withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the
Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed
to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the
Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by
the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the
Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a
bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after
payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault
of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the
Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the
Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to
certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from
.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver
of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time
of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs
in connection with the performance of the Contract.
§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to
.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the
site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub-
subcontractors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course
of construction.
§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their
protection from damage, injury or loss.
§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are
necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under
supervision of properly qualified personnel.
§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property
insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under
Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise
designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.
§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or
create an unsafe condition.
§ 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY

If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of
others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not
insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice
shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.
§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents
regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the
Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death
to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl
(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately
stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory
to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such
material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications
of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or
who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the
Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the
persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity
proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no
reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall
resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable
additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up.
§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,
Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against
claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or
death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence
of the party seeking indemnity.
§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings
to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be
responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s
fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.
§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of
a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to
perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s
fault or negligence.
§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for
the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 10.4 EMERGENCIES
In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to
prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor
on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

§ 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims
set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under
the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by
a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable:
.1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that
are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the
Contractor’s employees;
.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
the Contractor’s employees;
.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of
ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under
Section 3.18.
§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the
Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an
occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the
Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment,
and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction
of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract
Documents.
§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of
the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the
insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies
will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An
additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations,
shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal
or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning
reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be
furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness.
§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include
(1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in
part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an
additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the
Contractor’s completed operations.
§ 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance.
§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

§ 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s
User Notes: (1280405870)
risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract
Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at
the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who
are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person
or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered,
whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors in the Project.
§ 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation,
insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without
duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework,
testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services
and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
§ 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of
the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to
commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or
maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
§ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such
deductibles.
§ 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work
in transit.
§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company
or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or
otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or
companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
§ 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE

The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by
law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;
this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,
and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
§ 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE

The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss
of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action
against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other
hazards however caused.
§ 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other
special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such
insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
§ 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent
to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring
the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section
11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that
includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable
conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision
that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’
prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.
§ 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION

The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,
for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to
this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of
such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the
Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of
subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even
though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay
the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the
property damaged.
§ 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made
payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any
applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of
insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against
proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the
Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in
accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and
Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for
convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change
in the Work in accordance with Article 7.
§ 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such
objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method
of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method
of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute
over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators.
§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

§ 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of
the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically
required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
§ 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment
of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall
authorize a copy to be furnished.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the
Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior
to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate
Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such
costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or
a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK

§ 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of
the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost
of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary
thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties
established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after
discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the
Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require
correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or
Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.
§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first
performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual
completion of that portion of the Work.
§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the
Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.
§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or
partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work
that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to
other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for
correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct
the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents
may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the
Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK

If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as
appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
User Notes: (1280405870)
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§ 13.1 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have
selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section
15.4.
§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided
in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the
other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction
financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.
§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE

Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the
firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or
certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party
giving notice.
§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

§ 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available
by law.
§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a
breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

§ 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract
Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public
authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and
approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public
authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such
procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until
after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or
applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.
§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require
additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written
authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection
or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such
costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.
§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary
by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the
Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid
unreasonable delay in the Work.
§ 13.6 INTEREST
Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate
as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at
the place where the Project is located.
§ 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS

The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of
warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements
of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law,
but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and
Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

§ 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any
other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for
any of the following reasons:
.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to
be stopped;
.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be
stopped;
.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of
the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or
.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable
evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.
§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work
under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work
by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of
days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.
§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’
written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work
executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages.
§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract
with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional
days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided
in Section 14.1.3.
§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE

§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor
.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective
agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful
orders of a public authority; or
User Notes: (1280405870)
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that
sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and
after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of
the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and
construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and
.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written
request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs
incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.
§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for
the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not
expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case
may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall
survive termination of the Contract.
§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in
whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by
suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include
profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause
for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.
§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the
Contractor shall
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;
and
.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the
notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts
and purchase orders.
§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment
for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on
the Work not executed.
ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

§ 15.1 CLAIMS
§ 15.1.1 DEFINITION
A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other
relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in
question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS
Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial
Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.
Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or
within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.
§ 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE

Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article
14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make
payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue
Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.
§ 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST

If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall
be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency
endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.
§ 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME

§ 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided
herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on
progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.
§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be
documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have
been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
§ 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to
this Contract. This mutual waiver includes
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,
business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of
such persons; and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of
personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit
except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination
in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of
liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 15.2 INITIAL DECISION

§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial
Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise
indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be
required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30
days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been
rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide
disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.
§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or
more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting
data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise,
or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker
lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the
Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the
Claim.
User Notes: (1280405870)
§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek
information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial
Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of
such persons at the Owner’s expense.
§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional
supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a
response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting
data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon
receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim
in whole or in part.
§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that
the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the
reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision
Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding
on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding
dispute resolution.
§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.
§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party
file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the
demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue
binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.
§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if
any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner
may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.
§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in
accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.
§ 15.3 MEDIATION
§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those
waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent
to binding dispute resolution.
§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree
otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in
writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation.
The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event,
mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending
mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the
parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed
to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.
§ 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the
place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in
mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4 ARBITRATION
§ 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any
Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually
agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,
delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The
User Notes: (1280405870)
party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on
which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.
§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for
mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based
on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a
written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of
legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.
§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in
accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity
duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER

§ 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any
other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration
permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,
and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).
§ 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a
common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,
provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an
additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question
not described in the written consent.
§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under
this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and
Contractor under this Agreement.
User Notes: (1280405870)
SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Project: MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM, 99 AND 103 Main Street, Bethel,
Maine.
B. Owner: MMGM, LLC, P.O. Box 500, Bethel, ME 04217
C. Architect: Smith Reuter Lull Architects, 822 Grover Hill Road, Bethel Maine 04217
D. The Work consists of selective demolition to 2 existing buildings, site improvements, and
new construction of a 2 story, connector building, as described in the Contract Documents.
E. Owner-Furnished Items: The following products will be furnished by Owner and shall be
installed by Contractor as part of the Work:
1. n/a
F. Work Not Included: The following will be provided by others:
1. n/a
1.2 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Contractor's Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor will have full use of site
indicated. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or
employ other contractors on portions of Project and as follows:
1. Perform construction only during normal working hours (7 AM to 7 PM Monday thru

Friday, other than holidays), unless otherwise agreed to in advance by Owner. Clean up
work areas and return to a useable condition at the end of each work period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
***END OF SECTION***
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 01 29 00
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ALLOWANCES
A. Include the following allowances in the Contract Sum:
1. Existing Plaster Patching: 400 sf of existing plaster patch.
1.2 ALTERNATES
A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidder for certain work that may be added to or deducted
from the Base Bid amount if Owner accepts the Alternate. The cost or credit for each alternate
is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the
Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
B. Indicate on the Bid Form amounts to be deducted from or added to the Contract Sum for the
following alternates:
1. Alternate Number 1: (add) - Replace existing siding on Oddfellows
2. Alternate Number 2: (add) - Replace existing windows on Oddfellows
3. Alternate Number 2: (add) – Additional Exhibit Hall Track Lighting
1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. A unit price is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work that
is paid for per unit of measure. Bidders shall indicate on the Bid Form unit prices for the
following items of work:
1. n/a
B. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
C. Changes to the Work incorporating Unit Prices will be made by Change Order.
1.4 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a proposal from Contractor, Architect will issue a Change Order on
AIA Document G701, for all changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. When Owner and Contractor disagree on the terms of a proposal, Architect may issue a
Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714, instructing Contractor to proceed
with the change. Construction Change Directive will contain a description of the change and
designate the method to be followed to determine changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time.
1.5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days before the first Application for Payment. In
Schedule of Values, break down the Contract Sum into at least one line item for each
Specification Section. Correlate the Schedule of Values with Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
B. Submit 3 copies of each application for payment on AIA Document G702/703, according to
the schedule established in Owner/Contractor Agreement.
1. For the second Application for Payment through the Application for Payment submitted
at Substantial Completion, submit partial releases of liens from each subcontractor or
supplier for whom amounts were included in the previous Application for Payment.
2. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures
with release of liens and supporting documentation. Include consent of surety to final
payment and insurance certificates.
a. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as
of the date of Substantial Completion.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
B. Conduct progress meetings at Project site every week. Notify Owner and Architect of meeting
dates and times. Require attendance of each subcontractor or other entity concerned with
current progress or involved with planning or coordination of future activities.
1. Record minutes and distribute to parties involved, including Owner and Architect.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
1. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
2. Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than Contractor.
3. Identify deviations from the Contract Documents.
4. Submit 6 copies of each submittal.
B. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Include the following
information on the label:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name and address of Contractor.
4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier.
5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
C. Architect will review each action submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action taken, and
return copies less those retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains Contractor's
responsibility.
D. Construction Schedule Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit schedule within 10 days after date established for Commencement of the Work.
Distribute copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required to comply
with dates.
2. Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been made. As
Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion. Distribute revised copies
to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required to comply with dates.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following:
1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements.

2. Notation of coordination requirements.
3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances,
and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit Project-specific information drawn to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the
following:
1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, large scale details, and other information,
as appropriate for the Work.
2. Identification of products and materials.
3. Notation of coordination requirements.
4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
C. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed.
Where variations are inherent in the material, submit sufficient units to show full range of the
variations. Include name of manufacturer and product name on label.
2.2 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Schedule: Prepare a horizontal bar-chart Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Provide a separate time bar for each activity, using same breakdown of Work indicated in
the Schedule of Values, and a vertical line to identify the first workday of each week.
2. Coordinate each element with other activities. Show each activity in proper sequence.
Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work.
3. Indicate Substantial Completion and allow time for Architect's procedures necessary for
certifying Substantial Completion.
B. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Testing and inspecting services are specified in other Sections of these Specifications or
are required by authorities having jurisdiction and shall be performed by independent
testing agencies.
2. Owner will provide testing and inspecting services not specified to be provided by
Contractor.
3. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests and notifying testing
agency.
4. Retesting and Reinspecting: Contractor shall pay for additional testing and inspecting
required as a result of tests and inspections indicating noncompliance with requirements.
B. Performance and Design Criteria: Where design services or certifications by a professional

engineer are required by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying
with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
2. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated.
C. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test
to Architect, Contractor, and to authorities having jurisdiction when authorities so direct.
Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service shall include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

2. Project title and testing agency's project number.
3. Date of report and designation (number).
4. Dates and locations where samples were taken or inspections and field tests made.
5. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and inspecting or field testing.
6. Names of individuals taking the sample or making the inspection or test.
7. Product and test method.
8. Inspection or test data including interpretation of test results and comments or
professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with requirements.
9. Recommendations on retesting or reinspection.
10. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Agencies that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to
be performed and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor
in performing its duties and shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests.
1. Agency shall promptly notify Architect and Contractor of deficiencies in the Work
observed during performance of its services.
2. Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract
Documents nor approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency shall not perform duties of Contractor.
F. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with testing agencies and provide auxiliary services as
requested, including the following:
1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests.
3. Adequate quantities of materials for testing, and assistance in taking samples.
4. Facilities for storing and curing test samples.
5. Security and protection for samples and test equipment.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Use Charges: Contractor shall pay use charges for temporary utilities.
B. Use water and electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and
NFPA 241.
1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
D. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide
vented, self-contained heaters with thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the
remainder.
B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures.
Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS01 50 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required for curing materials or
for protecting installed construction from adverse weather. Use equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
3.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for the Work.
B. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site. The area of
work and entire project premises are to be maintained in a neat, orderly and safe condition.
1. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste

containers. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations. The
General Contractor will be responsible for obtaining and paying for all applicable waste
disposal permits and fees.
2. Contractors to separate waste & recycle materials listed below:
Wood
Gypsum
Concrete & Masonry
Metal
Glass
C. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from inclement
weather and for containment of heat.
D. Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the
public and persons seeking entrance to Project.
3.3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction

including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment control, dust control, noise control, and
pollution control.
B. At all times during the construction phase, provide and maintain adequate access and egress to
the property.
C. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction
personnel from construction hazards.
1. Enclose construction areas with fences with lockable entrance gates, to prevent
unauthorized access.
D. Provide temporary fire protection until permanent systems supply fire-protection needs.
Comply with NFPA 241.
3.4 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining
after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions
acceptable to Owner.

BETHEL, MAINE
temporary construction sign
WHITE BACKGROUND
Maine Mineral and Gem Museum B h l Maine

Bethel, M i
BLACK
LETTERING
Owner:
Architect: Smith Reuter Lull Architects BLACK

822 Grover Hill Road, Bethel, Maine
Contractor:
BLACK
LETTERING
MINIMUM SIGN DIMENSIONS: 3’ x 4’ x 3/4” EXTERIOR PLYWOOD ((A-B GRADE))

MINIMUM LETTERING SIZE: 5 CM (2-INCHES)
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term "product" includes the terms
"material," "equipment," "system," and similar terms.
B. Product Substitutions: Substitutions include products and methods of construction differing

from that required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of the
Contract.
1. Submit 2 copies of each request for product substitution.

2. Submit requests within 10 days after signing the Contract.
3. Submit requests in time to permit processing of request and subsequent submittals, if any,
sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. Do not submit
unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.
4. Identify product to be replaced and provide complete documentation showing compliance
of proposed substitution with applicable requirements. Include a full comparison with
the specified product, a list of changes to other Work required to accommodate the
substitution, and any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time should
the substitution be accepted.
5. Architect will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its acceptance or
rejection.
C. Comparable Product Submittal:
1. Submit 2 copies of each request for approval of products as comparable to basis-of-

design products. Submit requests in time to permit processing of request and subsequent
submittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the Work. Do
not submit unapproved products on Shop Drawings or other submittals.
2. Identify product to be replaced and provide complete documentation showing compliance
of proposed product with applicable requirements. Include a full comparison with the
specified product.
3. Architect will review the proposed product and notify Contractor of its acceptance or
rejection.
D. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and
installing.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
4. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
5. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the
time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and
components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
B. Select products to comply with all of the following that are applicable:
1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item indicated. No
substitutions will be permitted.
2. Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items
indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term
"available products" or "available manufacturers," provide one of the named items or
comply with provisions for "comparable product" to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product or manufacturer.
4. Where a single product is named as the "basis-of-design" together with the names of
other manufacturers, provide the named product or comply with provisions for
"comparable product submittal" to obtain approval for use of a product of one of the other
named manufacturers.
5. Where a single product is named as the "basis-of-design" and no other manufacturers are
named, provide the named product or comply with provisions for "comparable product
submittal" to obtain approval for use of a product of another manufacturer.
6. Where a product is described with required characteristics, provide a product that
complies with those characteristics.
7. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products that
comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the application.
8. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards, is specified, select a product that
complies with the codes, regulations, or standards referenced.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, Architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from
manufacturer's full range of options that includes both standard and premium items.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 01 70 00
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of the Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show
installation that varies from the Work originally shown.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into three-ring binders with identification on
front and spine of each binder and pocket folders for folded sheet information. . Include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance brochures.

2. Emergency instructions.
3. Spare parts list.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Copies of warranties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements
including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, plumb, smooth, clean, and free of
deleterious substances; substrates within installation tolerances; and application conditions
within environmental limits. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
B. Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing
benchmarks, before laying out the Work.
C. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions,

including, but not limited to, filler and primer application.
D. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where fabricated products are to
be fitted to other construction, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabricating and,
when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during installation.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Do not cut structural members or operational elements without prior written approval of
Architect.
B. For patching, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of
existing materials. For exposed surfaces, provide or finish materials to visually match existing
adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely
in place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If
applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing.
B. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
3.4 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean each surface or item as follows before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion:
1. Remove labels that are not permanent.

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.
Replace chipped or broken glass.
3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign
substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean.
4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and wax resilient flooring.
5. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication.
Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
6. Clean the site. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake
grounds to a smooth, even-textured surface.
3.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, complete the

following:
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Submit specific warranties, maintenance agreements, and similar documents.
3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
4. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications, operation and maintenance manuals, and
similar final record information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items.
6. Changeover locks and transmit keys to Owner.
7. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation and maintenance
personnel.
8. Remove temporary facilities and controls.

BETHEL, MAINE
9. Advise Owner of changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, operation, and
maintenance.
10. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. On receipt of a request for inspection, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected
before the certificate will be issued.
C. Request inspection for certification of Final Completion, once the following are complete:
1. Submit a copy of Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
2. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
D. Architect will reinspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed.
1. On completion of reinspection, Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment. If

the Work is incomplete, Architect will advise Contractor of the Work that is incomplete
or obligations that have not yet been fulfilled.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Provide experienced instructors for each piece of equipment that requires operation and
maintenance to provide instruction to Owner's personnel. Include a detailed review of the
following:
1. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of

documentation, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair.

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM PROJECT 01 78 39-1

BETHEL, MAINE RECORD DOCUMENTS
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02 26 00
ASBESTOS REMOVAL
PART I - GENERAL
ASBESTOS: The Contractor shall take special precautions for that portion of the work
which may involve the handling of materials which contain asbestos, either in removal or
construction. All such work shall be carried out in strict conformance with the requirements
of OSHA Safety and Health Standards, CFR, Title 29, Part 1910, Subpart Z, Section 1001,
also Title 29, Part 1926, Subpart 58 as amended November 20, 1990, and EPA regulations
on National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, CFR, Title 40, Part 61,
Subpart B as amended, including but not necessarily limited to the use of special protective
worker equipment. Materials containing asbestos shall be disposed of by the contractor in a
safe manner and in conformance with local, State, and Federal codes and laws.
If any asbestos is found during the construction of the project and must be removed, the
Owner and Architect must be notified.
*** END OF SECTION ***
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02 26 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 02 41 13
SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes demolition, removal, and abandonment of designated site structures, features,
pavements, and utilities; capping of pipes to remain; removal and handling of demolished
materials from site; removal and handling of items identified for re-installation or relocation;
and protection of items to remain.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing

2. Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
3. Section 31 25 13 Erosion Control
1.2 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate and schedule demolition work to supplement other work efforts including
proceeding, coinciding, or following associated work as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Utilize fill material as specified in Section 31 20 00, Earthwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Erect and maintain temporary barriers and security devices including warning signs, lights, and
similar measures for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor’s employees and existing
improvements to remain.
B. Protect existing structures, features, appurtenances, and vegetation not indicated to be

demolished.
C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring.
D. Mark location of utilities.
3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize impact to and interference with adjacent structures.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SITE DEMOLITION 02 41 13 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Cease operations immediately when adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Clerk of
the Works. Do not resume operations until directed.
C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain egress
and access from structures at all times.
D. Sprinkle Work with water to minimize dust. Provide equipment, hoses, and water required for
this purpose.
3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Remove bituminous and concrete pavements and slabs on grade to full extent of feature. For
partial removals, neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface.
B. Remove materials to be relocated or re-installed in a manner to prevent damage. Store and

protect in accordance with requirements of Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and
Controls.
C. Backfill areas excavated resulting from demolition in accordance with Section 31 20 00,
Earthwork to previous grade or proposed subgrade.
D. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours for
positive drainage.
E. If concurrent work does not occur in areas disturbed by demolition promptly, stabilize disturbed
areas with temporary erosion control measures in accordance with Section 31 25 13, Erosion
Control.
F. Continuously clean-up and remove demolished materials from site. Do not allow materials to
accumulate on site.
G. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition.
3.4 ABANDONMENT
A. Features identified for abandonment shall be left in place unless removed by other work efforts.
B. Underground electrical utilities identified for abandonment shall be disconnected from service
by a qualified electrician.
C. Utilities marked for abandonment shall be disconnected and capped within demolition areas.
Provide permanent cap, seal, or plug.
3.5 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Specific demolition work is identified on the Contract Drawings.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SITE DEMOLITION 02 41 13 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 02 41 20
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolished materials become Contractor's property. Remove from
Project site.
B. Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain Owner's property. Remove, clean, and
deliver to Owner's designated storage area.
C. Comply with EPA regulations and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Conduct demolition without disrupting Owner's use of the building.
E. It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. If materials
suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Maintain and protect existing utilities to remain in service before proceeding with demolition,
providing bypass connections to other parts of the building.
B. Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and cap off utility services to be demolished.
C. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to prevent injury to people and damage to
adjacent buildings and site improvements.
D. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve building stability and
prevent movement, settlement, or collapse.
E. Protect building structure and interior from weather and water leakage and damage.
F. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and exposed finishes that are to remain. Erect and maintain
dustproof partitions. Cover and protect fixtures, furnishings, and equipment that are to remain.
G. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 20 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
H. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces of building caused by demolition.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into remaining adjoining
construction.
I. Promptly remove demolished materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. Do
not burn demolished materials.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 20 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The work covered by this section includes the furnishing of all labor, material, equipment
and incidentals, and the performing of all operations in connection with Concrete
Formwork as indicated on the drawings and/or herein specified. All work shall be subject
to the terms and conditions of the Contract and applicable portions of the General
Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03 20 00
B. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03 30 00
1.03 STANDARD FOR FORMWORK
A. All aspects of the formwork shall be in compliance with ACI 347-95, "Recommended
Practice for Concrete Formwork."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Forms for concrete surfaces that will be exposed in the finished building shall be Plyform
Class 1, B-B Exterior Type, conforming to U.S. Product Standards PS-1 and PS-2. Forms
for concrete surfaces not exposed in the finished building may be Plyform or matched
lumber.
B. Form oil used on surfaces of forms shall be a non-staining type, equal to Nox-Crete form
coating.
C. Form ties shall be of adequate strength to hold the forms together under the loads imposed
by the concrete, with a minimum working strength of 3,000 pounds.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN OF FORMWORK
A. The design, engineering and safety of formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
B. The design of formwork shall include consideration of the rate and method of placing
concrete.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
3.02 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS
A. Formwork shall be constructed to the shape, lines and dimensions of the members as
required by the plans and specifications.
B. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of the mortar.
C. Forms shall be properly braced and/or tied together so as to maintain position and shape
during the concrete placement.
D. Form oil shall be applied to the forms before the forms are set in place.
E. All forms shall be cleaned and re-oiled before re-use.
F. Form ties shall have a minimum break back of 1" from the wall surface after form
removal. Job fabricated wire ties will not be allowed.
G. Use forms with no surface defects on wall surfaces to be exposed in the finished structure.
Use care to insure that form joints are tight, forms are well braced and true to lines and
grade for these areas.
3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Wall forms may be removed 48 hours after placing the concrete.
B. Removal of forms shall be in a manner to insure safety of the structure and prevent
damage to the concrete surfaces.
C. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to the structure caused by
premature removal of forms.
END OF SECTION
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The work covered by this section includes the furnishing of all labor, material, equipment
and incidentals and the performing of all operations in connection with Concrete
Reinforcement as indicated on the drawings and/or herein specified. All work shall be
subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract and applicable portions of the General
Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Formwork — Section 03 10 00
B. Cast-in-Place Concrete — Section 03 30 00
1.03 GENERAL REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following specifications, latest edition with current amendments, shall be part of this
specification section, even though not fully set forth herein:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
2. ACI 318-05, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. "Manual of Standard Practice," Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
4. Other ACI and ASTM Specifications noted herein.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. One transparency and three prints of reinforcing steel placing drawings and bar lists shall
be furnished, as per Section 1300, before concrete work commences. Drawings shall be in
accordance with ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures." Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing steel shall be new Grade 60 deformed bars of domestic manufacture, meeting
the requirements of ASTM A615.
B. Tie wire shall be 16-gauge or heavier, black annealed wire.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Welded wire fabric shall be 6 x 6 x W2.9 x 2.9 furnished in flat sheets meeting the
requirements of ASTM A185.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
A. All hooks and bends shall conform to minimum diameters of bend in the ACI Code.
B. All bars shall be bent cold.
C. Reinforcing bars shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown on the plans and
within the fabrication tolerances as shown in the "Manual of Standard Practice."
3.02 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL
A. The placement of reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318.
B. Bars shall be securely tied to prevent displacement during the concrete placement.
C. Bar spacings, splicing lengths and placing tolerances shall conform to the requirements of
ACI 318.
D. Welding of reinforcing will not be permitted.
E. Concrete block inserts, bricks, stones, wood blocks and other similar materials shall not be
used to support reinforcement.
END OF SECTION
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data, concrete mix designs and laboratory test reports.
B. Comply with ASTM C 94; ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete"; ACI 117,
"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials"; and CRSI's "Manual
of Standard Practice."
C. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to design concrete mixes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
C. Steel Welded-Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheets not rolls.
D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
E. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F.
F. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded.
G. Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C 1116, Type III, synthetic fibers, 1/2 to 1 inch (13 to 25 mm).
H. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
I. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, mid-range water reducing.
J. Water Stops: Flat dumbbell or center-bulb type, of either rubber (CRD C 513) or PVC
(CRD C 572).
K. Vapor Retarder: Reinforced polyethylene 15 mil sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, Stego brand
or approved equal.
L. Slip-Resistive Aggregate: Factory-produced, rustproof, nonglazing, fused aluminum-oxide

granules or crushed emery, unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
M. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork.
2.2 CONCRETE STRENGTH AND SLUMP
A. The mixture, slump and concrete strength for various portions of the structure shall be as
follows:
Type of Construc- Aggregate Size, Compressive Maximum

tion inches Strength, psi Slump, inches
Footings and foun- 3/4 4000 4

dation walls
Interior slabs-on- 1 2500 3.5
grade
Slabs on metal deck 3/4 3000 3.5
Exterior slabs and 3/4 4000 3.5
walks
Fully bonded con- 3/8 4000 3
crete overlay
B. The slump for slabs-on-grade and slabs on metal deck where pumping of concrete is employed
shall be as follows:
1. Maximum slump coming out of the truck (prior to the addition of plasticizing
agents): 3-1/2 inches, maximum.
2. Maximum slump at the discharge end of the hose (after the addition of plasticizing
agents): 5-1/2 inches, maximum.
C. Where superplasticizer is added to concrete being used in the full-bonded overlay process,
the concrete slump should be no more than 1 to 2 inches before superplasticizer is added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETING
A. Construct formwork and maintain tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 117 limits of
Class A for concrete exposed to view and Class C for other concrete surfaces.
B. Set water stops where indicated to ensure joint watertightness.
C. Place vapor retarder on prepared subgrade, with joints lapped 6 inches (150 mm) and sealed.
D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement.
E. Install construction, isolation, and contraction joints where indicated. Install full-depth joint-
filler strips at isolation joints.

BETHEL, MAINE
F. Place concrete in a continuous operation and consolidate using mechanical vibrating equipment.
G. Protect concrete from physical damage, premature drying, and reduced strength due to hot or
cold weather during mixing, placing, and curing.
H. Formed Surface Finish: Smooth-formed finish for concrete exposed to view, coated, or covered
by waterproofing or other direct-applied material; rough-formed finish elsewhere.
I. Slab Finishes: Troweled finish for floor surfaces and floors to receive floor coverings,
paint, or other thin film-finish coatings, trowel and fine-broom finish for surfaces to
receive thin-set tile, Nonslip-broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps.
J. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over
initially floated surfaces; tamp and float. Expose nonslip aggregate after curing.
K. Uniformly spread 100 lb/100 sq. ft. (49 kg/10 sq. m) of mineral dry-shake floor hardener over
initially floated surfaces, repeat float finishing to embed each application, and then apply a
trowel finish.
L. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing for at least seven days.
M. Begin curing concrete slabs after finishing. Keep concrete continuously moist for at least
seven days, cover with PNA Hydracure Curing Cover.
N. Owner will engage a testing agency to perform field tests and to submit test reports. Owner is
responsible for testing and report fees. Contractor shall coordinate testing with all concrete
placements once testing agent is engaged by owner.
O. Protect concrete from damage. Repair surface defects in formed concrete and slabs.
P. Repair slabs not meeting surface tolerances by grinding high areas and by applying a repair
underlayment to low areas receiving floor coverings and a repair topping to low areas to remain
exposed.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 05 52 00
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Structural Performance: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding structural loads
required by ASCE 7.
B. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Aluminum, Extruded Bar and Tube: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26 (ASTM B 26M), Alloy A356-T6.
C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior

applications.
B. Glass: Tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048
1. Thickness: ½”
2.3 RAILING SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers
1. Blumcraft
2. Julius Blum & Co, Inc.
2.4 FABRICATION
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05 52 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Assemble railing systems in shop to the greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
B. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending or mitering at elbow bends as

required to achieve change of direction.
C. Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members by welding .

1. 1-1/2” diameter aluminum rail
D. Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to
connect handrail and railing members to other construction.
1. Bracket style: based on WBNC Wall bracket by Blumcraft.
E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.
F. Glass railing system: use Julius Blum cap, 3" brushed aluminum, part 1137 and brushed
aluminum shoe, JB 6063
G. Exterior rails: use Connect-o-rail style by Julius Blum & Co. Inc.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Aluminum Railings: Brushed finish
Class I, clear anodic finish; AA-M12C22A41; complying with AAMA 611
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation and free from rack.
C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with cementitious materials or
dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Anchor posts in concrete by forming or core-drilling holes 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch
(20 mm) greater than OD of post. Fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05 52 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The work covered by this section shall include but is not restricted to the following:
1. Nailers, blocking, rough bucks, furring, etc.

2. Cutting and patching for all trades.
3. Rough hardware.
4. Wood preservative.
5. Wood framing.
6. Roof and wall sheathing.
7. Subflooring
B. Any carpentry work or materials which are necessary or required for the thorough
completion of the Work, unless specified as work by others, shall be done by this
Contractor.
A.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Metal Plate Connector Wood Trusses - Section 06 17 53
B. Architectural Woodwork - Section 06 40 00
C. Building Insulation - Section 07 20 00
D. Gypsum Board - Section 09 29 00
1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Lumber Standards and Grade-Marking: Each piece of framing lumber and each board
shall comply with the American Lumber Standards, SPR 16, and with specific grading
requirements of the association recognized as covering the species used and under whose
grading rules it is produced. Each piece of framing lumber and each board shall be
identified by the grade-mark of a recognized association or independent inspection
agency. Such association or independent inspection agency shall be certified by the Board
of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, Washington, D.C., to grade the
species. Lumber shall comply with U.S. Product Standard PS-20, and plywood shall
comply with U.S. Product Standards PS-1 and PS-2. Wood preservative treatments shall
comply with the following standards of the American Wood Preservers Association: U1-
03 and T1-03.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. All materials when delivered to the site shall be so piled and stored to insure proper
drainage, ventilation and protection from the elements. No kiln-dried materials shall be
placed in any building until the building is sufficiently dry.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber species and grades:
1. Framing lumber shall be of those species and grades meeting the stress grade
requirements indicated. All rough lumber shall be dressed four sides, dried to a
moisture content not exceeding 19%, well seasoned, straight, sound, and free from
excessive splits, checks, shakes and wane.
2. Lumber indicated as SP or PT will be Southern Pine minimum No. 2 grade bearing a

SPIB grade stamp with design values for visually graded lumber 2 to 4 inches thick
as published in Table 4B of the 2001 Supplement to the National Design
Specification for Wood Construction and Table 4D of the same publication for
visually graded timbers 5 inches by 5 inches and larger.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, lumber for studs, joists and rafters shall be Spruce-Pine-
Fir #1/#2 graded according to NLGA rules with base design properties for lumber 2
to 4 inches thick as published in Table 4A of the 2001 Supplement to the National
Design Specification for Wood Construction and Table 4D of the same publication
for visually graded timbers 5 inches by 5 inches and larger.
4. The Contractor shall provide certification of lumber and timber species and grades to
the Architect in advance of any rough carpentry work on this project. Ungraded,
unstamped lumber will not be accepted.
B. Sheathing:
1. Exterior roof sheathing: APA rated panels trademarked Standard with exterior glue;
3/4-inch thick with 40/20 APA span rating. Provide approved panel clips for all
unsupported edges of roof sheathing.
2. Exterior wall sheathing: APA-rated panels trademarked Standard with exterior glue.
Use 1/2-inch thick panels with 32/16 span rating.
C. Pressure treated Southern Pine (PT):
1. AWPA Use Category UC2: Sill plates, studs and other wood-based materials used
for interior construction that are not in contact with the ground but may be exposed to
dampness. Refer to AWPA Standards C2, C15, C31.
2. AWPA Use Categories UC3A and UC3B: Wood and wood-based materials used in
exterior construction but are not in contact with the ground such as pressure-treated
decking. Refer to AWPA Standards C2 and C15.
3. AWPA Use Category UC4A: Wood and wood-based materials used in contact with
the ground such as deck posts, perimeter deck framing and joists. Refer to AWPA
Standards C2 and C15.

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Rough hardware shall include all nails, bolts, anchors, joist hangers, screws and other
fastenings required to complete the work. All fastenings used on exterior of the building
shall be galvanized. Wood connectors shall be accepted by the Building Officials and
Code Administrators International Inc. (BOCA). Provide galvanized framing connectors
and joist and beam hangers of size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each
use including recommended nails. Provide connectors and hangers as manufactured by
Simpson Strong Tie Co. Inc. or approved equivalent. Insure that fasteners and connectors
are compatible with those chemicals used for pressure treatment and are appropriately
galvanized.
E. Typical furring/strapping shall be 1 x 3 spruce unless otherwise noted on drawings.
F. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Vertical laminated lumber of sizes indicated as

manufactured by Boise-Cascade Corporation or approved equivalent.
G. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): Parallam manufactured by Trus Joist, MacMillan,

Weyerhaeuser or approved equivalent.
H. Engineered Wood I-Joist (TJI): manufactured by Trus Joist, MacMillan, Weyerhaeuser or

approved equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and
verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence.
B. Verify that rough carpentry may be performed in accordance with the original design and
all pertinent codes and regulations.
C. In event of discrepancy, notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation until all
such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. Ladders and scaffolding shall be procured, erected and maintained as required for the
work herein specified, and all such material and equipment shall be removed upon
completion of work.
B. Materials shall be erected in plumb level, and workmanlike manner, cut, fitted, coped,
scribed as required.
C. Framing, blocking, etc., shall be secured in a safe, solid and permanent manner using
appropriate types of fastenings.
D. Set all blocking required to erect surface mounted items, including all exterior and interior
woodwork, door stops, plumbing, electrical and other mechanical equipment, pipes, rough
bucks and all blocking required for roofing work.

BETHEL, MAINE
E. Joists shall have a minimum bearing of four inches. Joists framing into wood beams and
girders shall be carried on joist hangers. Where joists bear on beams, lap joists and spike
together at bearings. Frame openings with headers and trimmers as detailed.
F. Wood sills, grounds, and other lumber in contact with exterior concrete, including all
blocking for roofing work and all wood nailers as called for on the drawings, shall be
pressure-treated.
G. Install sheathing with face grain across supports. Stagger end joints a minimum of 32”.
Nail 6" o.c. along panel edge and 12" o.c. at intermediate supports with 8d common nails.
Stagger panel end joints. On roof panels only, install panel clips at edges of all
unsupported edges.
H. Provide solid wood blocking for mounting of handicap accessories, cabinets, door stops,
mechanical and electrical items, and all other surface-mounted items.
3.03 CLEANING UP
A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe and orderly condition at all times during execution of
this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut ends and debris.
B. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep all surfaces
where refuse from this portion of the work has settled.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 06 17 53
METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding

design loads indicated without exceeding TPI 1 deflection limits.
B. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and structural analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that

involves inspection by SPIB, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Comply with TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Construction"; TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing &
Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses"; and applicable requirements in AFPA's
"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review, any species, graded visually or mechanically.
B. Connector Plates: TPI 1, fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation; Designation SS, Grade 33, and not less
than 0.036 inch thick.
C. Fasteners: Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Provide framing anchors made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Assemble trusses using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with
joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design
camber indicated.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. Install trusses
plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.
B. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through
each fastener hole in metal framing anchor.
C. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. Anchor trusses to
girder trusses.
D. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
E. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances of ANSI/TPI 1.
F. Do not cut or remove truss members.
G. Remove wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements and replace with trusses
that do meet requirements.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06 17 53 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 06 40 10
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Shop Drawings.
B. Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality

Standards.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Preservative Treatment: Comply with NWWDA I.S.4 for items indicated to receive water-
repellent preservative treatment.
D. Fasteners for Exterior Woodwork: Stainless-steel nails.
2.2 EXTERIOR WOODWORK
A. Complete fabrication before shipping to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble
only as needed for shipping and installing. Where necessary for fitting at Project site, provide
for scribing and trimming.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished Work.
C. Exterior Standing and Running Trim: Premium grade, made from western red cedar.
D. Exterior Ornamental Work: Premium grade, made from western red cedar.
E. Exterior Frames and Jambs: Premium grade, made from western red cedar
F. Exterior Finish Decking: CorrectDeck or approved equal.
G. Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of specified wood primer. Backprime with
one coat of primer; two coats on items installed over concrete or masonry.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 10 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
H. Shop seal woodwork for transparent finish with stain (if required), other required pretreatments,
and first coat of specified finish. Backprime with one coat of sealer compatible with finish; two
coats on items installed over concrete or masonry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for grade specified.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, seal cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces to greatest extent
possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 10 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 06 40 20
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data for solid-surfacing materials, Shop Drawings and Samples showing
the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish.
B. Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality

Standards."
C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is completed, and HVAC system is operating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
E. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
F. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Comply with LMA SAT---1.
G. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1. Products:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Lamin-Art.
c. Nevamar Decorative Surfaces.
d. Pionite Decorative Surfaces .
e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Hardware Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK06 40 20 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1. Finish: Satin Chrome: BHMA 626 or BHMA 652.
C. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood lumber, kiln dried to 15 percent
moisture content.
2.3 INTERIOR WOODWORK
A. Complete fabrication before shipping to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble
only as needed for shipping and installing. Where necessary for fitting at Project site, provide
for scribing and trimming.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished Work.
C. Interior Standing and Running Trim for Opaque Finish: Economy grade, made from Poplar.
D. Wood Cabinets (Casework) for Transparent Finish: Economy grade.
1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

2. WIC Construction Style: Frameless
3. WIC Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay
4. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: birch
5. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed
panels.
6. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood, stained to match exposed surfaces
7. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood
E. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: Economy grade.
1. Laminate Grade: HGS for flat countertops, HGP for post-formed countertops.
2. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces
2.4 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.
B. Finish architectural woodwork at the fabrication shop; defer only final touch up until after
installation.
1. Apply one coat of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply one coat
to back of paneling.
2. Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and
finishing.
3. After staining, if any, apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess.
Tint filler to match stained wood.
C. Transparent Finish: AWI Finish System TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane.

BETHEL, MAINE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Condition woodwork to prevailing conditions before installing.
B. Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for grade specified.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, seal cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces to greatest extent
possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
F. Anchor countertops securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall.
G. Anchor paneling to supports with concealed panel-hanger clips and by blind nailing on back-up
strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing.
H. Stairwork and Rails: Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers and securely anchor to
supporting substrates. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages.
Glue and wedge treads and risers to housed stringers. Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads
and railings, and railings to newel posts.
3.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal;
BHMA A156.9, B01361 for flush doors and BHMA A156.9, B01521 for overlay doors.
B. Concealed (European-Type) Hinges: BHMA A156.9, B01602, with soft close devices.
C. Pulls: bar pulls, 12-18” inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter.
D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, BHMA A156.9,
B04081.
F. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, soft close, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 and rated for the following loads:
1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf (440 N).

2. File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf (890 N).
3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf (200 N).
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

BETHEL, MAINE
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-inch-OD brown, molded-plastic

grommets with brown plastic cap.
J. Paper Slots: 12 inches long by 1-3/4 inches wide by 1 inch deep; brown, molded-plastic, paper-
slot liner with 1/4-inch lip.

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 11 13
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing:
1. Products:
a. Euclid
b. Karnak Corporation.
c. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
2. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.

3. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
4. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces
building interior . Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing,
and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing.
1. Install flashings at corners, changes in plane, construction joints, and cracks, by

embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat
of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to
other coats required.
2. Provide cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
3. Cold-Applied Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing:
a. On concrete, apply two brush or spray coats, one fibered brush or spray coat, or
one trowel coat.
b. On unparged masonry, apply primer and two brush or spray coats .
D. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe
of exterior masonry cavity walls.
1. Apply primer and one brush or spray coat of emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 11 13 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 13 00
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and product test reports.
B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized, approved, or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 60-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of

rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive
side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with
VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Products:
a. Fiberweb 200
b. Flex-Flash by Hohmann & Barnard
B. Auxiliary Materials: Primer, sheet flashing, liquid membrane, substrate patching membrane,
mastic, adhesives, tape, and metal termination bars recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer.
1. Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate.

2. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate.
C. Protection Course: Semirigid sheet with reinforced asphaltic core, 1/8 inch thick.
D. Composite Drainage Panels: Permeable geotextile laminated to a three-dimensional, molded-

plastic-sheet drainage core.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for
waterproofing application.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
C. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks.
D. Bridge and cover expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with
overlapping sheet strips. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly
adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.
E. Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
G. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
H. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry.
I. Apply and firmly adhere sheets. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch
minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps.
J. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all
directions.
K. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane before starting subsequent construction
operations.
L. Place and secure drainage panels to substrate without penetrating waterproofing. Lap edges and
ends of geotextile.
M. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during construction.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 14 10
FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General
Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Fluid applied waterproofing system
2. Composite membrane
3. Prefabricated drainage composite
B. System Description: The fluid applied composite sheet membrane waterproofing system shall consist of the
following:
1. Fluid Applied Membrane: A minimum thickness as per section 3.03 of a two-component self-curing
synthetic rubber waterproofing membrane
2. Composite Membrane: 3-layer reinforced composite membrane fully embedded into fluid-applied
membrane with end laps and sidelaps taped with self-adhering waterproofing membrane.
3. Accessories and Materials for complete waterproofing application
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text. The most
recent version of these standards is implied unless otherwise stated.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C 836 Standard Specification for High Solids, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing
Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course
C 898 Standard Guide for Use of High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric
Waterproofing Membrane With Separate Wearing Course
D 412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension
D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds
D 1644 Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Varnishes
D 1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials
Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection
D 3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurements of Dimensions
D 4833 Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and
Related Products
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM FOUNDATION 07 14 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
D 1709 Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Films by the Free Falling Dart
Method
D 882 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting
E 96 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and
recommendations.
B. Shop drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing including details for terminations and
flashings, projections, penetrations, drains and treatment of substrate joints and cracks.
C. Written documentation demonstrating installers qualifications under the "Quality Assurance" article
including reference projects of a similar scope.
D. Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions stated in Section 1.7.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Waterproofing systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum of
20 years’ experience in the production and sales of waterproofing. The fluid applied composite sheet
membrane waterproofing system must be supplied by single manufacturer. Manufacturers proposed for
use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet all requirements
specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five
years.
B. Installer: The installer shall demonstrate qualifications to perform the work of this Section by
submitting the following:
1. Certification or written license from the Waterproofing Manufacturer that the Installer is a
trained applicator.
2. List of at least three (3) projects contracted within the past five (5) years of similar scope and
complexity to this project.
3. Installer must show evidence of adequate equipment and trained field personnel to
successfully complete the project in a timely manner.
4. Installer’s credentials must be approved by both the Architect and the Waterproofing
Materials Manufacturer.
C. Materials: Fluid applied composite sheet membrane waterproofing system shall be by single source
manufacturer and shall consist of fluid applied waterproofing material, a two part synthetic rubber based
system free of isocyanates and bitumen and a composite sheet, a three-layer co-extruded biaxially oriented
HDPE integrally bonded to a non-woven geotextile. For each type of material required for the work of this
section, provide primary materials that are the products of one manufacturer.
C. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field
operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work
with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of surface preparation, minimum
curing period, installation procedures, special details and flashings, inspection, testing, protection and
repair procedures.
D. Inspection and Testing: All areas shall be water tested following application and be inspected an individual
trained and approved by the waterproofing systems manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in the original, unopened containers with seals unbroken, labeled with the
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture and directions for storage and use.

B. Store and handle materials in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations and
material safety data sheets. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and
construction operations. Remove damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with
applicable regulations.
1. Do not double-stack pallets of waterproofing on the job site. Provide cover on top and all
sides, allowing for adequate ventilation.
2. Store drainage composite or protection board flat and off the ground. Provide cover on top
and all sides.
3. Protect waterproofing materials from freezing.
4. Store composite membrane. The composite membrane should be stored off the ground and
not stacked more than 12 rolls high. Provide cover for material to protect top and sides
C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the
manufacturer of the materials and products used.
B. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in
condition to receive membrane waterproofing.
C. Do not allow waste products (i.e. petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat,
acids, etc.) to come into contact with the waterproofing membrane. Any exposure to foreign materials or
chemical discharges must be presented to the Membrane Manufacturer to determine the impact on the
waterproofing assembly performance.
D. Deck/Wall Preparation: refer to Section 3.2 Substrate Preparation
E. General contractor shall assure adequate protection and ventilation during the application of the
Waterproofing assembly.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Fluid-Applied Sheet and Waterproofing System: Upon completion of the fluid-applied and sheet
waterproofing system, the contractor must submit a written warranty for the waterproofing materials signed
by the Waterproofing Manufacturer.
B. Warranties available from the manufacturer. Please see manufacturer specific written warranty documents
for specifics (Choose one):
Material Warranty:
Manufacturer’s standard 5-year material warranty
Manufacturer’s standard 10-year material warranty
Watertightness Warranty:
Manufacturer’s standard 10-year watertightness warranty
Manufacturer’s standard 15-year watertightness warranty.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
All waterproofing materials shall be manufactured and supplied by:
Grace Construction Products, 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, MA.
2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fluid Applied Waterproofing Membranes: Procor® 75 fluid applied membrane by Grace Construction
Products; a two part, self-curing, synthetic rubber based material. Procor® fluid applied membranes meet
or exceed the performance requirements of ASTM C 836 and other ASTM standards as shown in the
following table.
B. Waterproofing Membrane Physical Properties:
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES FOR PROCOR® FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANES:

Property Test Method Typical Value
Color Terra Cotta
Minimum Cured Film ASTM D 3767 Method A 3.0 mm (120 mils)
Thickness
Solids Content ASTM D 1644 100%
Flexibility, 180° bend over ASTM D 1970 Unaffected
25 mm (1 in.) mandrel at
32°C (-25°F)
Elongation ASTM D 412 500% minimum
Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 Modified1 880 N/m (5 lbs/in.)
Low temperature flexibility ASTM C 836 Pass
and crack bridging - 3.2mm
(1/8 in.) cracked cycled at -
26°C (-15°F)
Extensibility over 6.4 mm ASTM C 836 Pass
(1/4 in.) crack after heat
aging
Puncture Resistance ASTM D 4833 170 N (38 lbs)
Footnote:
1.Procor waterproofing membrane is applied to concrete and allowed to cure. Peel adhesion of the membrane
is measured at a rate of 50 mm (2 in.) per minute with a peel angle of 90° at room temperature.
C. Composite Sheet Membrane: Procor Composite Membrane as supplied by Grace Construction Products, a
16-mil, cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene membrane.
D. Composite Sheet Membrane Physical Properties:
Property Test Method Typical Value
Color Terra Cotta
Thickness 0.9 mm (36 mils)
Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 3912 grams
Tensile Strength ASTM D 882 136 lbs/in
Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 0.030
E. Prefabricated Drainage Composite (Edit to project requirements): Hydroduct® 660 Drainage Composite
by Grace Construction Products for horizontal surfaces. Hydroduct 220 Drainage Composite by Grace
Construction Products for all vertical surfaces. Drainage composite shall be designed to promote positive
drainage while serving as a protection course.
F. Concrete Sealer (optional depending on substrate conditions): Procor Concrete Sealer by Grace
Construction Products for concrete surfaces likely to produce outgassing during drying process.
G. Composite Sheet Lap Sealing: Bituthene Low Temperature Membrane by Grace Construction Products, a
60 mil self-adhering waterproofing comprising 56 mils of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to a 4 mil
high density cross-laminated polyethylene film.

H. Waterstop: AdcorTM ES hydrophilic non-bentonite waterstop by Grace Construction Products for non-
moving concrete construction joints
I. Miscellaneous Materials: Tape and other accessories specified or acceptable to manufacturer of fluid
applied waterproofing membrane.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work is to be
performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of
the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES
A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be
structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove
contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and
debris. Use repair materials and methods that are acceptable to manufacturer of the fluid applied
waterproofing.
B. Tie-holes and “bugholes” larger than 13 mm (1/2”) in diameter or deeper than 3 mm (1/8”), or both, should
be either pretreated with Procor or repaired with a lean concrete mix or with a lean concrete mix or grout.
See ASTM D 5295, Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for Adhered Membrane Waterproofing Systems, for
further details on substrate preparation.
C. Cracked, pitted, honeycombed or heavily bugholed surfaces can be filled by spraying from close in (10” to
12”) but high material usage with result. Under these circumstances it may be more efficient to fill the
surface with a parge coat of lean mortar mix before application of the Procor. It is also acceptable to fill in
gaps with a compatible sealant or caulk.
D. Cast-In-Place Concrete Substrates:
1. For horizontal applications, poured in-place concrete must be cast with a minimum slope to
drain of 11 mm/m (1/8 in./ft). and must be monolithic, smooth, and free of unapproved curing
compounds, form release agents and other surface contaminants.
2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface.
3. Repair bugholes over 13 mm (0.5 in.) in length and 6 mm (0.25 in.) deep and finish flush
with surrounding surface.
4. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area.
5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface.
E. Pre-cast Concrete Decks: All pre-cast units shall be mechanically fixed to minimize the potential for
differential movement and all joints shall be grouted.
F. Masonry Substrates: Apply waterproofing over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel-cut mortar
joints or parge coat.
G. Substrate Cleaning:
a) Thoroughly sweep the substrate that is to receive the waterproofing membrane.
b) Substrate must also be blown using oil free air to remove any remaining loose debris.
c) A final check to determine if the substrate is sufficiently clean is to apply a test patch of
membrane and check its adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the
following:
1. Vertical Application Fluid Applied Membrane
a) Detailing: Apply a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm (60 mils) over all detail areas
(including inside corners, outside corners, pipe penetrations, cracks, construction joints,
etc) prior to application of the field of the membrane.
b) Apply a minimum thickness of 2.3 mm (90 mils) over all vertical areas to be
waterproofed and lapping a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) onto pre-treated detail areas.
Perform wet film thickness tests as work progresses to confirm thickness.
2. Horizontal Application Fluid Applied Membrane
a) Detailing: Apply a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm (60 mils), or as per manufacturer’s
drawings and written application instructions, over all detail areas (including inside
corners, outside corners, pipe penetrations, cracks, construction joints, etc) prior to
application of the field of the membrane
b) Apply a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm (60 mils) over all horizontal areas to be
waterproofed and lapping a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) onto detail areas. Perform wet
film thickness tests as work progresses to confirm thickness.
c) Apply a second coat at a minimum thickness of 0.75 mm (30 mils) over first coat and
completely covering all detail areas to give a minimum total thickness of 2.25 mm (90
mils) in the field and 3.75 mm (150 mils) at detail areas. Perform wet film thickness tests
as work progresses to confirm thickness.
3. Composite Sheet Membrane Application:
a) Cut Procor Composite Sheet Membrane into manageable widths and lengths to
achieve full horizontal coverage. Apply Procor Composite Sheet Membrane into wet
or tacky Procor, geotextile side embedded into Procor. Apply pressure using a hand
roller or broom to fully adhere Procor Composite Sheet Membrane for full contact
into the Procor.
b) Join adjacent sheets of Procor Composite Sheet Membrane by “butting” sidelaps.
c) At sidelaps and endlaps, adhere a 12” wide strip of Bituthene Low Temperature
Membrane, using a roller to provide fully contact to Procor Composite Sheet
Membrane. Overlap Bituthene strips minimum 2”, apply in manner to provide
watersheding effect.
d) Treat all edges of Bituthene Membrane with Liquid Membrane.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials that would be exposed
in the completed work.
B. A protection course should always be installed as soon as possible after completion of the
waterproofing installation and flood testing to protect the membrane from mechanical damage and
UV.
C. Install any protection, drainage and insulation courses according to the manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 20 00
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, and as follows:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less where exposed; otherwise, as indicated in Part 2

"Insulation Products" Article.
2. Smoked-Developed Index: 450 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:

1. Dow Chemical Company.
2. Owens Corning.
3. Tenneco Building Products.
B. Sprayed Cellulose Insulation:

1. K-13 by International Cellulose
C. Foamed-in-Place Insulation:
1. Polycel One by Grace
2. Froth-Pak by Insta-Foam Products, Inc.
3. Corbond III by Johns Manville Corporation
4. BASF Comfort Foam
D. Fiberglass batt (formaldehyde free):

1. Johns Manville
2. Owens Corning
E. Formaldehyde Free Basement Wall Insulation:

1. Johns Manville
F. Vapor Barrier (underslab):

1. Stego
G. Air Infiltration Barrier:

1. Tyvek Commercial Wrap D by Dupont.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM BUILDING INSULATION 07 20 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
2.2 INSULATION PRODUCTS
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, with flame-spread index of 75
or less.
B. Foil-Faced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, faced on

both sides with aluminum foil, with flame-spread index of 75 or less.
C. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied, Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, wood-based cellulosic

fiber, Type II, applied with dry adhesive activated by water during installation; chemically
treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.
D. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type I urethane foam insulation, with flame spread
index of 15 or less, and smoke development index of 75 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene, 6 mils thick.
B. Propavent: or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R-values indicated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.
B. Place loose-fill insulation to comply with ASTM C 1015.
1. Comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's Special Report #3,
"Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
C. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in
place with adhesives or other anchorage. Locate seams at framing members, overlap, and seal
with tape.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM BUILDING INSULATION 07 20 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 31 10
ORGANIC ROOFING SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Section includes, but is not limited to: roofing shingles, underlayment, flashing and edge
treatment.
1.02 Related Sections
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100

B. Fully Adhered Membrane Roofing: Section 07502
C. Flashing and Sheet Metal: Section 07600
1.03 References
A. ASTM D 225, Type I (Heavy Duty)

B. ASTM D 1922 Tear Strength: min. 2000g
C. ASTM D 3161, Wind Resistance Self-Sealing
D. UL 790 Class C Fire Resistance
E. ASTM E 108 Class C Fire Resistance
1.05 Submittals
A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers printed information and installation instructions on

siding products and accessories.
C. Samples: Provide 3 samples of siding products in colors specified, not less than 12 inches
in length.
1.06 Quality Assurance
A. Installer: Provide installer with not less than three years of experience with products
specified.
1.07 Warranty
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 30 year limited warranty.
1.08 Job Conditions

A. Apply roofing in dry weather.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ORGANIC ROOFING SHINGLES 07 31 10

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Do not apply roofing when temperature is below 40 degrees F., or when roof deck or
underlayment is wet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturer: IKO Crowne 30, or approved equal.
2.02 Materials
A. Composition and Materials: shingles are composed of an organic felt base, saturated and
coated with specially refined, water-resistant asphalt in which ceramic-coated mineral
granules are tightly embedded. Shingles shall be of one-piece construction and have self-
sealing adhesive. Shingles to be three tab. Weight to be minimum 254 lbs per square.
Dimensions (overall): 13 1/4” x 39”

Shingles/Square: 64
Weather Exposure: 5 5/8”
Nails: galvanized roofing nails, Four nails are required per shingle. They are to be
located 5/8” above the top of each cutout and 1” in from each side of the shingle. Nails
must be of sufficient length to penetrate into the deck ¾” or through the thickness of the
decking, whichever is less. Nails are to be 11 or 12 gauge, corrosion-resistant roofing
nails with 3/8” heads.
B. Underlayment: No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt. A single layer of shingle
underlayment (ASTM D 4869, Type I) is required. See details for corrosion-resistant drip
edge.
C. Ice and Water Shield Membrane: 40 mil self-adhering rubberized asphalt membrane
bonded to embossed polyethylene sheeting, as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co. Drip
edge should be placed over the membrane at the rake and beneath the membrane at the
eaves.
D. Flashing and counter flashing: 16 oz. cold rolled cornice temper copper conforming to
ASTM-B-101, Type I, Class A. Nails shall be dull bronze w/ large flat heads.
E. Ridge Vent: Varcom commercial quality by Alcoa, or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Shingle application
A. Commencement of work indicates acceptance of substrate.
B. Apply one layer of underlayment horizontally over roof area. Lap edges and ends,
nailing to roof to provide full double coverage of entire roof.
C. Install drip edge at eaves and other roof edges as indicated.
D. Where roofing meets vertical surfaces, provide copper step flashing at each shingle
course.
E. Fastening: Application method is the 6 Course, 6” Stepped-Off Diagonal Method found
on each bundle of shingles.

BETHEL, MAINE
F. Hips and Ridges: Use shingles for capping hips and ridges.
G. Fasten shingles with nails by hand. Use of pneumatic nailers or of staples will not be
allowed.
H. Apply two courses of 36” wide ice and water shield membrane at eaves, hips, ridges, and
as detailed in the drawings. Lap side edges 3 ½” and end joints 6”.
I. Where stacks or vents pass through roof, cement shingles to flange of sheet metal sleeve
with bituminous plastic cement.
3.02 Sheet metal work and flashing shall be formed accurately and shall be constructed neatly
and securely reinforced and stiffened as required to present and maintain true and regular
surfaces. Drip edges shall be as detailed. Expansion joints shall be provided as required
by characteristics of material used.
3.03 Where two materials are in contact, electrolytic action shall be prevented by coating the
surface of both metals with heavy bodied aluminum paint or by other approved means.
3.04 Clean up
A. No rubbish will be allowed to accumulate.
B. Rubbish will be lowered by way of chutes or taken down on hoists or lowered in
receptacles. No rubbish will be allowed to be thrown or dropped from one level to
another.
C. At completion of roofing work, remove all excess roofing materials and containers, clean
bitumen smears and droppings from all surfaces.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 46 46
CEMENT FIBER SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiber-cement siding.
2. Fiber-cement trim.
3. Drainage Mat
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Selection: For siding, soffit and trim including related accessories.
1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding.

2. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of siding, from manufacturer.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for fiber-cement siding.
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and related accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by
a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain siding and soffit, including related accessories, from single source
from single manufacturer.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CEMENT FIBER SIDING 07 46 46 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding and
soffit that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming, and fading.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by

manufacturer, of more than 4 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to
ASTM D 2244.
3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish full lengths of siding and soffit including related accessories, in a quantity equal
to 2 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM
A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested
according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Cemplank.
b. CertainTeed Corp.

BETHEL, MAINE
c. James Hardie.
2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 7-1/4 to 7-1/2 inches wide in plain style.
a. Texture: Smooth.
3. Vertical Pattern: 48-inch- wide sheets with wood-grain texture and grooves 8 inches o.c.
4. Panel Texture: 48-inch- wide sheets with wood-grain texture.
5. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer.
6. Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard acrylic finish.
B. Trim: Provide matching material and finish to siding material. Provide 1 inch thick trim stock.
C. Drainage Mat:
Tyvek Commercial Wrap D
2.2 ACCESSORIES
D. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, and other items as recommended by siding
manufacturer for building configuration.
E. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing at window and door heads.
1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Mill finish.
F. Fasteners:
1. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding and soffit and related accessories.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding and soffit manufacturer's written installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Do not install damaged components.
B. Install drainage mat per manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Install fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories.
1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches Insert dimension o.c.
D. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce a
weathertight installation.
E. Where aluminum siding will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new
materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean
condition during construction.

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 53 23
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product data and samples of roofing materials. Shop Drawings of tapered
insulation.
B. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A.
C. Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, signed by roofing

manufacturer agreeing to repair leaks due to defects in materials or workmanship for period of
15 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
B. EPDM Sheet
1. Carlisle Syntec Systems; Carlisle Corp.

2. Firestone Building Products Co.
3. GAF
4. Versico, Inc.
C. Rigid Insulation: Manufacturer as required by the membrane manufacturer for total system
warranty.
D. Roof Drains: Zurn, or approved equal. (DRAIN PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY

ROOFER. PIPING AND CONNECTION TO ROOF DRAIN PROVIDED BY
PLUMBER)
E. Fascia System: Manufacturer as required by the membrane manufacturer for total system
warranty.
2.2 ROOFING MATERIALS
A. EPDM Sheet: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced; 60 mils thick; black.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 13 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Auxiliary Materials: Recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and as
follows:
1. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM.

2. Seaming Material: Synthetic-rubber-polymer primer and 3-inch-wide minimum, butyl
splice tape with release film.
C. Substrate Board: ¾” EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD.
2.3 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II.
B. Fabricate tapered insulation with slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints continuous and perpendicular to roof slopes with end
joints staggered. Tightly butt substrate boards together and fasten to steel deck.
B. Mechanically fasten each layer of insulation to deck.
C. Install EPDM sheet according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as
follows:
1. Adhered Sheet Installation: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet.
D. Seams: Clean and prime splices areas, applying splice tape,and firmly roll side and end laps of
overlapping sheets. Seal exposed edges of sheet terminations.
E. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates. Protect
roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
F. Correct deficiencies in or remove and reinstall roofing and sheet flashing that does not comply
with requirements.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 13 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
B. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and
profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL
A. Copper: ASTM B 370; Temper H00 or H01, cold rolled, not less than 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm
thick).
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, temper
suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14; not less than
0.040 inch thick; and finished as follows:
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard system with topcoat containing

not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 2604.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, with No. 2D finish; not less than
0.0156 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
D. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead-soft, fully
annealed stainless-steel sheet, coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50
percent tin); not less than 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
E. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet, minimum thickness of
0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) except at least 0.0937 inch (2.4 mm) thick for applications where burning
(welding) is involved.
2.2 FLASHING AND TRIM
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1
BETHEL, MAINE
A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other
characteristics of the item indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
B. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50.
C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
D. Solder for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.
E. Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release type, for expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, asbestos free, solvent type.
H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
I. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Allow for thermal expansion;
set true to line and level. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and
weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible.
1. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FMG Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
C. Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For aluminum, form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
1. Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets
to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), unless pre-tinned surface would show
in finished Work.
BETHEL, MAINE
D. Separation: Separate noncompatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of asphalt
mastic or other permanent separation.
BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient
and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer
or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Tremco
b. Titebond
2.2 JOINT SEALANTS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions.
B. Sealant for Use in Building Expansion Joints:
1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS;

Class 25; Uses T, M, and O, with the additional capability to withstand 50 percent
movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
C. Sealant for General Exterior Use Where Another Type Is Not Specified:
1. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
and Uses NT, M, A, and O.
D. Sealant for Exterior Traffic-Bearing Joints, Where Slope Precludes Use of Pourable Sealant:
1. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O.
E. Sealant for Exterior Traffic-Bearing Joints, Where Slope Allows Use of Pourable Sealant:
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Single-component, pourable urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T, M, G, A, and O.
F. Sealant for Use in Interior Joints in Ceramic Tile and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and
Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures:
1. Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS;

Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; formulated with fungicide.
G. Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames:
1. Latex sealant, single-component, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion

sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
H. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Interior Joints:
1. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
I. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
1. Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant

recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne
sound.
J. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Comply with ASTM C 1193.
B. Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications.

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 08 14 33
STILE AND RAIL MDF DOORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents –
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this
section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Stile and Rail MDF Doors
2. Factory Prefitting and Premachining
3. Stile and Rail MDF Bifold, Bypass and Pocket Doors with hardware
4. Factory Finishing of Stile and Rail Doors
C. Related Sections
1. Section 00 00 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements
2. Section 01 00 00 – General Requirements
3. Section 06 00 00 – Wood, Plastics and Composites
4. Section 08 30 00 – Specialty Doors and Frames
5. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames
6. Section 08 06 71 – Door Hardware Schedule
7. Section 08 06 80 – Glazing Schedule
8. Section 09 00 00 – Finishes
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D-1037 –91 American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Methods for
Evaluating the Properties of Wood-Based Fiber and Particle Board Panel Materials.
B. ANSI A208.1 – Urea-formaldehyde Emissions
C. California Air Resource Board (CARB) – Urea-formaldehyde emissions standards
D. ASTM E 152-81a – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E. WDMA I.S.6-A-07 - Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
F. Architectural Woodwork Standards, latest edition, published jointly by the Architectural
Woodwork Institute, the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer Association of Canada,
and the Woodwork Institute.
G. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows
H. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests for fire Door Assemblies
I. MUBEC
J. UL10-B/ UBC – 43-2 / UBC 7-2-94 (neutral pressure) and UL10-C / UBC – 7-2-97
(positive pressure) – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies as enforced by the local authority
having jurisdiction (AHJ)
K. ITS – Certification Listings for Fire Doors
L. ADA
1.03 SUBMITTALS
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM STILE & RAIL MDF & WOOD DOORS 08 14 33 - 1
BETHEL, MAINE
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Indicate:
1. Door number
2. Door Type
3. Door Sizes
4. Handing
5. Fire rating
6. Door elevations
7. Hardware Set Numbers
8. details of construction
B. Samples :
1. Submit 12” x 12” door corner samples as required by the architect showing door
construction, panel and sticking details as specified
2. For factory prefinished doors – submit 6” x 6” samples to architect for approval of
veneer or painted type material as specified.
C. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on doors will be submitted under
Section 08710 directly to door manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware
schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General
Contractor.
D. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer’s product construction data including, core
construction, stile and rail details, panel and sticking details and any trim or glazing
details as appropriate for doors specified. Product data should indicate compliance with
specifications.
E. Quality Assurance:
1. Manufacturer : Shall be a company specializing in the manufacture of stile and rail
doors specified in this section for a minimum of 10 years. All stile and rail doors
specified in this section MDF and Fire doors shall be supplied and manufactured
by one company. All details including panels, sticking and profiles shall
match. Plant-ons for fire doors will not be accepted.
2. Fire Ratings: Fire rated doors shall comply with local building codes as enforced
by the AHJ. Doors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80. All doors
shall bear the appropriate certification labels.
3. Storage and Handling : Doors shall be stored and handled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and the WDMA – Appendix Section – “Care
and Installation at Job Site”.
i. Doors shall be stored on a flat and level surface in a well ventilated dry
building. Doors shall not be stored on edge and shall be protected from
dirt, water and abuse.
ii. Protect doors from exposure to light for veneers which are light sensitive.
iii. Doors shall not be subjected to extreme heat or humidity. HVAC systems
should be set to provide a temperature range of 60 -90 degrees F and 25-
55% relative humidity.
iv. Handle doors with clean hands or gloves. Do not drag doors across floors
or other surfaces.
v. Each Door shall be marked with the opening number.
4. Preinstallation Meeting
i. Prior to the doors being unwrapped from the factory packaging a meeting
shall take place with the factory representative or the door manufacturer
and the general contractor, door distributor, installers, finishers and any
BETHEL, MAINE
other trades responsible for the handling of the doors, to review the factory
Care and Handling and Finishing Instructions.
5. STC ratings shall be operable and shall have been tested and not estimated.
Manufacturers shall have testing lab documentation of STC ratings.
6. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01700. For factory finished or prime
doors, warranty shall be in effect of the Life of the Installation for interior,
interior fire doors and exterior doors.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers, subject to compliance with specifications:

1. TruStile Doors, LLC.
2. Approved equal products, subject to compliance with the design and performance
of this specification and as approved by owner and architect in accordance with
Section 01600.
2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION – MDF STILE AND RAIL DOORS
A. Description:
1. Type: TruStile TS Series MDF Doors.
2. Size and Panel Types: See Drawings and specifications.
3. Stile Thickness: 1-3/4”.
4. Finish: Factory primed.
5. Profiles and dimensions shall be Trustile standards unless otherwise noted in the
drawings and elevations.
6. STC rating 34 – Standard 1-3/4” doors for sound control.
B. Stile and Rail (Sticking) Type:

1. Quarter Round (QR)
C. Panel Type:
1. Flat Panel (Panel C)
2. Panels shall be constructed of 48 pound density MDF routed to profile specified.
Panels shall float inside the sticking in true stile and rail construction. Panels
shall be held in place by the sticking and flexible bumper shall be installed inside
sticking to keep panel centered.
3. Panel Thickness: As indicated in TruStile specifications for panel selected.
D. Door Top Type:
1. Square Top
E. Stile Construction
1. Interior core material to be constructed of 2 pieces of 48 pound density MDF
laminated with PVC adhesive or 1/8” MDF over LVL. For exterior doors MDF
shall be exterior grade MDF manufactured with phenolic resins to resist
moisture.
2. Stiles are to be constructed for improved screw holding by use of hardwood wedge
or edge to extend the entire height of door.
BETHEL, MAINE
2.03 FIRE RATED STILE AND RAIL DOORS
A. Panel and Sticking types to match MDF/Wood Stile and Rail doors in every detail. Plant
ons are not acceptable.
B. Core: for 45, 60 and 90 minute rated doors; the core material shall allow panel profiles to
match non rated doors.
C. Stile Construction
a. Stiles are to be constructed for improved screw holding by use of hardwood
“Firewedge”, 1-5/8” x 7/8” (1-3/4” doors) and 1-1/4” x 7/8” (1-3/8” doors).
“Firewedge” to extend the entire height of door.
D. Fire doors to be Category A with concealed intumescent strips where positive pressure is
required by code.
2.04 FACTORY PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING
A. Doors: Prefit and premachine doors at factory.

1. Obtain accurate field measurements of hardware mortised in metal frames to verify
dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory.
2. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors.
3. Comply with accepted hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings and with
hardware templates to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware.
B. Tolerances: Comply with WDMA tolerance requirements for prefitting.
2.05 DOOR FABRICATION
A. Machining for door hardware: All doors shall be machined for specified hardware that is
not surface applied.
B. Prefit and Bevel Doors 1/8” in 2 at lock stile. Ensure proper gaps are maintained on fire
doors to comply with NFPA 80 requirements.
C. Doors shall be factory glazed with glass as specified unless otherwise indicated.
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING
A. MDF doors to be factory prime painted with low VOC, water based primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600:

1 Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for door and are
installed plumb and square as required for proper installation of doors.
1. Inspect doors for any damage, manufacturing defects or prefinish inconsistency prior
to installation.
2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with
copy to Architect.
B. Acceptance: Beginning of work will indicate acceptance of existing conditions by

installer.
BETHEL, MAINE
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Conditioning: Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
B. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not
previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each
edge.
C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware brush apply primer to all job site cut or planed
surfaces.
1. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to

comply with WDMA IS 1A and NFPA 80.
1. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers.
2. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door
warranty as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions.
B. Hanging:
1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled.
2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in
proper operating condition.
B. Protection: Advise General Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed

wood doors from damages or deterioration until acceptance of entire project.
C. Replacement: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.

1. Causes for Rejection: Include chips, scratches or gouges.
END OF SECTION
BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 08 52 00
WOOD WINDOWS
(ANDERSEN® 400 SERIES TILT-WASH DOUBLE-HUNG)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Double-Hung windows.
2. Flexible Flashing.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide products/systems that have been manufactured, fabricated, and
installed to the following performance criteria:
1. Comply with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
2. Performance Class: LC
3. Performance Grade: PG30
4. U-Factor (NFRC 100): 0.29
5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) (NFRC 200): 0.28
6. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) (ASTM E90): 23
7. Sound Transmission Class (STC) (ASTM E90): 26
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01
Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation guides.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating direction of operable parts, typical jamb, head and sill
conditions, and special mullion reinforcement details.
D. Color Samples: Submit selection and verification samples, including the following:
1. Hardware: Submit Sample indicating typical finish on hardware.
2. Cladding: Submit color Samples of exterior cladding.
E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Performance Data: Provide manufacturer’s published performance data for specified
products.
F. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Warranty documents specified herein.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EARTHWORK 08 52 00 - 1

MAINE, MAINE
2. Owner’s Manual: Bound manual clearly identified with project name, location, and
completion date. Identify type and size of units installed. Provide recommendations for
periodic inspections, care, and maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with
instructions for temporary repair.

A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size
and complexity.
B. Certifications:
1. Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with
certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) indicating compliance
with ASTM E2190.

A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Section.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction
delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and
at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Store materials and accessories off ground, under cover, and protected from weather and construction
activities.

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimension of openings by field measurement before fabrication.
Record measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid construction delays.
B. Install units in strict accordance with manufacturer’s safety and weather recommendations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project Warranty provisions.
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard limited warranty
document. Manufacturer’s limited warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner
may have under contract documents.

MAINE, MAINE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Provide products from the following manufacturer:
1. Andersen Windows, Inc.
2. 100 4th Ave. N.
3. Bayport, MN 55003-1096.
4. Phone: (800) 299-9029.
5. Fax: (800) 752-9230.
6. E-mail: technicalsupport@andersenwindows.com.
7. www.andersenwindows.com.
8. Local Contact: Tom Jordan, Ph: (207) 232-6527, tjordan@andersencorp.com
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Product/Systems: Wood windows, including the following:
1. Andersen® 400 Series Tilt-Wash Double-Hung Windows.
2. Substitutions:
B. Frame and Sash Members: Fabricated from wood species approved in ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA
101/I.S.2.
C. Head and Jamb Outer Frame Members: Vinyl wrapped wood (PVC) complying with the requirements of
ASTM D4216.
1. Color: White.
D. Sill Members - Tilt-Wash and Double-Hung Picture Windows: Fibrex® material sill cover over wood
species approved in ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
E. Sash Members: Double-Hung Tilt-Wash units to be constructed from treated wood conforming to
WDMA Industry Standard I.S.4.
1. Exterior Sash Surfaces: Electrostatically painted with a 1.5 mil primer and a 1.5 mil
Flexacron® finish in the following color:
a. Color: White.
2. Interior Sash Surfaces: Provide interior sash surfaces in the following finish:
a. Prefinished white.
F. Weatherstripping:
1. Tilt-Wash Double-Hung Weatherstripping:
a. Head and Sill Weatherstripping: Vinyl covered foam gasket located in top and
bottom rails.
b. Check Rail Weatherstripping: Compressible bulb.
c. Side Jamb Weatherstripping: Polypropylene leaf.

MAINE, MAINE
G. Head, Jamb, and Sill Members: 1-piece frame and sash members constructed of extruded Fibrex®
material.
2.3 GLAZING
A. General: Insulating glass units certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council as conforming
to the requirements of IGCC. Provide dual sealed units consisting of polyisobutylene primary seal and
silicone secondary seal. Provide metal spacers with bent or soldered corners.
B. High-Performance™ Low-E4™ Glass Argon Blend Filled Insulating Glass Units:
1. Glass – Operating Units: Insulating glass units consisting of an outboard lite of clear
annealed glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3 and an inboard lite of
clear, heat strengthened glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1, q3, Kind HS.
2. Glass – Operating Units: Tempered insulating glass units consisting of an outboard and
inboard lite of clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1, q3,
Kind FT.
3. Glass - Fixed Units: Tempered insulating glass units consisting of an outboard and
inboard lite of clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1, q3,
Kind FT.
4. Magnetron sputtering vapor deposition (MSVD) TiO2 coating applied to the No. 1 surface.
5. High-Performance™ Low-E4™ Coating: Magnetron sputtering vapor deposition (MSVD)
Low-E coating applied to the No. 2 surface.
6. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon gas blend.
7. Protective removable polyolefin film applied to glass surfaces No. 1 and No. 4.
2.4 VENTILATING HARDWARE

A. Double-Hung Window Hardware:
1. Sash Locks and Keepers: Provide 1 sash lock and keeper on standard product.
a. Classic Series™ Hardware Locks: Injection molded, glass reinforced polyester sash
locks in the following integral color.
1) Color: White.
2. Balances: Fit top and bottom sash with concealed sash mounted balances consisting of
spring power with block and tackle. Design balances to ensure easy operation of double-
hung units
3. Balance Shoes: Provide 4 balance pivots for each window unit. Design balance shoe to
lock sash when sash has been tilted in for cleaning. Design balance shoe to release after
sash is returned to vertical position.
4. Sash Pivot: Provide 4 balance pivots. Mount 1 sash pivot at lower corners of both sashes.
Sash pivot is retained in balance shoe assembly until sash retainer spring is depressed,
allowing sash to be removed.
5. Wash Assists: Provide 2 wash assists mounted in center pocket of side jamb liners.

MAINE, MAINE
2.5 INSECT SCREENS
A. Insect Screens: Provide venting sash with an insect screen, including attachment hardware.
1. Frames: Full height 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) rolled aluminum frame with chromate
conversion coating. Provide matching corner locks and latch retainers.
1) Frame Finish: White.
2.6 JOINING SYSTEMS

A. Non-Reinforced Joining:
1. Non-reinforced join with PVC spacer.
2. Joining Clips Mull Interior: Galvanized metal.
3. Gusset Plates: Galvanized metal gusset plates.
a. Flat Gusset Plat at Head and Jamb: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm).
b. Preformed Sill Gusset Plate: 0.031 inch (0.79 mm).
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Grilles:
1. Full Divided Light Grilles: Fixed exterior and interior grilles with an anodized aluminum
muntin bar, 1/2" inch wide, to match spacer within insulated glass unit where indicated on
Drawings.
a. Exterior Grille: Provide Fibrex® material exterior grilles where indicated on
Drawings. Install grilles on exterior of glass with continuous adhesive tape to
simulate true divided light muntin bars in the following color:
1) Color: White.
b. Fixed Interior Grille: Provide profiled wood grilles applied with adhesive tape to
interior glass surface.
1) Grille Type: Prefinished white Maple.
c. Width: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
B. Extension Jambs: none
2.8 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Furnish and install flexible flashing by Grace, Vycor, or Dupont to cover nailing flanges & lapped to shed
water.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Preservative Treatment: Treat wood sash and frame members after machining with a water repellent
preservative in accordance with WDMA I.S.4.
B. Head and Jamb Outer Frame Units: Vinyl wrapped wood over bonded to wood interior frame. Seal
corners with silicone. Provide vinyl corner flashing.

MAINE, MAINE
C. Sills: Fabricate sills to comply with the following:
1. Tilt-Wash and Picture units (Fibrex® material) laminated to wood sub-sill core with PVC
end caps. Bond outer frame members and sill cover to wood base frame with adhesive.
D. Jamb Liners:
1. Head Jamb Liners: 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, rigid vinyl head jamb liner extrusion
secured with screws.
2. Side Jamb Liners: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick, compressible rigid vinyl side jamb liner
extrusion secured in pocket of side jamb assembly.
E. Sash: Treat sash members with preservative, water repellent, conductive solution in accordance with
WDMA I.S.4.
1. Double-Hung Sash:
a. Stabilizer Coating: Apply minimum 1.5 mil dry thickness primer to surfaces to be
finish coated.
b. Finish Coating: Apply minimum 1.5 mil dry thickness Flexacron® finish coat over
stabilized exterior and interior surfaces.
c. Glazing: Factory glazed with high quality glazing sealant and snap-in rigid vinyl
glazing bead.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the window manufacturer.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of units,
including the following:
1. Rough openings are square and dimensions are correct.
2. Sill plates are level.
3. Wood frame walls are dry, clean, sound, and well nailed or glued, free of voids and
without offsets at joints.
4. Nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in openings and within 3 inches (75 mm) of
rough opening.
B. Do not proceed with installation of units until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Remove unit components, parts, accessories, and installation guides from carton.

MAINE, MAINE
2. Inspect unit components and verify that components are not damaged and that parts are
included before disposing of carton.
3. Shop-assemble multiple units before installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation guides.
B. Interface With Other Work:
1. Perform installation in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in
place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent
construction.
3. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
4. Install insulation in shim space around unit perimeter to maintain continuity of building
insulation. Do not overfill.
5. Hold back exterior siding or other finish materials from edge of unit to allow for expansion
and contraction and installation of proper joint sealant with backing materials. Seal
perimeter of unit after exterior finish is applied per requirements of Division 07 “Joint
Sealants” Section.
6. Finish interior units per requirements specified in related sections. Refer to, and comply
with, additional requirements in manufacturer’s installation guides.
7. Install optional hardware and unit accessories after cleaning.
C. Site Tolerances:
1. Adjust operation, insect screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points
and weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean units using cleaning material and methods specifically recommended by window manufacturer.
B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes.
D. Protect unit surfaces from masonry cleaning solution that could damage insulation glass panels or
hardware.
E. Remove debris from work site and properly dispose of debris.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.
END OF SECTION

MAINE, MAINE
SECTION 08 71 00
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 –GENERAL
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Providing hardware for all doors, except doors provided with their own
hardware.
2. Providing lock cylinders for all work requiring cylinders.
3. Providing the services of a qualified hardware consultant to prepare
detailed schedules of hardware required for the project.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Carefully examine all of the Contrast Documents for requirements which affect
the work of this section. Other specifications sections which directly relate to the
work of this section include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hollow metal doors and frames; work requiring template coordination,

metal astragals for fire-rated doors.
2. Wood doors; work requiring template coordination, metal astragals for
fire-rated doors.
3. Aluminum doors and frames. Hardware provided by aluminum door
supplier.
1.04 INTENT
A. A major intent of the work of this section is to provide hardware for every door
in the project, except as indicated, so that each door functions correctly for its
intended use. Provide only hardware that complies with applicable codes and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction including requirements for
barrier–free accessibility.
A. Hardware supplier shall have in his employ one or more members of the Door
and Hardware Institute to include at least one Certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant in good standing, who shall be responsible for preparation of the
Finish Hardware Schedule. This Consultant shall be acceptable to the Architect
and is to ensure that the intent requirement of this specification is fulfilled, and
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00-1

BETHEL, MAINE
certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the requirements specified
in this section and the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hardware supplier shall warrant and guarantee, in writing, that hardware supplied
is free of defective material and workmanship. Supplier shall further warrant and
guarantee for a period of one year from Owner’s Use and Occupancy that the
hardware shall function in a satisfactory manner without binding, collapse, or
dislodging of its parts, provide the installation is made to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. The hardware supplier shall repair of remedy, without charge, any defect of
workmanship or material for which he is responsible hereunder.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with SECTION 01300-SUBMITTALS:
1. Schedule: Submit to the Architect six (6) copies of the complete hardware
schedule within the fourteen (14) days after receipt of contract award. Submit
therewith complete catalog cuts and descriptive data of all products specifically
scheduled therein. No materials shall be ordered or templates issued until the
hardware schedule has been approved by the Architect. Form and detail of
hardware schedule shall be in vertical format in conformance to the door and
hardware industry standards. All hardware sets shall be clearly cross-referenced
to the hardware set numbers listed in the specifications.
2. Samples: If requested, submit to the Architect for approval, a complete line of

samples as directed. Samples shall be plainly marked giving hardware number
used in this specification, the manufacturer’s numbers, types and sizes. The
Architect will deliver approved samples to the project site to be stored. Samples
will remain with the Architect until delivery of all hardware to the project is
complete, after which time they will be turned over to the General Contractor for
incorporation into the work.
3. Keying System Submission: Before cylinders are ordered, submit a complete

proposed keying system for approval. This should be done after a keying meeting
has been held with the owner’s representative.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of hardware shall be made to the project by the Hardware Supplier in

accordance with the instructions of the General Contractor.
B. The finish hardware shall be delivered to the jobsite and received there by the
General Contractor. The General Contractor shall prepare a locked storage room
with adequate shelving, for all hardware. The storage room shall be in a dry,
secure area, and shall not include storage of other products by other trades.

BETHEL, MAINE
C. The General Contractor shall furnish the Hardware Supplier with receipts for all
hardware and accessory items received, and shall send copies of these receipts to
the Architect, if requested.
1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to all applicable codes. Provide all throws, projections, coatings,

knurling, opening and closing forces, and other special functions required by
State and Local Building Codes, and all applicable Handicap Code requirements.
B. For fire rated openings, provide hardware complying with NFPA 80 and NFPA
101 without exception. Provide only hardware tested by UL for the type and size
of door installed and fire resistance rating required.
1.09 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Hardware Supplier shall determine conditions and materials of all doors and
frames for proper application of hardware.
B. The Hardware Schedule shall list the actual product series numbers. Bidders are
required to follow the manufacturers’ catalog requirement for the actual size of
door closers, brackets and holders. All door opening sizes are as noted on the
Door Schedule and all hardware shall be in strict accordance with requirements
of height, width, and thickness.

BETHEL, MAINE
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Hinges McKinney Scranton, PA

Stanley New Britain, CT
Locksets Sargent New Haven, CT

Schlage Colorado Springs, CO
Best Indianapolis, IN
Door Closers Sargent New Haven, CT

LCN Princeton, IL
Norton Charlotte, NC
Door Stop Glynn Johnson Indianapolis, IN

Ives New Haven, CT
Rockwood Rockwood, PA
Push/Pulls Rockwood Rockwood, PA

Burns Erie, PA
Ives New Haven, CT
Protective Plates Rockwood Rockwood, PA

Burns Erie, PA
Ives New Haven, CT
Silencers Ives New Haven, CT

Glynn Johnson Indianapolis, IN
Rockwood Rockwood, PA
2.02 MATERIALS AND QUALITY
A. All hardware shall be of the best grade of solid metal entirely free from
imperfections manufacturer and finish.
B. Qualities, weights, and sizes given herein are the minimum that will be accepted.
It is the responsibility of the Hardware Supplier to supply the specified size and
weight of hardware and the proper function of hardware in each case and to
provide UL approved hardware at all fire rated doors.
C. Provide, as far as possible, locks of one lock manufacturer and hinges of one
hinge manufacturer. Modifications to hardware that are necessary to conform to
construction shown or specified shall be provided as required for the specified
operation and functional features.

BETHEL, MAINE
2.03 HARDWARE DESIGNATIONS
A. All items of hardware are referenced by manufacturer’s names and numbers. The
manufacturer’s names and numbers are used to define the function, design, and
the quality of the material to be supplied.
Substitution of products other than those listed shall be submitted to the Architect
at least ten (10) days PRIOR to the bid date. The Architect shall be the sole judge
of any proposed substitution.
2.04 TEMPLATES
A. Hardware supplier shall immediately, but not later than three (3) days after
approval of his Schedule by the Architect, furnish the General Contractor with
complete template information necessary for the fabrication of doors, frames, etc.
No templates shall be furnished prior to the approval of the hardware schedule.
2.05 HARDWARE FOR LABELED FIRE DOORS, EXIT DEVICES AND SMOKE DOORS
A. Hardware shall conform to requirements of NFPA 80 for labeled fire doors and
to NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements specified. Labeling
and listing by UL Building Materials Directory, for class of door being used will
be accepted as evidence of conformance to these requirements. Install minimum
latch throw as specified on label of individual doors. Provide hardware listed by
UL except where heavier materials, larger sizes, or better grades are specified
herein under paragraph entitled “Hardware Sets”. In lieu of UL labeling and
listing, test reports from a nationally recognized testing agency may b e
submitted showing that hardware has been tested in accordance with UL test
methods and that it conforms to NFPA requirements. Specific hardware
requirements of door or frame manufacturers which exceed sized or weights of
hardware herein listed shall be provided with no additional charge.
2.06 KEYS AND KEYING
A. The hardware supplier shall review the specific hardware functions with the
Architect and owner at the time of the keying review, to assure the
appropriateness of each of the hardware functions. Failure to make this review
does not relieve the hardware supplier from providing the proper functions.
B. Key System: All cylinders shall be Masterkeyed and/or Grandmaster Keys to a

new system. Furnish six (6) keys for each set, if required.
1. Master keys, Grandmaster Keys: Furnish six (6) keys for each set, if
required.

BETHEL, MAINE
2. Furnish three (3) change keys for each cylinder keyed differently; six (6)
change keys for each set keyed alike, and in sets where only (2) cylinders
are keyed alike, four (4) change keys will be required.
3. All keying is to be done at the factory to avoid duplication of the new
cylinders.
4. Master Keys shall be sent to the Owner by registered mail, return receipt
required.
5. Supply a bitting list for all change keys and master keys to the Owner.
6. All lock cylinders shall be set to Construction key for use by the
Contractor during the construction period. Furnish ten (10) Construction
keys.
7. Provide removable cores.
2.07 FASTENERS
A. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for

machine screw installation.
B. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-
head screws except as otherwise indicated. Furnish exposed screws to match the
hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match the finish of
such other work as closely as possible, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door
is closed, except to the extent no standard manufactured units of the type
specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts unless
specifically approved by the Architect.
D. All hardware shall be installed only with fasteners supplied by manufacturers of

specific products.
2.08 PACKING AND MARKING
A. All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts and fastenings necessary for
proper installation and shall be wrapped in the same package as the hardware
item for which it is intended and shall match finish of hardware with which to be
used.
B. Each package shall be clearly labeled indicating the portion of the work for
which it is intended.

BETHEL, MAINE
2.09 ENVIROMENTAL CONCERN FOR PACKGING
A. The hardware shipped to the jobsite is to be packaged in biodegradable packs

such as paper or cardboard boxes and wrapping. If non-biodegradable packing
such as plastic, plastic bags or large amounts of Styrofoam is utilized, then the
Contractor will be responsible for the disposal of the non-biodegradable packing
to a licensed or authorized collector for recycling of the non-degradable packing.
2.10 FINISH HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
A. Hardware items shall conform to respective specifications and standards and to

requirements specified herein.
B. MATERIALS AND FINISH MATERIALS AND FINISHES SHALL BE:
1. Interior Butts: US26D (BHMA 652)

2. Exterior Geared Hinges US28 (BHMA 628)
3. Door Closers: Sprayed to match hardware finish.
4. Exit Devices: US26D (BHMA 626)
5. Kick, Push Plates: US32D (BHMA 630)
6. All other hardware shall be: US26D (BHMA 626), or as scheduled.
C. HINGES
1. Number of hinges per door, two hinges for doors up to and including five
feet in height and an additional hinge for each two and one half feet or
fraction thereof.
2. Hinges shall be as follows:
Interior McKinney TA2714 4½x4½

Stanley FBB179 4½x4½
Exterior McKinney TA2314 4 ½ x 4 ½ NRP

Stanley FBB191 4 ½ x 4 ½ NRP
McKinney MCK12HD Full Mortise Continuous Hinges
D. DOOR CLOSERS:
1. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action.
Cylinder body shall be 1-1/2” in diameter, and double heat treated pinion
shall be 11/16” in diameter.
2. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment

for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

BETHEL, MAINE
3. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of
closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for physically
handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical
valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general
speed, and hydraulic back-check.
4. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forged forearms
for parallel arm closers).
5. Closer arms (and metal covers when specified) shall have a powder
coating finish.
6. Provide drop, mounting plates, where required.
7. Do not locate closers on the side of doors facing corridors, passageways

or similar type areas. Where it is necessary, due to certain conditions and
approval of the Architect, to have closers in corridors, provide such
closers with parallel or track type arms.
8. All door closers shall be adjusted by the installer in accordance with the
manufacturer’s templates and written instructions. Closers with parallel
arms shall have back-check features adjusted prior to installation.
9. Closers shall conform to all applicable code requirements relative to

setting closing speeds for closers and maximum pressure for operating
interior and exterior doors.
10. Door closers meeting this specification are as follows:
LCN Sargent
Interior 4011 281- 0

4111 281 – P10
4040SE 2407 Series
4000T 281 – OT x spec. TEMP.
4310ME-SF 2980
4040SE-DE 2477
Exterior 4111 S CUSH 281CPS
Hold Open 4111 SH CUSH 281 CPSH

BETHEL, MAINE
E. EXIT DEVICES:
1. Shall be Von Duprin or Sargent as follows:
Function Von Duprin Sargent
A CD99NL-OP 16-8804
B CD99EO 16-8810
C 99L 8813ET
D 99L-BE 8815ET
E 99EO-F 12-8810
F 99L-F 12-8813ET
G 99L-F-BE 12-8815ET
H CD9927EO 16-8710
I 9927L 8713ET
J 9927L-BE 8715ET
K CD9927EO x LBR 16-PP/PR8710
L 9927L x LBR PP/PR8713ET
M 9927L-BE x LBR PP/PR8715ET
N 9927EO-F 12-8710
O 9927L-F 12-8713ET
P 9927L-F-BE 12-8715ET
Q 9927EO-F x LBR 12-PP/PR8710
R 9927L-F x LBR 12-PP/PR8713ET
S 9927L-F-BE x LBR 12PP/PR8715ET
T CD9927TP 16-8710 x 306
U EL99L-F 56-12 8813 ETL
V EL9927EO-F 56-12 8710
W 22NLOP 3828 x 34
NOTE: Lever design shall match lock trim
F. HEAVY DUTY LEVER HANDLE CYLINDRICAL LOCKS:
1. Locksets for this project shall be heavy duty cylindrical key-in-lever handle
type locksets.
2. Locksets shall be 2 3/4" backset with 1/2" throw latchbolt, with deadlocking
latch, and a cylindrical housing of steel with a zinc dichromate finish.
3. Locksets shall be fastened by thru bolts, thru the 3 1/2" diameter inside rose back
plate into the threaded studs in the outside rose back plate. Thru bolts shall be placed
in separate bolt holes, thru the door and outside the cylindrical case at 180° from
each other.

BETHEL, MAINE
4. The inside and outside rose scalps shall be 3 1/2" diameter wrought brass or bronze.
When assembled, all thru bolts in the face of the door shall be concealed from
view. The lever handles shall be solid cast in the same finish as the rose.
5. Cylinders for lever handle cylindrical locks shall be 6 pin tumbler, solid brass, with
nickel silver keys. Two keys shall be supplied with each lock or cylinder. See
"Keying Section 2.OIF" for masterkey information.
6. The 1/2" throw latchbolt shall be listed and approved for use by
Underwriters Laboratories.
7. Strikes shall be curved lip ANSI A - 115.2 4 7/8" x 1 1/4" wrought brass or
bronze.
8. The following locksets shall be considered acceptable for this project:
Schlage "D" Series RHO Design

Sargent “10” Line LLC Design
Best Lock 9K Line 15C
9. All locksets and cylinders for this project, shall be by the same manufacturer
and shall be manufactured in the United States of America by Schlage
Lock Co. substitutions will not be allowed.
10. The following is a list of lock functions as indicated under "hardware set":
FUNCTIONS BEST SARGENT SCHLAGE
(1) D 04 80
(2) AB 38 53
(3) N 15 10
(4) R 37 70
(5) L 65 40
(6) C 16 60
G. KICK PLATES, ARMOR PLATES, MOP PLATES:
1. Kick plates shall be 8 in. high. Armor plates shall be 34 in. high. Mop plates shall
be 4 in. high. All plates shall be 2 in. less the width of door. Plates shall be .050
thickness, bevel 4 edges, screws shall be oval head counter-sunk.
H. STOPS
1. Shall be furnished at all doors. Wherever and opened door or any item of
hardware thereon strikes a wall, at 90 degrees. Provide wall bumpers, unless
otherwise indicated in hardware sets.

BETHEL, MAINE
2. Where wall bumpers cannot be effectively used, a floor stop shall be furnished
and installed.
3. Provide roller bumpers for each door where two doors interfere with each other
in swinging.
Manufacturer Wall Bumpers Floor Stops Roller Bumpers
Rockwood 409 440, 442 456

Ives 407 ½ 436B, 438B 470 Series
Glynn Johnson WB 50XT FB13, FB14 RB-3
I. DEADLOCKS:
1. Where called for in the hardware sets, provide deadlocks as follows:
Function Sargent Schlage
I Classroom 77 63
J. PUSH PLATES, DOOR PULLS, PUSH/PULL BARS:
1. Shall be as manufactured by Rockwood, Burns or Ives.
a. Push plates shall be 4” x 16” x .050 thickness unless otherwise listed in

hardware sets.
Rockwood 70 Series
Burns 50 Series
Quality 40 Series
b. Door pulls shall be 1” x 10”
Type A Offset Pulls
Rockwood BF157
c. Push/pull bars
Type A (Wide Stile Doors)
Rockwood BF11147 x T1006 Mounting

Burns BF26C x 442 x Sim. Mounting as Above
Quality BF 482 x Sim. Mounting as Above

BETHEL, MAINE
K. THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIP, SEAL:
1. Thresholds shall be as detailed and furnished on all doors where shown on

drawings. Thresholds shall be aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Set
thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”.
2. Weatherstripping shall be furnished on all exterior doors unless otherwise

indicated.
Product Pemko Reese NGP
Threshold as detailed
Brush Seal 45062AP 970 A626A
Auto. Door 430CR 330 420
Bottom
Door Sweep 345AV 353 101AV
Set Astragals 351C x 351CP 95 x 95P 140 x 140P
Astragal 357SP 183S 139SP
Rain Drip 346C R210A 16A
Sound Seal 103NA
L. ELECTRIFIED POWER TRANSFERS:
1. Provide LCN Model EPT 10 where specified.
M. LOW ENERGY OPERATOR:
1. Provide Horton 4100LE low energy operator, push button actuators to be

hardwired.
N. MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN:
1. Provide Rixson wall type magnetic hold open FM998 series or equal.

BETHEL, MAINE
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.01. INSPECTION
1. It shall be the general contractors responsibility to inspect all doors openings and
doors to determine that each door and door frame has been properly prepared for
the required hardware. If errors in dimensions or preparation are encountered,
they are to be corrected by the responsible parties prior to the installation of
hardware.
3.02 PREPARATION
1. All doors and frames, requiring field preparation for finish hardware, shall be
carefully mortised, drilled for pilot holes, or tapped for machine screws for all
items of finish hardware in accordance with the manufacturers templates and
instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION/ADJUSTMENT/LOCATION
1. All materials shall be installed in a workmanlike manner following the

manufacture’s recommended instructions.
2. Exit Devices shall be carefully installed so as to permit friction free operation of

crossbar, touch bar, lever. Latching mechanism shall also operate freely without
friction or binding.
3. Door Closers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions. Each door closer shall be carefully installed, on each door, at the
degree of opening indicated on the hardware schedule. Arm position shall be
shown on the instruction sheets and required by the finish hardware schedule.
4. The adjustments for all door closers shall be the installer’s responsibility and
these adjustments shall be made at the time of installation of the door closer. The
closing speed and the latching speed valves, shall be adjusted individually to
provide a smooth, continuous closing action without slamming. The delayed
action feature or back check valve shall also be adjusted so as to permit the
correct delayed action cycle or hydraulic back check valve shall also be adjusted
so as the opening cycle. All valves must be properly adjusted at the time of
installation. Each door closer has adjustable spring power capable of being
adjusted, in the field from size 2 thru 6. It shall be the installers’ responsibility to
adjust the spring power for each door closer in exact accordance with the spring
power adjustment chart illustrated in the door closer installation sheet packed
with each door closed.

BETHEL, MAINE
5. Installation of all other hardware, including locksets, push-pull latches, overhead
holders, door stops, plates and other items, shall be carefully coordinated with the
hardware schedule and the manufacturer’s instruction sheets.
6. Locations for finish hardware shall be in accordance with dimensions listed in the
pamphlet “Recommended locations for Builders’ Hardware” published by the
Door and Hardware Institute.
3.04 PROTECTION
1. All exposed portions of finish hardware shall be carefully protected, by use of

cloth, adhesive backed paper or other materials, immediately after installation of
the hardware item on the door. The finish shall remain protected until completion
of the project. Prior to acceptance of the project by the Architect and owner, the
general contractor shall remove the protective material exposing the finish
hardware.
3.05 CLEANING
1. It shall be the responsibility of the general contractor to clean all items of finish
hardware and to remove any remaining pieces of protective materials and labels.
3.06 INSTRUCTIONS AND TOOLS
1. It shall be the responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to provide installation

and repair manuals and adjusting tools, wrenches, etc… for the following
operating products.
a. Locksets (all types)

b. Exit Devices (all types)
c. Door Closers

BETHEL, MAINE
3.07 HARDWARE SETS
1. Each Hardware Set listed below represents the complete hardware requirements
for one opening. (Single Door or Pair of Doors). Furnish the quantities required
for each set for the work.
HW SET 1
Door #101A
Each Leaf Shall Have: Full Mortise Continuous Hinges, Exit Device (Function A), Offset Pull,
Closer with Cush Arm, Kick Plate
Note: Weatherstripping and Threshold by Aluminum Door Supplier
HW SET 2
Door #101B
Each Leaf Shall Have: Full Mortise Continuous Hinge, Push Pull Back to Back Mount, Closer
with Cush Arm, Kick Plate
HW SET 3
Door #104A
Active Leaf Shall Have: Full Mortise Continuous Hinge x EPT Prep, EPT 10, Exit Device
(Function T), Offset Pull, Electric Operator with 2 Actuators, Kick Plate
Inactive Leaf Shall Have: Full Mortise Continuous Hinge, Exit Device (Function H), Offset Pull,
Closer with Cush Arm, Kick Plate
HW SET 4
Door #104B
Active Leaf Shall Have: Full Mortise Continuous Hinge x EPT Prep, EPT 10, Push Pull Back to
Back Mount, Electric Operator x 2 Actuators, Kick Plate
Inactive Leaf Shall Have: Full Mortise Continuous Hinge, Push Pull Back to Back Mount, Closer
with Cush Arm, Kick Plate
HW SET 5
Door #’s 106A, 109, 110A, 112B, 117

Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Exit Device (Function A), Offset Pull, Closer with Cush Arm,
Kick Plate, Weatherstripping, Door Bottom, Threshold

BETHEL, MAINE
HW SET 6
Door #’s B01, B03, B09, B10, B11, 105, 114, 218
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Lockset (Function 1), Closer, Kick Plate, Door Stop, Silencers
B03, B11 – add knurled knob

B07 – existing door to remain, 1-3/8” thick, needs new hardware Set 6 with knurled knob
HW SET 7
Door #’s B02, 110C, 118, 103, 107, 108

Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Lockset (Function 4), Closer, Kick Plate, Door Stop, Silencers
Note: Add Mag Hold Open to 108, 110C
HW SET 8
Door #106B
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Exit Device (Function P), Closer, Mag Hold Open, Kick Plate,
Door Stop, Silencers
HW SET 9
Door #’s 115, 116

Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Push Plate, Pull, Closer with Cush Arm, Kick Plate, Door Stop,
Silencers
HW SET 10
Door #111
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Exit Device (Function A), Offset Pull, Closer with Cush Arm,
Kick Plate, Weatherstripping, Door Bottom, Threshold
HW SET 11
Door #’s 110B, 205, 202A

Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Exit Device (Function O), Closer, Kick Plate, Mag Hold Opens,
Door Stop, Silencers
HW SET 12
Door #112A
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Exit Device (Function I), Closer, Kick Plate, Door Stop,
Silencers
HW SET 13
Door #119

BETHEL, MAINE
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Lockset (Function 1) (Active Leaf), Flush Bolts (Inactive Leaf),
Closer with Cush Arm, Kick Plate, Weatherstripping, Door Bottom, Threshold
HW SET 14
Door #’s 202B, 217

Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Exit Device (Function F), Closer, Kick Plate, Door Stop,
Silencers
217-add weather-stripping
HW SET 15
Door #’s 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212A, 212B, 212C, 213, 214
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Lockset (Function 4), Door Stops, Silencers
HW SET 16
Door #215
Each Leaf Shall Have: Hinges, Privacy Set (Function 5), Door Stop, Silencers

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product data and 12-inch-square samples.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Products identical to those tested per NFPA 252 for doors
and NFPA 257 for window assemblies; both labeled and listed by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and
SIGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked with certification label of

Insulating Glass Certification Council.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Float and Heat Treated Glass:
a. Ford Motor Co., Glass Div.
b. Globe Amerada Glass Co.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Interpane Glass Company
e. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited.
f. Southwall Technologies
g. Tempglass.
h. Viracon, Inc.
2. Wire Glass:
a. Ashai Glass Co./Ama Glass Corp.
b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
c. Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.
d. Pilkington Glass Ltd.
2.2 GLASS
A. Float Glass : ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), and Quality q3.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass : ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated) [, Type I, Class 1 (clear) ,
Quality q3, Kind FT (fully tempered).
1. ½” for glass railing system
C. Wired Glass : ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q8; Form 1 (polished) with m1
(diamond) mesh, 6.4 mm (0.25 inch) thick.
D. Mirror Glass : ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q3, silver coated per FS DDM411C, 6.0
mm thick, with edges rounded polished.
1. Safety Glass for Mirrors: Fully tempered.
2.3 FABRICATED GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating-Glass Units : Preassembled units complying with ASTM E 774 for
Class CBA units, with two 6.0-mm-thick sheets of glass separated by a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm)
dehydrated space filled with air.
1. Inboard Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass
2. Outboard Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass
3. Low-Emissivity Coating: Third surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing
Manual."
B. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports
gypsum board.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. BPB America Inc.

b. G-P Gypsum.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.
B. Type X:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Back and face side: Glass fiber mat resists growth of mold or mildew (per ASTM D
3273).
2. Core: Noncombustible gypsum core (ASTM E 136).
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
4. Long edges: Tapered:
5. Basis of design Product: “DensArmor Plus” as manufactured by G-P Gypsum.
D. Sound Deadening Wallboard: Provide 1/2 inch thick wood fiber sound deadening board.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. 440 Sound Barrier by Homasote Company or approved substitute.
2. Location: As indicated on drawings.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc, provide plastic

where material abuts exterior metal window or door frames.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. Expansion (control) joint.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying-type,
all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
D. Joint Compound for Interior Mold-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard and Tile Backing Panels: For
each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for
successive coats.

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying-type,
all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.
D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

BETHEL, MAINE
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:

BETHEL, MAINE
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 09 30 00
TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile and Accessories:

1. ColorBody Porcelain.
2. Natural Stone Wall tile.
3. Trim and Accessories.
4. Setting Materials.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03505 - Self-Leveling Underlayment.
B. Section 07920 - Joint Sealant.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Insitute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A108.10, 1999 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.
2. ANSI A118.1, 1999 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement
Mortar.
3. ANSI A118.3, 1999 - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and
-Grouting Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
4. ANSI A118.4, 1999 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
5. ANSI A118.5, 1999 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout.
6. ANSI A118.6, 1999 - Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts.
7. ANSI A118.7, 1999 - Polymer Modified Cement Grouts
8. ANSI A118.8, 1999 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
9. ANSI A118.9, 1999 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious
Backer Units
10. ANSI A118.10, 1999 - Load bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for
Thinset Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Stone.
11. ANSI A118.11, 1999 - Exterior Grade Plywood (EGP) Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar.
12. ANSI A136.1, 1999 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
13. ANSI A137.1, 1988 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 50 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
2. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
3. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes.
4. ASTM C 241 - Test Method For Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to
Foot Traffic.
5. ASTM C 503 - Specification for Marble Building Stone (Exterior).
6. ASTM C 615 - Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
09 30 00-1
7. ASTM C 629 - Specification for Slate Dimension Stone.
8. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
9. ASTM C 1028 - Test method for Determining the Static Coefficient of
Friction or Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal
Dynamometer Pull meter Method.
10. ASTM D 4397 - Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications.
C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation, 2007.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: Tile on walkway surfaces shall be provided with the
following values as determined by testing in conformance with ASTM C 1028.
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet).
2. Step Treads: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet).
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum of 0.8 (Wet).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter

conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints,
thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.
D. Selection Samples: Color charts illustrating full range of colors and patterns.
E. Selection Samples: Samples of actual tiles for selection.
F. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, illustrating pattern,
color variations, and grout joint size variations.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate:
1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2. For each shipment, type and composition of tile provide a Master Grade
Certificate signed by the manufacturer and the installer certifying that
products meet or exceed the specified requirements of ANSI A137.1.
H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials,

stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this

section with minimum two years experience.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type and color of tile from a single
09 30 00-2
source. Obtain each type and color of mortar, adhesive and grout from the same
source.
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for
installation.
B. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry
location and protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during

tiling and for a minimum of 7 days after completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide for Owner's use a minimum of 2 percent of the primary sizes and colors of
tile specified, boxed and clearly labeled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer (porcelain tile): DalTile Corporation, which is located at:

7834 C.F. Hawn Fwy. P. O. Box 170130 ; Dallas, TX 75217; Toll Free Tel:
800-933-TILE; Tel: 214-398-1411; Web: www.daltileproducts.com
B.Acceptable Manufacturer (stone tile): The Stone Network or approved equal

http://stone-network.com/gallery/displayimage.php?album=lastup&cat=19&pos=7
C. Substitutions: Not permitted.
D. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01600.
2.2 TILE
A. General: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions and
other characteristics indicated. Provide tile in the locations and of the types colors
and pattern indicated on the Drawings and identified in the Schedule and the end of
this Section. Tile shall also be provided in accordance with the following:
1. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges
selected under Submittal of samples, blend tile in the factory and package so
tile taken from one package shows the same range of colors as those taken
from other packages.
2. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile
assemblies as standard with the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.
09 30 00-3
3. Factory Applied Temporary Protective Coatings: Where indicated under tile
type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by
precoating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax applied hot. Do
not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
B. ColorBody Porcelain Tile:
1. Product: Identity.
2. Moisture Absorption: Less than .5 percent to less than 20 percent.
3. Size and Shape: 18” x 24”.
4. Surface Finish: Unpolished.
5. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Pattern: As indicated on the Drawings.
7. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove base corner, cove base outcorner, jolly,
grooved bullnose, cement bullnose, fabric bullnose, shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
C. Natural Stone Tile:
1. Product: Barre Gray Granite

2. Moisture Absorption: Less than .5 percent to less than 20 percent.
3. Size and Shape: 16” x 16”.
4. Surface Finish: Polished.
5. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Pattern: As indicated on the Drawings.
7. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove base corner, cove base outcorner, jolly,
grooved bullnose, cement bullnose, fabric bullnose, shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORlES
A. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, stainless steel, brass,
etc, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive;
use in the following locations:
1. Open edges of floor tile.
2. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
3. Thresholds at door openings.
4. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.
B. Stone Thresholds: Provide stone thresholds uniform in color and finish and
fabricated as follows:
1. Material:
a. Marble,complying with ÅSTM C 503 for exterior use and with a
minimum abrasive hardness of 10 when tested in accordance with
ÅSTM C 241.
b. Granite complying with ÅSTM C 615.
c. Slate complying with ASTM C 629, abrasion resistant, non-fading for
interior use with a honed finish.
2. Color/Finish: As selected from the manufacturers standard range.
3. Size:
a. Fabricate 2 inches (50 mm) wide by full width of wall or frame
09 30 00-4
opening; 1/2 inch (12 mm) thick; beveled one long edge with radiused
corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams.
4. Provide to provide transition between tile surface and adjoining finishes and
at the following locations:
a. At doorways where tile terminates.
b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.
2.4 SETTING MATERlALS
A. Adhesive: Mapei Ultraflex II, professional grade, single component, high

performance, polymer modified thinset bond type mortar for floors and walls.
B. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6;

color as selected.
C. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7;

color as selected.
D. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.8, 100 percent solids epoxy grout; color as selected.
E. Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white; use for
shower floors and shower walls.
F. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber
reinforced with 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners:
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of
setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1, and
are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would
impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces, and are smooth and flat
within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1.
C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates.
C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to
acceptable flatness tolerances.
E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board
manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set
09 30 00-5
mortar to a feather edge.
F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive

manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1
through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook
recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on
each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern
through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners
and bases neatly. Align floor joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile
size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Install thresholds where indicated.
I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar
planes.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS
A. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F142, with
standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with
TCA Handbook Method F143.
3.5 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - MORTAR BED METHODS
A. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook method F141, with
standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends.
C. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as specified in ANSI A108.13.
09 30 00-6
D. Mortar Bed Thickness: 1-1/4 to 2 inch (32 to 51 mm) maximum, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.6 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCA
Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook
Method W222, one coat method.
2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and
bathtub walls, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one
coat method.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation.
B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades.
C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other
similar type walkways
END OF SECTION
09 30 00-7
SECTION 09 51 13
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Panels: ASTM E 1264, Class A materials, tested per

ASTM E 84.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested

in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, [the following:]
[those indicated for each designation in the following paragraphs of Part 2].
1. Armstrong; Mesa.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Pattern: n/a
B. Color: White
C. Light Reflectance (LR) Coefficient: Not less than 0.85.
D. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.60.
E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.
F. Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit exposed flange of suspension system, angled tegular.
G. Thickness: 1 inch
H. Size: As indicated.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
2.3 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Direct-hung; ASTM C 635, intermediate duty structural classification.
1. Products:
a. Armstrong grid system
2. Color: White
B. Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/ (A 641M),
Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Size: Provide yield strength at least 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard product designed to accommodate seismic forces.
E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure panels in place.
F. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard product; provide at 24-inch (610-mm) spacing on

cross tees.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Suspension System Installation: Comply with ASTM C 636 and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING, BASE, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

2. Resilient wall base and accessories.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For flooring installed on walkway surfaces, provide products
with the values indicated as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
1. For resilient accessories, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 12
inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient accessory color and pattern specified.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product
furnished complies with requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For resilient flooring to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00- 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the Work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Do not stake boxes of tiles over 5 high.
D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,
unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in
spaces to receive products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at
least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer
time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13
deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install products and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
E. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of resilient
tile flooring, install tile before these items are installed.
F. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test
as well as acceptable pH range.

BETHEL, MAINE
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than one box of each type, color, pattern, class, wearing surface, and size
of resilient tile flooring installed.
2. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each type, color, pattern, and size of
resilient accessory installed.
3. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the following
paragraphs of Part 2.
2.2 RESILIENT TILE
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT 1): Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl
composition floor tile complying with ASTM F 1066 and the following:
1. Products: As follows:
a. Armstrong World Industries: Imperial Texture Standard Excelon.

b. Mannington Commercial: Essentials.
c. Tarkett: Expressions.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and
patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated.
a. Allow for 50 percent of field color and two accent colors of 25 percent each.
3. Class: Class 2 (through-pattern tile).

4. Static Coefficient of Friction: Level Surfaces, minimum 0.6.
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
6. Size: 12 by 12 inches (304.8 by 304.8 mm).
B. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT 2): Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl
a. Armstrong World Industries: Static Dissipative SDT.

BETHEL, MAINE

C. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT 3): Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl
a. Armstrong World Industries: Safeguard.

b. Mannington Commercial: SafeWalks.
c. Tarkett: True Step.

4. Static Coefficient of Friction: Level Surfaces, minimum 0.6.
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Vinyl Base: Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl wall base complying with
FS SS-W-40, Type II and the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries

b. Johnsonite.
patterns produced for vinyl wall base complying with requirements indicated.
3. Style: Cove with top-set toe.
4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
5. Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm).
6. Lengths: 120 feet (36.6 m) long.
7. Outside Corners: Pre-formed.
8. Inside Corners: Job formed.
9. Surface: Smooth.
B. Rubber Stair Treads and Accessories: Where this designation is indicated, provide rubber stair
treads and accessories complying with FS RR-T-650, Composition A and the following:
1. Available Products: As follows:
a. Johnsonite: Cubis style

BETHEL, MAINE
patterns produced for rubber stair treads and accessories complying with requirements
indicated.
3. Static Coefficient of Friction: Step Treads: Minimum 0.8.
4. Rubber Stair Treads: Type 2 design (designed) products complying with the following
requirements:
a. Type 2 Design: Raised-pattern, Cubis Style.

b. Abrasive Strips: Provide abrasive strips as specified by product designation
indicated above in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
c. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees.
d. Nosing Height: As follows, measured from top of tread to bottom edge of nosing:
1) 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).
e. Thickness: 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) tapering to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at back edge.
f. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece or, for treads exceeding
maximum lengths manufactured, in equal-length units.
5. Rubber Risers: Smooth, flat, risers, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick integral with tread unit.
C. Rubber Accessory Molding: Where this designation is indicated, provide rubber accessory
molding complying with the following:
1. Available Products: As follows:
a. Johnsonite.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for
vinyl accessory molding complying with requirements indicated.
3. Transition Strip between VCT and Carpet: CTA-XX-A by Johnsonite or approved
substitute.
4. Reducer Strip between Concrete and VCT: RRS-XX-C by Johnsonite or approved
substitute.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based

formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and

substrate conditions indicated.
C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread

manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content,
alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond.
2. Verify that adhesion and dryness characteristics have been determined as required in
Division 7 Section “Vapor Retarders, Vapor Barriers, and Air Barriers” and meet flooring
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
4. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for
preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Use stair-tread-nose filler, according to resilient tread manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lay tiles in pattern as indicated on Drawings.

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles in basket-weave pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles.
2. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated on Drawings.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures,
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in finished floor
areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on
covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply
with tile manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive
mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Hand roll tiles according to tile manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient accessories according to manufacturer's written installation

instructions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
locker bases, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation.
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
5. Install premolded outside corners before installing straight pieces.
6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting
an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed.
Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with
adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
1. Locate reducer strips or transition strips to line up centered under doors, unless noted
otherwise.
D. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written

installation instructions with epoxy adhesive and nose filler.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient
product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
B. Clean floor surfaces as soon as possible after installation. Clean products according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. After cleaning, apply polish to floor surfaces to provide protective floor finish according
to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's
maintenance program.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 09 68 00
CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Tufted carpet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate required.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.

2. Seam locations, types, and methods.
3. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample, each selected color.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
F. CRI Labels: Provide data or certificates showing the carpet and adhesives meet the
requirements of CRI Indoor Air Quality Carpet and Adhesive Testing Programs.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CARPETING 09 68 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering

Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for
product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers'
products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent
loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

BETHEL, MAINE
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Carpet tile: 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 1 box
each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET: CPT-1, CPT-4 tile type (large open areas) according to finish schedule, broadloom
type where indicated.
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Bigelow Commercial - Style: Kudos.
B. Fiber Content: Colorstrand SD Nylon.
C. Dye Method: Solution dyed.
D. Face Construction: Tufted, Textured Multi-Colored Loop.
E. Gauge: 1/8
F. Stitches: 8.5 per inch.
G. Gauge: 1/10 inch.
H. Surface Pile Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd.
I. Primary Backing: Action Bac.
J. Roll Width: 12 feet
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor

conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that
is recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Primer: Provide products recommended by carpet manufacturer. Provide primer that is

compatible with adhesive.
E. Transition Strips: Refer to Division 9 section “Resilient Flooring”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet installation.
B. Cut carpet bails open to full length of rolls to allow the carpet to ventilate a minimum of 72
hours prior to installation.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill minor cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Coordinate with General Contractor for the removal of coatings, including curing compounds,
and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, without using solvents.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Install carpet in strict accordance with the Carpet and Rug
Institute’s IAQ (indoor air quality) Installation guidelines as well as with the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency’s guidelines. Install carpet in accordance with the
recommendations in CRI 104 and the carpet manufacturer’s specifications.

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction
of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams
under the door in closed position.
C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
3.5 BUILDING VENTILATION
A. Operate the building ventilation systems at maximum outdoor air flow before, during and 72
hours after the new carpet installation. Open windows and/or doors when possible during the
carpet installation.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Summary: Paint exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint the back side of access panels.

2. Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.
3. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
C. Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied where
directed.
D. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from same manufacturer as finish
coats.
E. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. of each color and type of finish coat paint used on
Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. California Paint Co.

2. Benjamin Moore & Co.
3. Sherwin-Williams Co.
2.2 PAINT
A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with
substrates.
B. Material Quality: Manufacturer's best-quality paint material of coating types specified that are
formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Colors: Colors to be selected by Architect. Allow for up to 15 different color selections.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM PAINTING 09 91 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anticorrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC content of not more than 350 g/L.
5. Stains: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove hardware lighting fixtures and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items that
cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.
B. Clean and prepare all surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule
painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.

BETHEL, MAINE
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to coating manufacturer’s
written instructions.
1. Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not
practical.
2. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings.
B. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces to provide a smooth, opaque surface
of uniform appearance. Provide a finish free of cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
C. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units
1. Flat Acrylic: Two coats over a filler

a. Filler: High-build, acrylic filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
b. Finish Coat: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:

1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.
C. Smooth Wood, Plywood, or MDO:
1. Low-Luster Acrylic: Two coats over primer.

a. Primer: Exterior, alkyd or latex, wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
b. First and Second Coats: Low-sheen (eggshell or satin), exterior, latex paint
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Wood Trim:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over primer.
E. Wood Shakes and Rough Siding and Trim:
1. Semitransparent Oil/Alkyd Stain: Two coats.

2. Semitransparent Acrylic Stain: Two coats.
3. Semisolid Oil/Alkyd Stain: Two coats.
4. Solid Oil or Oil/Alkyd Stain: Two coats over primer.
5. Solid Acrylic Stain: Two coats over primer.

BETHEL, MAINE
6. Pigmented Bleaching Agent: Two coats oil or oil/alkyd pigmented bleaching agent.
7. Clear Wood Finish: Two coats oil-based clear wood finish.
F. Ferrous Metal:
1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd Enamel: Two Coats over rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer.
b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over galvanized metal primer.
H. Aluminum:
1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over primer.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats primer.
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over block filler.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate
C. Gypsum Board:
1. Flat Acrylic Ceiling Finish: Two coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic-latex-based, interior paint applied at
2. Low-Luster, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by
the manufacturer.
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior
enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Plaster:
1. Low-Luster, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats primer.
E. Acoustical Plaster:

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Flat, Acrylic Latex: Two coats.
F. Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel: Two coats over a wood undercoat.

a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
G. Stained Woodwork:
1. Waterborne, Satin Varnish: Two coats over sealer and waterborne wood stain.
H. Natural-Finish Woodwork:
1. Alkyd-Based, Satin Varnish: Two coats over sealer.

2. Waterborne, Satin Varnish: Two coats over sealer.
3. Waterborne, Full-Gloss Varnish: Two coats over sealer.
4. Wax-Polished Finish: Three coats paste wax over sealer.
I. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over an enamel undercoater and a ferrous metal
primer.
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel
finish coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at
c. Finish Coat: Semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
J. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over galvanized metal primer.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 10 14 00
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of signs:
1. Panel signs.
2. Exterior accessible parking space signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-
scale sections of typical members and other components.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and
lettering layout.
C. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color,
pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements
indicated.
1. Samples for selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each
material required.
A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated
for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production
capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one
source of a single manufacturer.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM SIGNAGE 10 14 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with
code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Interior & Exterior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility

regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 26.

b. Signs for Accessible Spaces:
1) Accessible entrances when not all are accessible (inaccessible entrances
shall have directional signage to indicate the route to the nearest accessible
entrance.
2) Accessible toilet and bathing facilities when not all are accessible.
2. Notify Architect of details or specifications not conforming to code.
D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs
and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers
may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design
concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
a. Mohawk Sign Systems.

b. Welch Architectural Signage.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate
monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of
16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous
service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types:
1. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored opaque
acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards.

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for
copy and background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum
adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended.
C. Metal parking lot signs mounted on posts.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. Substrate: Fabricate signs from 1/8 inch thick matte clear acrylic with edges mechanically and
smoothly finished to eliminate cut marks. Background color to be subsurface.
1. Background Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2. Edge Condition: Straight.
3. Corner Condition: Rounded to 3/8 inch radius.
4. Size: 6 by 6 inch, unless noted otherwise.
B. Copy: Helvetica.
C. Letterform: route copy into face of substrate 1/32 inch deep. Chemically weld (inlay) computer
precision cut tactile copy into routed letter openings so that tactile copy is embedded in
substrate and remains at least 1/32” above surface of substrate.
1. Height: 5/8 inch minimum letter height.
D. Braille: Use engrave process for all Braille areas. Engrave Braille dots into surface of clear
material.
E. Symbols of Accessibility:
1. Accessible elements: Provide international symbol of accessibility.
a. Provide male and female symbols as required for toilets.
2. Text Telephones: Provide international TDD symbol.

3. Volume Telephones: Provide symbol of handset with radiating sound waves.
4. Assistive Listening Systems: Provide international symbol of Access for Hearing Loss.
5. Elevators: Provide symbol containing person on stairs with flame.
6. Accessible Parking Space signs
F. Provide characters complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text
shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with
integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide
color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's
standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

BETHEL, MAINE
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the
type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
2. Locate signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and ADA requirements.
B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated
below:
1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous
surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
C. Parking Lot Signs for Accessible Parking Spaces: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the
methods indicated below:
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
3.3 PANEL SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Types: Sizes: Quantity:
Mens Provide 8" x 6" one for each room

Womens Provide 8" x 6" one for each room
B. Rooms with more than one entrance door shall have a sign at each door.
C. Provide 20 informational signs 4” x 6” allowing for 15 characters and 3 digit room number.
D. Final room names and numbers will be verified during the submittal.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 10 21 15
METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Steel, color-coated finish.

2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
3. Screen Style: Wall hung.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking.

2. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse
shelves, and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include
details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of
anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment
or screen indicated.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 15 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field
measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to
ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. All American Metal Corp.: Type H/B – Headrail Braced.

2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation: Type BE-FF.
3. Metpar Corp.: Corinthian Series, Type FP-500.
4. Partition Manufacturers of America, Inc.: Type H/B – Headrail Braced.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Color-Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to
stretcher-leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized or Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), in

manufacturer's standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) (20 gage).

b. Panels and Screens: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) (20 gage).
c. Doors: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) (22 gage).
d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.079 inch (2.0 mm).
C. Core Material for Metal-Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of

resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25
mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than
0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
E. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels and
screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Clear-anodized aluminum.
F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty stainless steel

operating hardware and accessories:

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Latch:
a. Sliding door latch shall be 16 gauge (1.6 mm).

b. Sliding door latch shall require less than 5-lb force to operate. Twisting latch
operation will not be acceptable.
c. Latch track shall be attached to door by flathead machine screws into factory-
installed threaded brass inserts.
d. Latch handle shall have rubber bumper to act as door stop.
e. Latch shall allow door to be lifted over 16-gauge (1.6-mm) keeper for emergency
access.
2. Hinges
a. Cam shall be adjustable in the field to permit door to be fully closed or partially
open when compartment is unoccupied.
b. Hinges shall be attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, oneway stainless steel
machine screws into factory-installed metal inserts. Fasteners secured directly into
the core are not acceptable.
3. Coat Hook shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall project no more than 1-1/8"
(29 mm) from face of door. Coat hook shall be secured by theft-resistant, one-way
stainless steel screws.
G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with

antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or

chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment
system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted
hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware,

accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Metal-Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core
material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal
corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard

corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor
conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each
pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as
compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide metal-faced screens with integral full-height flanges for attachment to wall.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be
handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open
at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination
rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that
comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments
indicated to be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of
doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
2.4 ZINC- OR ZINC-ALLOY-COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying finishes.
B. Color-Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating
manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
1. Color: One color in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish.
C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units
in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with one full length bracket attached on each side of
panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level,

plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners.
Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in
closed position.
C. Screens: Secure screen to wall with full height brackets on each side. Attach with anchoring
devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set
units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
D. Where full height brackets are mounted on tile wainscot, cut bracket into two pieces and
attached flush to tile and wall surfaces.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written

instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately
30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing
doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Portable fire extinguishers.

2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type,
trim style, and panel style.
B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish
indicated.
C. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard
for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 44 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated and
provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated.
B. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of hoses, hose valves, and hose
racks indicated are accommodated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Portable Fire Extinguishers:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated.
c. Badger; Div. of Figgie Fire Protection Systems.
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
e. J.L. Industries, Inc.
f. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co.
g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
h. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
i. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets:
a. J.L. Industries, Inc.

b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
c. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.
1. J.L. Industries: Cosmopolitan Series 1037F17.

2. Larsen's: Architectural Series SS 2409-6R.

BETHEL, MAINE
3. Potter-Roemer: Alta Series 7062-A-2.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial
quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666/A 666M, Type 302 or Type 304 alloy.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other
locations indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, in

enameled-steel container. Maximum 5 inch diameter tank.
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind
smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-
resistance rating of wall where it is installed.
a. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0478-inch- (1.2-
mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick,
fire-barrier material.
b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
2. Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet.

3. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following:
1. Fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:

1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of
trim indicated.
D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge
(backbend).

BETHEL, MAINE
a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Stainless-steel sheet.
G. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, as
follows:
a. Thickness: 3 mm.
b. Class 1 (clear).
H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows:
1. Fully glazed panel with frame.
I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials

indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles
and rails, and hollow-metal design.
J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for
cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with
cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or
continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes

required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

BETHEL, MAINE
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D. Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the
following:
1. Exterior of cabinets and doors, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another
finish.
2. Interior of cabinets and doors.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants
that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's

standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. Grind and polish
surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured polished finish indicated, free of cross
scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.
C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb.
3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 14 22 50
HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR (Hole-less)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide elevator complete and as shown and specified.
B. General Work Specified Elsewhere:
1 . Clear, legal hoist way of required dimensions for elevator size specified, plumb to
within 1", with all projections or recesses of 2" or more beveled at an angle not
less than 75 degrees from horizontal.
2. Venting of hoist way as required by local building code.
3. Dry pit of required depth, reinforced to sustain the loads imposed, with access
ladders, drains, lights, and waterproofing as required by code or application condi-
tions. For in-ground cylinder, block out as required for installation of cylinder in
pit floor. Block out to be grouted and waterproofed as needed by others upon cy-
linder installation.
4. Machine/pump room of suitable construction with 7'-O" minimum clear head

room, properly lighted, ventilated, and soundproofed as per code or application
conditions. Self-closing and locking door, openrable from inside without a key,
3'-O" X 6'-O" minimum. Heating/cooling provisions as needed to maintain tem-
perature between 50 and 85 degrees F. Fire extinguisher as per code.
5. Supports for guide rail bracket attachment in pit, at each floor and top of hoist
way, reinforced as needed to sustain the loads imposed. Intermediate rail bracket
support as required so as not exceeding maximum spacing as per code. Face of
supports to be located eight (8) inches from the edge of the car platform and on
the centerline of the car rail.
6. Fixture and equipment blackouts and chases as required for proper installation.
7. Hoist way walls of proper construction, compatible with requirements of manu-

facturers fire testing procedures to maintain compliance with labeling require-
ments as per local code. Front walls to be erected after entrance installation or a
minimum rough opening of 12" greater on sides and above finish openings.
8. Grouting and finish work around fixtures and entrance assemblies including en-
trance sills.
9. Cast in anchors, inserts and sleeves, if required, including installation, located as

per elevator installers directions.
10. Car flooring, including installation.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR 14 22 50

BETHEL, MAINE
ii. Finish painting, including frames and doors unless otherwise specified.
12. Pit access ladder with handrails extending a minimum of 42' above landing sill
and not more than 5" from face of wall.
13. Trenching and backfilling as required.
14. Barricades and barriers during construction as required by code or application

conditions.
15. Safe, dry storage areas for elevator equipment and tools before and during con-
struction.
C. Electrical Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Power feeders, including installation to each elevator starter or controller. Pro-

vide main line switch or fused disconnect located as directed. (Shunt trip breaker
if machine room or hoist way have sprinklers.)
2. Single phase 20 amp. power feeders through lockable disconnect in machine room
to terminals provided in elevator control panel for Gar lighting and power.
3. Machine room light with switch and duplex G.F.C.I. outlet.
4. Temporary power of same characteristics as permanent power for equipment test-

ing and adjustment, if required.
5. Smoke sensors or product of combustion sensors in elevator lobbies, top of hoist-

way and machine room with wires from contacts terminating at elevator control-
ler. Main landing detector on separate circuit from others. Final hookup by eleva-
tor contractor.
6. Telephone jack mounted to controller.
7. If hoist way or machine room are sprinkled, a heat detector shall be mounted near
each sprinkler head in hoist way and machine room wired to main line shunt trip
breaker.
8. Pit area lighting (liquid tight) with switch mounted as directed by elevator con-
tractor and duplex G.F.C.I. outlets.
9. Building safety systems, when required, including any special intercom, paging,
or television systems. Instruments, accessories, and related wiring to elevator
controller.
A. Qualified bidders shall be one of the following manufacturers:

BETHEL, MAINE
1. Lawrence Elevator Co., Inc.
2. Approved equal as prequalified.
B. Maintenance: Furnish 12 months maintenance and callback service on each elevator

including:
1 . Monthly equipment examinations, adjustments, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and

parts to insure proper operation.
2. Callback service at no charge to owner, including expenses.
C. Regulatory Agencies: Comply with the latest editions of local governing codes and
ordinances in effect at time of bid.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials and Finishes: Submit finishes data and color selection information.
B. Layout and Installation Drawings: After receipt of the building drawings, the elevator
contractor shall prepare and transmit layout and installation drawings; 6 prints of each
drawing.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protect finished surfaces during transport and handling. Store materials and equip-
ment in room provided by contractor or other safe area.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. The equipment installed is guaranteed for one full year after acceptance against defect
and faulty workmanship. Repair or replace defective material.
1.06 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide hydraulic elevator[s] as specified.
B. System Description
1. Type: Oil hydraulic type with direct acting hole-less cylinders adjacent to
the elevator car and matching room located adjacent at the lowest
landing.
2. Quantity: one
3. Capacity: 2100 LBS
4. Speed: 100 FPM
5. Travel: 21’ - 7" (Verify)
6. Stops: 4

BETHEL, MAINE
7. Openings: 2
8. Platform: 6' 0-1 /2" w x 5' 1-1 /4" d
9. Ceiling Ht: 8'- 0” canopy, 7' - 4" to suspended ceiling
10. Entrance Ht: 7' - 0"
11. Entrance Width: 36"
12. Entrance Type: Single slide
13. Power Supply: 208 volts, 3 phase, 60 cycle main; 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 cycle
lighting and auxiliary operations
14. Operating Signal Fixture Schedule:

a. Main car operating panel
b. Car position indicator: Dot matrix digital readout type.
c. Telephone cabinet and hands free ADA telephone
d. In car direction lantern and chime, entrance jamb mounted
e. Car floor passing chime.
f. Hall pushbutton stations. Buttons and key lockouts.
g. Hall security provisions: Provide keyed lockout of floor buttons at all floors.
h. Hall position indicator: Dot matrix digital readout type at main floor.
15. Auxiliary Operations Schedule:

a. Fireman's emergency service per local code requirements
b. Top of car inspection operation
c. Battery powered emergency lowering/egress operation. Provides capability
for elevator to lower itself to an exit floor and open doors for passenger egress
in the event of loss of main power - Recommended when no building emer-
gency power available.
16. Finish Schedule:
a. Car Door: #4 satin stainless steel

b. Car doorsill: Extruded aluminum
c. Hall door: Powder coat paint
d. Hall frames: Powder coat paint
e. Hall doorsill: Extruded aluminum
f. Pushbuttons: 4 satin stainless steel
g. Cab interior: Raised stand-off panels faced and edged with plastic laminate
h. Cab reveals: #4 satin stainless steel
i. Handrails: #4 satin stainless steel, 3/8" bar, 2
j. Ceiling: Suspended, fully-supported formed stainless steel frame, with
fluorescent lighting above, with milk white PVC shield.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

BETHEL, MAINE
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Provide elevator system by Lawrence Elevator Co., Inc. or approved equal.

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Provide system in which the major components, including elevator hydraulic cylinders,
pumping units, buffers, door operations equipment, elevator car enclosures, and hoist
way entrances are directly produced by the approved manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Extrusions as per ASTM B221.
B. Plywood: PS-1-83, A-D Interior Grade Douglas Fir. Fire treat per AWPA with a suitable
water soluble fire retardant formulation; U.L. FR-S fire hazard classification.
C. Cold Roll Sheet Steel: Provide for all exposed work, as per ASTM A366, with matte
finish.
D. Structural Steel : As per ASTM A36
E. Stainless Steel: As per ASTM Al 67, 300 series, with finish as specified.
F. Plastic Laminates: As per NEMA LD-3, with suitable backer sheets to minimize warping,
general purpose Grade HGS, .050" thick.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Aluminum: Clear finish, unless otherwise specified.
B. Machinery and Equipment: Degrease and shop paint with rust inhibiting primer.
C. Sheet Steel:
1 . Clean: Displace soils through spray impingement and wefting utilizing detergent
packages with necessary surfactants.
2. Phosphatize: Acid etch surface of metal substrate and phosphate coat 20 to 40 MG
per square foot.
3. Rinse: Flush non-adherent soils and phosphate solution
4. Seal/Rinse: Remove trace chemical residue
5. Oven dry immediately to prevent flash rusting
6. Electro statically apply 1 to 2 mil non-reactive prime or finish coating of polyester,
epoxy, or epoxy/polyester hybrid.
7. Oven cure per coating manufacturer recommendations for time and temperature.
D. Stainless Steel: No.4 satin finish unless otherwise specified.
E. Hoist way Hardware: Except as required for proper operation, all hardware not exposed
to public view shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer in manufacturers standard col-
or.
2.04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT - HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS
A. Power Unit: Hydraulic power unit shall be of unitized construction consisting of the mo-
tor pump, valve, oil reservoir and other related items. The unit shall be fagtory-adjusted
and tested before shipment to the jobsite.

BETHEL, MAINE
1 . The pump and valves shall be specifically designed for elevator applications; the
pump shall be of the positive displacement type. The pump/valve assembly shall be
suspended within the oil reservoir by a rubber isolated suspension system, which
shall allow easy removal of components without draining oil from the reservoir.
2. A silencer shall be installed integrally in the oil reservoir interior. The design shall
be such that the silencer shall contain no degradable parts.
3. Hydraulic oil shall be 150 SSU at 150 degrees F.
B. Hydraulic Cylinder: The plungers and cylinders shall be located adjacent to the car, at the
sides, within the hoist way. The length of the plunger(s) shall be sufficient to lift the car
the required amount of floor travel plus normal over-travel. The cylinder(s) shall be fac-
tory pressure tested and the structural strength shall be sufficient to lift the weight of the
elevator as well as the elevator load with legal factor of safety as determined by applica-
ble elevator codes. The assembly shall be installed true and plumb.
C. Performance:
1 . Speed in the up direction: Not less than 95% or more than 110% of specified speed;
maximum down speed not greater than 133% of up speed.
2. Hydraulic Pressure: Factory test at maximum working pressure.
3. Car leveling within % inch from floor level.
2.05 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT - HOISTWAY
A. Guide rails: Provide tee-section forged steel type for elevator car, suitably sized, brack-
eted, and attached to the building support structure to withstand the forces imposed by car
movement. Install plumb and properly aligned for elevator operation with no discernible
horizontal motion.
B. Car Platform and Sling: Provide with fabricated frame of formed steel shapes, gusseted
and rigidly welded. Platform decking shall be steel. The elevator platform will be of all
steel construction, with suitable flooring substrate and an extruded aluminum car door
sill/threshold attached to the top of the car platform.
1 . The sling shall consist of heavy steel stiles properly affixed to a steel crosshead and
bolsters, with adequate bracing members, to remove all strain from the car enclosure.
C. Roller Guides: Provide at the top and bottom of the car frame, consisting of rubber or
neoprene-tired roller wheels, designed for quiet operation on dry, non-lube rated rail sur-
faces. Include auxiliary safety guides as an integral part of the guide shoes.
D. Buffers: Provide spring type as required by applicable codes at the lower limits of eleva-
tor car travel.
2.06 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - MACHINE ROOM AND HOISTWAY
A. Microprocessor Controller: Provide single car selective-collective type operation, con-

trolled from the car station and up and down push buttons located in the hall call stations.

BETHEL, MAINE
The push buttons in the Gar operating station shall be numbered to correspond to the
landings of the elevator.
B. To operate the elevator, press one or more call buttons on the car operating panel and the
car will travel to the first call in line of the direction of travel in which the elevator is
traveling. The car will then respond to all calls in that direction and then reverse direc-
tion and respond to all calls in the new direction in proper mechanical order. The calls
will be responded to in proper mechanical order without regard to time sequence of call
registration.
C. The registration of one or more hall calls will cause the car to respond to the calls in
proper order without regard to sequence of call registration. The control will accept both
hall Galls and car calls without priority to either and will select automatically the proper
order of car dispatch. The dispatch of the car will be such that the car will respond to all
calls in one direction and at the last call in that direction, will reverse itself and respond to
the calls registered in the other direction.
D. If a down call is pressed while an up assigned car is approaching that floor, the car will
not stop but pass that floor. The car will stop for the down call after it has collected all
up assigned calls and reverses in the down direction.
E. If an up call is pressed while a down assigned car is approaching that floor; the car will
not stop, but pass that floor. The car will stop for the up call after it has collected all
down assigned calls and reverses in the up direction.
F. An adjustable door hold open time delay relay will be provided to enable passengers to
enter the car. Pressure of a car button for another landing before this time elapses shall
cause the delay time to be reduced.
G. When the car has responded to a hall call, direction reversal shall be prevented by suffi-
cient time to allow a car call to be registered in order to continue the direction of car tra-
vel.
J. Operation under fire or emergency conditions as per governing code. (Yale 3502 keys)
K. Wiring:
1. General: Use flame-retardant, moisture-proof wire per National Electric Code. Con-
ductors shall be copper.
2. Travel Cable: Provide adequate wires for all required controls plus one (1) spare pair
of shielded communication wires; wire for music.
3. Work light and G.F.C. 1. outlet on car top.
2.07 CAR ENCLOSURE
A. Interior design of ornamental appurtenances as described below, unless otherwise indi-

cated in contract drawings.
I . Exterior wall structure fabricated of 14-gauge sheet steel, frame type construction.
Steel shall be prime powder coated.
2. Roof structure fabricated of 12-gauge sheet steel and properly reinforced. Canopy
shall be provided with white polyester finish on interior, non-slip prime on exterior.

BETHEL, MAINE
3. Front return and header: Integral two-piece swing front return, with finish as sche-
duled. Header shall be of similar design.
4. Ceiling: Choice of manufacturers standard suspended ceilings as scheduled.
5. Stand off panels: 3/4 inch thick particle board panels faced and edged with approved
finish as scheduled.
6. Car doors with finish as scheduled.
7. Base and panel reveals with finish as scheduled.
8. Hand rails as scheduled.
9. Emergency lighting: Provide battery powered unit designed to illuminate car and
power emergency alarm bell in the event of loss of normal lighting power supply.
10. Ventilation: Provide car top mounted ventilation fan and adequate vents as required
by local codes.
2.08 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Unit construction, ULC fire rated for 2 hours, fully self-supporting assembly with no sill
angle or recess required, suitable for direct attachment to flush inside front wall of hoist
way.
1. Doors shall be of the metal horizontal sliding type and shall be furnished in place at
each landing opening; minimum 16 gauge cold rolled sheet steel, two door gibs per
panel, concealed reinforcing ribs, finish as scheduled.
2. Frames shall be constructed of bolted construction for unit assembly, fabricated from
14-gauge cold rolled sheet steel, finish as scheduled.
3. Door hardware shall include sills, integral hangers, fascia plates, constant tension
door closure weight, and miscellaneous hardware as required for proper installation.
4. Hangers and integral tracks, complete with two-point suspension; metal sheaves with
resilient insert-type riding surfaces; ball bearing type rollers.
5. Door Jamb Identification: Provide at each side of the entrance jamb at height of 60"
above finish floor, raised floor identification numerals and Braille, in compliance
with ADA requirements.
2.09 DOOR OPERATION EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide heavy-duty master-type operators with solid state controlled permanent
magnet motor.
B. Door protection per code but including:
1. Door obstruction protection shall be provided by an electronic sensing device consist-

ing of a full door height array of infrared sensors which shall project across the en-
trance to prevent the car and hoist way doors from closing if a passenger or object in-
terrupts the sensor array. A mechanical reversing edge shall not be provided.
a. When a stop is made, the door shall remain in the open position for a predeter-
mined interval unless the closing is initiated by interruption or re-establishment
of the infrared array, by registration of a car call, or pushing the door close but-
ton.

BETHEL, MAINE
b. The doors shall be prevented from closing as long as the infrared array is inter-
rupted. If the door's are closing and the infrared array device is activated, the
doors will stop and re-open. After an adjustable length of time, the doors will
proceed to close.
c. Automatic Disable Feature: Should the infrared array indicate an obstruction for
an adjustable time period, control circuitry shall override and disable the sensing
unit to allow door's to enter nudging mode as described herein.
C. Door Adjustment: shall be readily achieved from within the elevator car, without the ne-
cessity to access the elevator machine room.
2.10 ELEVATOR OPERATING SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide U.S. Elevator Corporation Soft touch pushbutton fixtures, or manufac-
turer’s standard designs approved as equal; buttons shall be flush with parent surface;
push button devices shall incorporate solid state switching and illumination of floor num-
ber via integral LED's (light emitting diodes) only; mechanical contact type switches and
illumination via miniature incandescent light bulbs shall not be acceptable.
B. Car operating stations shall be integrally constructed with swing front return, as specified
and shall include:
1. Braille-Arabic per code: Characters raised from the parent surface in accordance with
applicable codes; back mounted mechanical fastenings required. Glued exposed me-
chanical fasteners, or decals not acceptable; locate adjacent to the left of each public
use button.
2. Floor Indication Buttons: Provide one for each floor served and blank inoperative
buttons for future floors, as specified.
3. Emergency Stop Switch and Emergency Alarm: Per code.
4. Door open and door close buttons.
5. Key switches, as required for specific functions and operation. Key switches will be
manufacturers standard configuration.
6. Fireman's key switch and/or phone jack, if required, per code. Provide for main car
operating panels only.
C. Car Position Indicator
1 . Elevator floor location and direction of travel indications provided via illumination of
an LED dot matrix display array. Minimum numeral size shall be no less than 1 1/2"
in height, corresponding to each floor and illuminating UP and DOWN direction in-
dicators. Illumination shall be via integral LEDs (light emitting diodes) only.
2. Mount in swing return above operating pushbuftons.
3. Provide audible signal each time elevator passes floor via electronically generated
tone.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that hoist way, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this Section.
B. Verify shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerances.
C. Confirm electrical power is available and has correct characteristics.

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Report defects or deficiencies.
E. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Arrange for temporary electrical power to be available for installation work and testing of
elevator components.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with ANSI A17.11 and MAINE code.

B. Install all elevator components as specified and required for a complete operating eleva-
tor system.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform periodic field inspection as work is performed to confirm installation in accor-

dance with project requirements.
B. Perform and meet tests required by [ANSI/ASME A17.1] and [MAINE] codes.
C. Perform system testing to verify equipment performance criteria has been met in the fol-
lowing areas:
1 Contract speed
2. Leveling accuracy
3. Door operation times
4. Door closing force
D. Supply instruments as required to execute tests.
E. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by jurisdictional authorities.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Arrange for and perform a final check of elevator operation with the owner or owner's
representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. Confirm that the com-
plete system is operating properly.
B. Demonstrate any special operational features, and provides operating instructions for
owner use.
C. Provide keys needed for actuation of any operating device so equipped.
3.06 TEMPORARY USE
A. Do not allow unless specifically authorized by owner or owner's representative, with sa-
tisfactory arrangements for restoration of the elevator to new condition at completion of
temporary use. Elevator Contractor will be compensated for any use before the State in-
spection has been performed and a certificate issued to the owner.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The work covered by this Section of the specifications includes the furnishing of labor, materials,
equipment, transportation, permits, inspections and incidentals and the performing of operations
required to design, install and test modifications to the existing pressurized, fully supervised, wet pipe
fire protection system for full building protection in accordance with NFPA, IBC, and the Owner's
insurance underwriter.
A. The drawings and the specifications including SECTION 23 05 00 “Supplemental General

Mechanical Conditions” are hereby made a part of the work of this section.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Work shall be performed by a qualified Contractor primarily engaged in the
design and installation of Fire Protection Systems. The fire protection system design shall be
performed under the direction of, and sealed by, a professional engineer registered in the State of New
Hampshire or with NICET Level III (minimum) Certification.
B. Welding qualifications of individuals installing welded piping shall be certified by the National
Certified Welding Bureau for the type(s) of weld(s) proposed for use in piping assembly.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Items for which the submittal requirements of section 23 05 00 “Supplemental General Mechanical
Conditions”, apply are as Follows:
1. Hydrant flow test.

2. System components.
3. Hydraulic calculations.
4. Piping layout, details and control diagram.
5. Flushing and testing records.
6. Certificate of installation.
7. Copy of Fire Protection Contractors License.
8. Welding certificates of individual welding technicians.
9. Sprinkler heads.
10. Firestopping materials and methods.
Submit hydrant flow test, equipment descriptive data, hydraulic calculations and system layout for
review by the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. Submit the system layout to the Architect for review.
The Architect's review will be limited to checking for conformance with the design concept of the
project and general compliance with the contract documents and will in no way assume liability for
review for compliance with codes, standards and laws.
1.5 SPRINKLER COVERAGE
A. Sprinkler head coverage shall conform with NFPA requirements for the use of the building (Light
Hazard or Ordinary Hazard-Group 1 (as required), 0.10 GPM/SF density (minimum) for the
hydraulically most remote 1500 S.F.). Coverage in other areas shall be increased accordingly where
required by the Authority having jurisdiction.
211313 – Wet-Pipe Sprinklers - Page 1 of 4

B. If the requirements of the inspection agency or the Owner's insuring agent are more rigorous than
those stated herein, then the more rigorous requirements shall govern.
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND HARDWARE
A. Pipe, Fittings, Joints, Hangers, Valves, Fire Department Connections, Alarms: Conform to NFPA-13,
Installation of Sprinkler Systems. Grooved or thinwall piping systems are not permitted.
B. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Interior Heated Spaces: Conform to NFPA-13, commercial quick response type. Provide
concealed type with white finish for acoustical tile ceilings and GWB ceilings. Dry pendent or
sidewall heads, where required, may be standard response type.
2. Provide a spare head cabinet with wrenches and twelve (12) heads of each orifice size, finish,
temperature classification, pattern and length furnished in the project.
3. Temperature ratings for sprinkler heads shall be suitable for the space. Heads in boiler rooms,
and similar locations with concentrated heat sources shall have heads with the appropriate
temperature rating.
2.2 WATER SUPPLIES
A. Existing.
2.3 DEVICES
A. Detection devices and associated wiring both within the fire protection system and connected to the
building Fire Alarm System shall be the responsibility of the Sprinkler Contractor.
2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Not Applicable.
2.5 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping system and valve identification and color coding shall be in accordance with ANSI.
2.6 CEILING CAVITIES
A. Ceiling cavities above all suspended acoustical tile ceilings in corridor areas and certain other areas
contain bundled electrical cables and individual wires and shall be sprinklered. Coordinate sprinkler
requirements with the Electrical Drawings.
2.7 SPRINKLER SYSTEM ZONING
A. The tenant space shall have an area zone alarm to connect to the building fire alarm panel. The zone
alarm shall consist of a flow switch, isolation valve with tamper switch and other components per
NFPA. The zone alarm shall be tied in to the existing building fire alarm panel.
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING LAYOUT AND DESIGN
A. System requirements, installation requirements, design, plans, and calculations: Conform to NFPA-
13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

B. Sprinkler piping shall be run concealed above ceilings. Piping shall not be exposed in occupied
spaces.
C. Pipe penetrations through walls and floors shall be in accordance with Section 23 05 00 – General
Mechanical. Traverse points of piping shall be escutcheoned with split chrome floor and ceiling
plates and spring anchors, where visible to occupancy.
D. Coordinate design and layout with building structure and building systems. The work shown in the
contract documents has precedence for space requirements. Work of other trades may be modified or
moved only with permission of the trade involved. Costs associated with modifications or relocations
shall be the same as for "Substitutions" Section 23 05 00. Sprinkler system piping may need to be
located within the structural system in certain locations.
E. The Architect shall review proposed system layout and reserve the right to relocate heads, substitute
head system and in general review final layout for components visible in occupied spaces.
3.2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Approval, flushing, hydrostatic testing, instructions, and certificates of installation: Conform to

NFPA-13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
B. Disinfect the water piping in accordance with AWWA C601. Fill the piping systems with solution
containing a minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for
minimum of 24 hours. Repeat disinfection if chlorine residual is less than 10 parts per million after
24 hours. Flush the solution from the systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine
contents is not greater than 0.2 parts per million.
C. Closing in Work:
1. General: Cover up or enclose work after it has been properly and completely reviewed.
2. No additional cost to the Owner will be allowed for uncovering and recovering, work that is
covered or enclosed prior to required review and acceptance.
D. Cleanup and Corrosion Prevention:
1. Upon completion of the work thoroughly clean and flush piping systems to the sewer with
water.
2. Piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Dirt, dust, and debris shall be removed and
the premises left in a clean and neat condition.
3. Before uncovered piping is permitted to be concealed, corrosion and rust shall be wire brushed
and cleaned and in the case of iron products, a coat of approved protective paint applied to
these surfaces. When corrosion is from the effects of hot solder paste, the areas shall be
cleaned and polished and a wash of bicarbonate of soda and water used to neutralize the acid
condition.
E. Instructions: On completion of the project, provide a technician familiar with the system to
thoroughly instruct the Owner's representative in the care and operation of the system. The total
period of instruction shall not be less than four (4) hours. The time of instruction shall be arranged
with the Owner.
F. Warranty: For a period of one (1) year after completion of the installation repair or replace any
defective materials or workmanship. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be turned
over to the Owner fully inspected and tested, and in operational condition.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping shall be performed in accordance with Specification Section 07 84 13 “Firestopping”.

All penetrations of fire-rated assemblies including walls and floors by mechanical system components
(piping, ductwork, conduits, etc.) shall be firestopped as specified.
* END OF SECTION *

SECTION 220000 - PLUMBING
1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. The drawings and the specifications including Section 230500 “Supplemental General Mechanical
Conditions” are hereby made a part of the work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
equipment, transportation, permits, inspections, and incidentals and the performing of operations
required to provide a complete and functional plumbing system.
B. Work shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Maine State Plumbing Code and
applicable local ordinances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitutions: Your attention is directed to Section 230500-"Substitutions", relative to competition

and the (ONLY) notation. Familiarity with this section shall be achieved before reading the
PRODUCTS section of this specification.
B. The items for which the submittals paragraph in Section 230500, Supplemental General
Mechanical Requirements, apply are as follows:
1. Piping materials.
2. Valves.
3. Pipe hangers.
4. Fixtures and trim.
5. Miscellaneous equipment.
6. Water heating equipment.
7. Piping, valves and equipment identification.
8. Thermostatic mixing valves.
9. Firestopping.
10. Gas piping system.
11. Underground propane tanks.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Soil and Waste (Sanitary) and Vent Piping: Sanitary piping shall be cast iron "no Hub" (ONLY)
above grade, service weight cast iron or schedule 40 PVC below grade. Vent piping may be
Sched. 40 PVC at contractor's option, cast iron (ONLY) thru roof.
B. Domestic Water Piping and Condensate Drain Piping: Type L hard copper tubing and cast bronze
or wrot copper solder fittings.
C. Exposed Water and Waste Piping at Fixtures: I.P.S. copper with cast brass fittings chrome plated
finish, with deep one piece escutcheon plates at traverse points.
D. Solder: Lead-free (ONLY), Englehard Silvabrite 100, 440oF melting point, ASTM B32.
2.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM
220000 – Plumbing - Page 1 of 10

A. Gas Piping: Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM 120 or A53, with threaded joints and
malleable iron fittings (Above grade).
B. Gas Piping (Below Grade): Omegaflex Tracpipe, corrugated stainless steel tubing with vented
polyethylene jacketing, grounded per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Ball Valves for Gas Service: Copper alloy with chromium plated floating ball per Federal
Specification WW-V-35B, Type II, Class 3. Blowout-proof stem, reinforced teflon seats, threaded
ends, quarter turn on-off, 600 WOG rating, 250 psi rating for LP gas, UL-listed as an LP gas shutoff
valve, Apollo Model 80-100 series.
2.3 NO HUB COUPLINGS
A. For DWV piping, couplings shall be Clamp-All HI-TORQ125, shall maintain 15 PSI hydrostatic
seal, constructed 304SS housing and ASTM C-564 neoprene gasket. Couplings shall meet FM
1680, the IBC and local codes and requirements.
2.4 VALVES
A. Ball Valves: Copper alloy with stationary seat ring and chromium plated or stainless steel floating
ball per Federal Specification WW-V-35B. Blowout proof stem, reinforced PTFE seal. Sizes 2"
and larger shall have threaded ends. Provide lever handle with stem extension as required to allow
operation without interfering with pipe insulation.
B. Check Valves: Horizontal Swing, MSS SP-80, Type 3, Class 125.
C. Drain Valves: Provide ball valves with 3/4" hose connection and brass cap.
D. Fixture Service Stop Valves: Angle Wheel Handle Stop, ASME A112.18M.
1. Each plumbing fixture shall have individual stop valves in the hot and cold supplies.
2. Service stop valves exposed in finished areas shall be chrome-plated brass; in non-
finished areas, ball valves shall be used in lieu of chromed supplies.
E. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Bronze body, tested under ANSI Z21.22, AGA and
ASME rated, 125 psig/210oF relief settings.
F. Balancing Valves: Taco “Accu-Flo”.
1. Bronze or brass body and internals, teflon seats, memory stop, 300 psi working pressure,
250oF working temperature. Balancing devices shall have provisions for connecting a
portable differential pressure gauge. Each balancing device shall be sized to provide a
differential pressure reading between 2 and 5 feet with the valve full open at design flow
rates.
2. Install per manufacturer's recommendations for adjacent length of straight pipe.
3. Submittals shall indicate gpm, size, wide open differential pressure meter reading, and
actual water pressure drop.
G. Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts Regulator series U5LP bronze body, bronze internals, 200 psi
working pressure, 200oF maximum temperature, adjustable pressure range 10-25 psig. Provide
with inlet strainer (screen).
2.5 PIPE HANGERS
A. Adjustable Swivel Hangers:

1. Pipe sizes 2" and less: Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 800, oversize for insulated piping
systems.
2. Pipe sizes larger than 2": Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 100, oversize for insulated piping
systems.
B. Riser Clamp: Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 126 CT copper plated for copper piping, Fig. 126 for
iron and PVC piping.
C. Insulation Shields: 18 ga. galvanized steel, 180o wrap, Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 265P, Type H.
D. All piping 20' upstream and downstream of pumps shall also have Mason Industries PC30N
precompressed double deflection spring isolators installed.
2.6 FIXTURES AND TRIM
A. (P-1) Water Closet: Floor-mounted, tank type, Toto Drake II CST454CEF, elongated bowl, white
vitreous china, low consumption (1.28 gpf). Chrome trip lever shall be mounted on the wide side of
the fixture. Fixture shall be suitable for 12” rough-in.
1. Seat: Church Model 380TC, commercial weight solid plastic, open front with cover, self
sustaining check hinge, for elongated bowl, white color.
B. (P-1A) ADA Water Closet: Floor-mounted, tank type, Toto Drake CST744EF, elongated bowl,
white vitreous china, low consumption (1.28 gpf). Color matched trip lever shall be mounted on
the wide side of the stall. Fixture shall be suitable for 12” rough-in.
1. Seat: Church Model 380TC, commercial weight solid plastic, open front with cover, self
sustaining check hinge, for elongated bowl, white color.
2. Total installed height of front edge of seat shall be 17" to 19" above finished floor. Final
installation shall meet ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1.
C. (P-2) Urinal: Wall-hung, “Ultra Low Consumption, Zurn Model Z5798 “EcoVantage”, 1/8 GPF (1
pint), ADA-compliant, Sloan, Kohler, or approved equal, white vitreous china, with fastening
hardware, 2" brass urinal flange, gasket, urinal lip shall extend a minimum of 14" from the finished
wall.
1. Carrier (if required): Zurn, MIFAB, Josam or Jay R. Smith concealed wall carriers.
2. The flush valve shall be Zurn “HydroVantage” or Sloan Model 8186, sensor-operated,
electronic, battery powered and self-powered with manual override. Furnish with batteries
and install per the manufacturers recommendations.
D. (P-2A) ADA Urinal: Wall-hung, “Ultra Low Consumption, Zurn Model Z5798 “EcoVantage”, 1/8
GPF (1 pint), ADA-compliant, Sloan, Kohler, or approved equal, white vitreous china, with fastening
hardware, 2" brass urinal flange, gasket, urinal lip shall extend a minimum of 14" from the finished
wall.
1. Carrier (if required): Zurn, MIFAB, Josam or Jay R. Smith concealed wall carriers.
2. ADA urinals shall be installed with front rim a maximum of 17” above finished floor. Final
installation shall meet ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1.

3. The flush valve shall be Zurn “HydroVantage” or Sloan Model 8186, sensor-operated,
electronic, battery powered and self-powered with manual override. Furnish with batteries
and install per the manufacturers recommendations.
E. (P-3) ADA Lavatory, Wall Hung: Toto LT307.4, 21"x18.25”,anti-splash rim, white vitreous
china, faucet holes on 4" centers, provide with concealed arm carrier.
1. Faucet: Symmons Symmetrix Model S-20-2-FR single handle, 0.5 GPM flow aerator,
polished chrome finish, ceramic control cartridge.
2. Drain: Perforated grid strainer with bright metal finish.
3. Trap: Chrome-plated, cast copper alloy, 1-1/4" P-trap with cleanout plug. Adjustable
with connected elbow and nipple to wall.
4. Lavatory shall be installed at 34" above finished floor (See Architectural drawings). Final
installation of lavatory and accessories shall meet ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1.
Insulate exposed traps and supplies with Truebro Lavguard.
F. (P-3A) ADA Lavatory, Countertop: Toto LT542G, 19”x12-3/8, white vitreous china with sanagloss
finish, front overflow.
1. Faucet: Symmons Symmetrix Model S-20-2-FR single handle, 0.5 GPM flow aerator,
polished chrome finish, ceramic control cartridge.
2. Drain: Perforated grid strainer with bright metal finish.
3. Trap: Chrome-plated, cast copper alloy, 1-1/4" P-trap with cleanout plug. Adjustable
with connected elbow and nipple to wall.
4. Lavatory shall be installed at 34" above finished floor (See Architectural drawings). Final
installation of lavatory and accessories shall meet ADA guidelines and ANSI A117.1.
Insulate exposed traps and supplies with Truebro Lavguard.
G. (P-4) ADA Kitchen Sink, Single Bowl: Elkay LRAD2521, stainless steel, 25"x21.25"x5.5” overall
size, 4 faucet holes on 4" centers, fully sound deadened.
1. Faucet: Symmons Symmetrix Model S-23-2-10 wrist operation handle, 10-7/8" swing
spout, polished chrome finish, 2.0 gpm ceramic control cartridge, single lever with pull-
out side spray.
2. Strainer: Removable basket and neoprene stopper.
3. Sink installation shall be in compliance with the ADA guidelines.
4. Exposed traps and supplies with Truebro Lavguard.
H. (P-5) Mop Basin: Fiat Model MSB-2424, molded stone, 24"x24"x10" with 1" wide shoulders; 3"
stainless steel drain with combination dome strainer and lint basket.
1. Faucet: Fiat Service Faucet Model 830-AA, chrome-plated with vacuum breaker, integral
stops, adjustable wall brace, pail hook, and 3/4" hose thread on spout.
2. Hose and Hose Bracket: Fiat Model 832-AA, 30" long flexible heavy duty 5/8" cloth
reinforced rubber hose with 3/4" chrome coupling at one end, 5"x3", stainless steel
bracket with rubber grip.

3. Wall Guard: Fiat Model MSG-2424, stainless steel wall guards.
4. Mop Bracket: Fiat Model 889-CC, 24" stainless steel.
5. Caulk around mop basin at floor and walls with white silicone caulk.
I. (P-6) Electric Water Coolers / Bubblers ADA Bi-Level Water Cooler: Elkay Model
EZOSTL8C, Halsey-Taylor Model HAC8EEBL-Q ADA Child SS, or approved equal, dual
height, stainless steel finish, electronic eye controls, lead free, ADA compliant for both
children and adults, wheelchair accessible. ADA compliant fountain shall be at the right or
left of the unit, as indicated on the Architectural drawings, non-ADA fountain on the
opposite side of the unit. The unit shall be capable of cooling 8.0 GPH of 80 F. water to
50 F. with 90 F. ambient. Motor shall be 1/5 hp., 120v. The bubbler shall be “Flexi-
Guard” or “Easy-Flex”. Refrigerant shall be R134A.
1. Furnish with vandal-resistant kits and “Sentry Guard” water filters.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Floor Drain (FD-1): Zurn Z-415, cast iron body with 2" or 3" bottom outlet, combination invertible
membrane clamp and adjustable collar. Strainer shall be 6" diameter Zurn "Type B", polished
nickel-bronze. Floor drains shall have “deep seal” traps and trap primer connection, connection
from trap primer shall be PEX.
B. Floor/Yard Cleanout (FCO/YCO): Zurn Z-1400 adjustable floor cleanout, cast iron body, with gas
and watertight ABS tapered thread plug. Provide size equal to piping served with maximum size
of 4".
1. Concrete floor finishes: Scoriated round polished bronze top.
2. Sheet tile finishes: Scoriated square polished bronze top recessed to receive tile.
3. Carpeted finishes: Scoriated round polished bronze top and carpet marker.
C. Wall Cleanout (WCO): Sanitary tee with threaded raised nut or countersunk-nut cleanout plug
located behind Zurn Z-1468 round stainless steel wall access cover.
D. Vacuum Breaker: Watts Model N36, 3/4" size, 20 CFM capacity.
E. Strainer: Watts Series 777, MIL-S-16293, bronze body wye-type, 200 WOG rating, screwed end
connections, 20 mesh stainless steel, monel, or bronze screen.
F. Backflow Preventor (BFP): Conforming to AWWA C506, FCCHR-USC Manual Section 10, and
UL listed. Types, sizes and capacities scheduled.
1. Double Check (DC): Double check backflow assembly with test ports, bronze body with
stainless steel springs, corrosion resistant internals, stop and waste ball valves.
2. Atmospheric Double Check (DCA): Double check continuous pressure type with
atmospheric port for low hazard applications, 250oF maximum water temperature, bronze
body, stainless steel internals with rubber seals and integral strainer.
C. Reduced Pressure Zone (RPZ): Reduced pressure principle type; bronze body with
stainless steel internals. Provide bronze body ball valves, test cocks, and air gap fittings.

G. Freezeless Wall Hydrant: Woodford Model B65, recessed wall hydrant with wall box and cover,
3/4" size, brass body, brass head nut, loose tee key, automatic draining, with vacuum breaker.
H. Thermometers: Trerice Series V80445 or Ashcroft Series 600A-04, vapor actuated, adjustable
angle, 4-1/2" diameter face, cast aluminum case, stainless steel ring, glass window, white
background dial with black figures, black finished stainless steel pointer, brass movement with
bronze bearings, phosphor bronze bourdon tube. Accuracy shall be to within one scale division.
1. Thermowell: Provide with brass thermometer wells projecting a minimum of 2" into the
pipe with extension to face of insulation. Provide with heat transfer fluid to fill interstitial
space between bulb and well.
2. Range: 30oF to 240oF for domestic hot water systems.
I. Pressure Gauges: Trerice Series 800 or Ashcroft Type 1005, Grade B, 3-1/2" dial, ANSI B40.1,
drawn steel case, white background dial with black figures, clear glass window, brass movement,
beryllium copper bourdon tube, 0 to 100 PSI range, accuracy shall be within 2% over middle half
of scale and 3% over the remainder. Provide with shut off petcock and restrictor.
J. Water Hammer Arrestor (Shock Absorber): Plumbing and Drainage Institute listed.
Schedule:
"A" - Size #100 PDI - 0-11 Fixture Units

"B" - Size #200 PDI - 12-32 Fixture Units
"C" - Size #300 PDI - 33-60 Fixture Units
K. Vacuum Breaker: Watts Model N36, 3/4" size, 15 CFM capacity.
L. Strainer: Watts Series 777, MIL-S-16293, bronze body wye-type, 200 WOG rating, screwed end
connections, 20 mesh stainless steel, monel, or bronze screen.
M. Automatic Trap Primers: Zurn Model Z-1022, MIFAB or Smith,“Sani-Guard” Trap Primer, all-bronze
body with integral vacuum breaker, union connection and supply manifold as required to serve floor
drain traps. Trap primers shall comply with ANSI/ASSE Standard 1018. Connect to each floor drain
trap.
N. Electronic Trap Primer (ETP): PPP Inc. PT-series, Mifab MI-200 or Zurn, 120V., atmospheric
vacuum breaker, pre-set 24 hour clock, manual over-ride switch, shut-off valve, water hammer
arrestor, calibrated manifold. Individually pipe to floor drain traps. In finished spaces the trap primer
shall be enclosed in a flush stainless steel wall box with hinged door and tamper-resistant lock. Run
trap primer piping (PEX) to each floor drain trap or indirect waste receptor trap as required by Code.
Provide a ball shut-off valve on the inlet.
O. Elevator Pit Drainage Systems: Stancor, Inc., Model SE50 “Oil-Minder System”, Liberty Pumps
“ELV” series, SeeWater, Inc. “Oil-Smart”, Zoeller, or approved equal, ½ HP., 3600 RPM, 120V. , 2"
discharge with float switch, 3000 GPH (min.). A NEMA 4X control panel and a self-cleaning,
hermetically sealed, stainless steel oil sensing probe shall alarm if oil is sensed. The pump shall be
submersible with discharge check valve. The equipment shall be UL-listed.
P. Heat Trace shall be Raychem 8BTV copper bus wire with self-regulating, semi-conductive core and
modified polyolefin jacket. Provide with Raychem monitoring system.
2.8 WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT

A. Electric Water Heater (EWH): A.O. Smith, model indicated, UL 732 and ASHRAE 90A (1982
requirements) compliant, Glass lined tank with replaceable anode rods and plastic jacket, factory
installed ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, and adjustable range thermostat. Set
to provide 120oF water temperature.
2.9 PIPING, VALVE, AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping identification: Provide plastic "wrap-around" identification markers indicating flow and
fluid flowing for the following:
1. Domestic Hot Water

2. Recirculated Domestic Hot Water
3. Domestic Cold Water
4. Vent Piping
5. Exposed Above-ground Sanitary Drain Piping
6. Condensate Piping
7. Gas Piping
B. Markers shall be placed 30-50 ft. apart for piping in accessible areas.
C. Markers shall be placed outside the pipe insulation and in the most obvious location for viewing.
D. Valve Tags:
1. Attach to each valve a 1-1/2" round or octagonal brass tag with 1/2" indented numerals
filled with a durable black compound. In addition to the valve numbers, each tag shall
identify the system it controls. Service stop valves exposed in finished areas need not be
tagged.
2. Tags shall be securely attached to stems of valves with copper or brass "S" hooks, or
chains.
3. Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing its
function. Upon completion of the work, one (1) copy of each chart, sealed to rigid
backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be hung where
directed. Two (2) additional unmounted copies shall be delivered to the Architect.
4. Tags and charts shall be coordinated with Section 15700 Heating System and when
completed this work shall have been done sequentially.
E. Equipment Identification: Provide laminated plastic nameplates for equipment, pumps, mixing
valves, backflow preventers, and balancing valves. Nameplates shall be laminated 0.125-inch
thick melamine plastic conforming to Fed. Spec. L-P-387, black with white center core. Surface
shall be a matte finish, corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1.0 inch by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be
minimum of 0.25-inch high normal block lettering.
2.10 UNDERGROUND PROPANE TANK(S)
A. Shall be American Welding & Tank, vacuum pressured, ASME construction, 1000 gallon capacity
with stainless steel seal welded data plates, four (4) lifting lugs, riser pipe, liquid withdrawal valve,
galvanized dome with hinged cover, UG multivalve, installed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
B. See the "Civil / Site Drawings" for tank quantities and locations.

3 PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and
verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence.
2. Verify that plumbing may be installed in strict accordance with pertinent codes and
regulations and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. Provide and erect in accordance with the best practice of the trade piping shown on the drawings
and as required to complete the intended installation. Make offsets as shown or required to place
piping in proper position to avoid other work and to allow the application of insulation and finish
painting to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. The size and general arrangements, as well as the methods of connecting piping, valves, and
equipment, shall be as indicated, or so as to meet the requirements of the Architect.
C. Piping shall be erected so as to provide for the easy and noiseless passage of fluids under working
conditions.
D. Install unions to facilitate removal of equipment.
E. Copper pipe shall be reamed to remove burrs.
F. Connections between copper and steel piping shall be made with brass fittings.
G. Solder joints shall be made with lead free solder. Clean surfaces to be soldered and use a paste
flux. Wash joints with sodium bicarbonate and water to remove corrosive effects of heated solder
paste. Caution: Lead-bearing solder is not permitted.
H. Pipe penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be in accordance with Section 15000
"Supplemental General Mechanical Requirements". Traverse points of piping shall be
escutcheoned with split chrome floor and ceiling plates and spring anchors, where visible to
occupancy.
I. Provide a cleanout in the vertical position at the base of each sanitary drop.
J. Sanitary and vent piping shall be sized and installed at 1/4" per foot slope.
3.3 PIPE HANGERS
A. Impact driven studs are prohibited.
B. Copper Tubing: supported at intervals with rod sizes as follows, double nuts on hangers and on
beam clips.
Copper Size Hanger Intervals Rod Sizes

1/2" 5' 3/8"
3/4" 6' 3/8"
1" 6' 3/8"
1-1/4" 8' 3/8"
1-1/2" 8' 3/8"

2" 10' 3/8"
C. Cast Iron Pipe: Supported at intervals with rod sizes as follows, double nuts on hangers and on
beam clips.
Cast Iron Size Hanger Intervals Rod Sizes

1-1/2" 5' 3/8"
2" 5' 3/8"
2-1/2" 5' 1/2"
3" 6' 1/2"
4" 7' 5/8"
D. PVC Pipe: Supported at 4 foot intervals.
E. Verticals: Supported by use of clamp hangers at every story height, and at not more than 6 feet
intervals for copper piping 1-1/4" and smaller size.
F. Spring Isolators: All pipe 20' upstream and downstream of pumps.
3.4 CLOSING IN UNINSPECTED WORK
A. General: Cover up or enclose work after it has been properly and completely reviewed.
B. If any of the work is covered or enclosed prior to required inspections and review, uncover the
work as required for the test and review. After review, tests and acceptance, repairs and
replacements shall be made by the appropriate trades with such materials as necessary for the
acceptance by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5 CLEANUP AND CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Upon completion of the work thoroughly clean and flush piping systems to the sewer with water.
B. Fixtures, piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Dirt, dust, and debris shall be
removed and the premises left in a clean and neat condition.
C. Caulk around fixtures at floor and wall.
D. Before covering is applied to piping systems, clips, rods, clevises and other hanger attachments,
and before uncovered piping is permitted to be concealed, corrosion and rust shall be wire brushed
and cleaned and in the case of iron products, a coat of approved protective paint applied to these
surfaces. When corrosion is from the effects of hot solder paste, the areas shall be cleaned and
polished and a wash of bicarbonate of soda and water used to neutralize the acid condition.
3.6 DISINFECTING
A. After the entire potable water system is completed, cleaned and tested, and just before the building
is ready to be occupied, disinfect the system as follows: After flushing the mains, introduce a
water and chlorine solution for a period of not less than three hours before final flushing of the
system.
3.7 TESTS
A. Sanitary soil, waste and vent piping: Fill with water to top of vents, and test as required by Code.
B. Water piping shall be tested to a pressure of 100 lbs. per square inch for at least 30 minutes.
Pressure drop in this period shall not exceed two pounds per square inch. Leaks shall be repaired
and system retested. Notify Architect 24 hours before test is to be performed.
3.8 INSTRUCTIONS

A. On completion of the project, provide a competent technician to thoroughly instruct the Owner's
representative in the care and operation of the system. The total period of instruction shall not
exceed four (4) hours. The time of instruction shall be arranged with the Owner.
3.9 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping shall be performed in accordance with Specification Section 07840 “Firestopping”.

All penetrations of fire-rated assemblies including walls and floors by mechanical system
components (piping, ductwork, conduits, etc.) shall be firestopped as specified.
* END OF SECTION *

Maine Internal and Gem Museum
SECTION 230000 - HVAC SYSTEM
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
required to install the heating and ventilating systems indicated.
A. The drawings and the specifications including SECTION 230500 "SUPPLEMENTAL

MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" are hereby made a part of the work of this
section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

and the (ONLY) notation. Familiarity with this section should be achieved before reading the
B. The items for which the submittals paragraph in Section 230500, Supplemental Mechanical
General Requirements, apply are as follows:
1. Piping materials.
2. Hangers.
3. Valves.
4. Piping, valve and equipment identification.
5. Hydronic specialties.
6. Gas fired boiler.
7. Boiler intake/vent components.
8. Wall heaters.
9. Unit heaters.
10. Fans.
11. Circulating pumps.
12. Blower coils.
13. Air cooled condensers.
14. Humidifier
15. Dehumidifier.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Hot Water Heating Piping: Type L hard copper tubing and cast bronze or wrought copper solder
fittings or Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with threaded joints and malleable iron fittings.
B. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Refrigerant Piping: Dimensions and material requirements for pipe, pipe fittings and
components shall conform to ASHRAE 15 and ANSI B31.5 and shall be compatible with
fluids used and capable of withstanding the pressures and temperatures of the service.
2. Tubing used for refrigerant service shall be cleaned, sealed, capped, or plugged prior to
shipment from the manufacturer's plant.
230000 – HVAC System - Page 1 of 11

3. Copper Pipe and Fittings: Provide seamless copper tubing, hard drawn, Type K for
underground use, Type L for exposed above ground use, ASTM B 88, or ASTM B 280.
a. Fittings for copper tubing shall be wrought copper, brazing, or solder-joint type,
ANSI B16.22.
b. Flared, soft copper tubing shall be annealed ASTM B 280 and may be used only
in nominal sizes smaller than one inch for connection to equipment and no larger
than 1-3/8 inches outside diameter for other connections.
c. Flanges shall be of bronze, ANSI B16.24.
4. Brazing Materials: Provide AWS A5.8 brazing filler metal Type BAg-5 with AWS Type
3 flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper joints.
5. Soldering Materials: Provide ASTM B 32, Grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy. Soldering
flux shall consist of petrolatum base impregnated with zinc and ammonium chlorides.
6. Gaskets: Provide ASTM D 2000, fluorinated elastomers compatible in form with grooves
in the flange faces.
2.2 HANGERS
A. Adjustable Swivel Hanger: Pipe Sizes 2" and Less: Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 800 conforming
to MSS-SP-58, oversize for insulated piping systems. Pipe Sizes Larger Than 2": Carpenter and
Paterson Fig. 100, oversize for insulated piping systems.
B. Riser Clamp: Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 126 and Fig. 126 CT conforming to MSS-SP-58,
provide copper plated clamps on copper pipes.
C. Insulation Shields: 18 ga. galvanized steel, 180o wrap, Carpenter and Paterson Fig. 265P, Type H.
D. All piping 20' upstream and downstream of pumps shall also have Mason Industries PC30N
precompressed double deflection spring isolators installed.
2.3 VALVES
A. Ball Valves: Apollo 77-200 Series, bronze body, Fed. Spec. WW-V-35, Type II, Class A
(bronze), Style 3, full port, blow-out proof stem, 600 pound W.O.G., screwed connection for steel
pipe, sweat connection for copper tube. Provide stem extension to allow operation without
interfering with pipe insulation.
B. Gate Valves: Nibco Model S-113 or T-113, bronze body Fed. Spec. WW-V-54, wedge disc, rising
stem, screwed connection for steel pipe, sweat connection for copper tube, 150-pound class.
C. Check Valves: Nibco Model S-413 or T-413, bronze body Fed. Spec. WW-V-51, regrinding
swing check type, 200 pound class.
D. Butterfly Valves: Centerline or Norris, valves shall conform with MSS-SP67, Type I 150 psig -
Tight shut off valve, ends shall be flangeless or grooved, cast iron body, type 300 series corrosion
resistant steel stems and corrosion resistant or bronze discs with molded elastomer disc seals.
Valves shall have throttling handles with a minimum of 7 locking positions. Valves shall be
suitable for water temperatures up to 220 degrees F.
2.4 PIPING, VALVE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe Identification: Provide plastic "wrap around" identification markers indicating flow direction
and fluid flowing for the following:

Hot Water Supply Piping Refrigerant Liquid Piping

Hot Water Return Piping Refrigerant Suction Piping
1. Markers shall be placed 30-50 ft. apart for piping in accessible areas.
2. Markers shall be placed outside the pipe insulation and in the most obvious location for
viewing. Markers shall not be installed in exposed areas except in the mechanical rooms.
B. Valve Tags:
1. Attach to each valve a 1-1/2" round or octagonal brass tag with 1/2" indented numerals
filled with a durable black compound. In addition to the valve numbers, each tag shall
identify the system it controls. Service stop valves exposed in finished areas need not be
tagged.
2. Tags shall be securely attached to stems of valves with copper or brass "S" hooks, or
chains.
3. Valve charts shall be provided for each piping system and shall consist of schematic
drawings of piping layouts, showing and identifying each valve and describing its
function. Upon completion of the work, one (1) copy of each chart, sealed to rigid
backboard with clear lacquer placed under glass and framed, shall be hung where
directed. Two (2) additional unmounted copies shall be delivered to the Architect.
4. Tags and charts shall be coordinated with Section 15700 Heating System and when
completed this work shall have been done sequentially.
C. Equipment Identification:
1. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for boilers, pumps, and air handling units.
Laminated plastic shall be 0.125-inch thick melamine plastic conforming to Fed. Spec. L-
P-387, black with white center core. Surface shall be a matte finish, corners shall be
square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the white core. Minimum size of
nameplates shall be 1.0 inch by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be minimum of 0.25-inch high
normal block lettering.
2.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Thermometers: Trerice Model V80445 or Ashcroft Series 600A-04, dial type , Mil Spec MIL-T-
9955, 4-1/2" diameter face. Hot water system thermometers shall have a range of 30oF to 240oF
with 2o increments. Provide with brass thermometer wells projecting a minimum of 2" into the
pipe with extension to face of insulation. Provide with heat transfer fluid to fill the sealed
interstitial space between bulb and well. Evidence of the transfer fluid leaking shall be cause for
refilling and sealing the well.
B. Pressure Gauges: Trerice Series 800 or Ashcroft Type 1005, Grade B, ANSI B40.1, 3-1/2"
diameter face installed with shut off petcock and restrictor. Pressure range: 0-50 psig with 5 psi
graduations, 0-100 psig with 10 psi graduations for chilled water pumps.
C. Expansion Tanks (Captive Air Type) (ET): Taco Model as scheduled, tank shall be of capacity
indicated and shall be welded steel, constructed and tested hydrostatically in accordance with
Section VIII of the ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code. The tank bladder shall be butyl rubber
and shall be removable for inspection. Tank shall have air charging and system connections, and
shall be factory pressurized.

D. Strainers: Watts Model 77S, MIL-S-16293, 125 psig minimum rating wye strainers, cast iron or
bronze body, screen shall be stainless steel, monel or bronze with 20 mesh perforations. Provide
with blowdown ball valve and 3/4" hose connection.
E. Automatic Air Vents: Armstrong No. 1-AV, float type to vent air in hydronic systems. Vent
constructed with cast iron body and stainless steel internals and with NPT male inlet and outlet for
1/4 inch overflow for safe water connection. 150 psi working pressure, 250oF maximum
temperature.
F. Tangential Air Separator (AS): Taco model 4900-AD, or Spirovent, as scheduled, steel
construction, designed for not less than 125 psig and constructed and tested in accordance with
Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Tank shall have fabricated
connections, screwed for sizes 2" and smaller, flanged for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger.
Separators shall be factory prime-painted. Each air separator shall have an internal design suitable
for creating the required conditions for optimal air separation and microbubble removal. Provide
fittings for connection of automatic air vent and for connection of manual blow-down valve.
G. Manual Air Vents: Brass body, fiber discs, 125 psi working pressure, 240oF maximum
temperature, adjustable for quick venting at system start-up.
H. Inline Circulator (CP-3): Taco model indicated, pumps shall be inline cartridge-type or close
coupled pump of capacity and performance indicated with cast-iron body and bronze-fitted, 175
psig rated working pressure, 220oF maximum water temperature, carbon Ni-resist mechanical seal,
flexible coupling, resilient-mounted drip-proof sleeve bearing motor. The pumps shall be factory
tested, cleaned, and painted with machinery enamel. A set of installation instructions shall be
included with the pump. Provide high efficiency motors if available as an option of the
manufacturer. If high efficiency motors are not available as an option of the manufacturer, submit
a certification stating same.
I. Variable Speed Circulator (CP-1 & CP-2): Pumps noted as variable speed pumps shall be Wilo
model indicated, inline pumps with integral operating controls including p-T, p-v and p-c mode.
Pump shall include ECM motors and shall be suitable for 145psig maximum pressure, 230°F
maximum water temperature. Impeller shall be fiberglass reinforced PPS, shaft shall be stainless
steel and pump body shall be cast iron. Pump shall be factory tested, cleaned and finished with
cataphoresis coating. A set of installation instructions shall be included with the pump. Circulator
pumps shall be tested and balanced to within +10%/-5% of the flow indicated on the drawings.
J. Manual Circuit Balance Valves: Taco “Accu-Flo”.
1. Bronze or brass body and internals, teflon seats, 300 psi working pressure, 250oF working
temperature. Balancing devices shall be adjustable and shall have provisions for
connecting a portable differential pressure gauge. Each balancing device shall be sized to
provide a differential pressure reading between 2 and 5 feet with the valve full open at
design flow rates.
2. Install per manufacturer's recommendations for adjacent length of straight pipe.
3. Shop drawings shall indicate gpm, size, wide open differential pressure meter reading,
and actual water pressure drop.
4. At the Contractor's option, balancing valves with combination shut-off - balancing - drain
provisions may be used in lieu of the individual components indicated. The balancing
valve shall be furnished with a memory stop feature so that the valve can be correctly
returned to the balance position after serving the stop function
K. Water Pressure Reducing Valve: Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts Regulator series U5-Z3 bronze
body, bronze and stainless steel internals, 300 psi working pressure, 160oF maximum temperature,
adjustable pressure range of 25-75 psig, with inlet strainer (screen). Valves used for make-up

water applications shall have suffix “LP” and be rated for an adjustable pressure range of 10-35
psig.
L. Flexible Connectors at Pumps and at Coils: Multi-layer neoprene-nylon cord fabric twin-sphere
connectors with flange ends, rated at 150 psig at 220oF. Sizes 1-1/2" to 2-1/2": 6" long, sizes 3"
to 6": 9" long, line size.
M. Temperature and Pressure Test Ports: Peterson Equipment Co. Model 110 "Pete's Plugs"
temperature and pressure test capability, brass body, 1/4" NPT fitting, Nordel valve cores, 275oF
maximum temperature, 500 psig maximum pressure. Provide with (1) pressure and temperature
test kit.
N. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Flow Design, Inc., Autoflow Model AC (up to 2") and Model
WS (larger than 2") or approved equal. The valves shall be factory set to maintain the specified
flow rates within +/- 5% over an operating range of 2-32 psid. Each valve shall have a five (5)
year warranty and free first year cartridge exchange. The internal wear surfaces of the valve
cartridge shall be electroless nickel or stainless steel. The valve body shall be forged brass and
permanently marked with the flow rate and spring range. Minimum pressure and temperature
ratings shall be 400 psig at 250°F. Valve accessories shall include a union, ball valve and integral
strainer. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The ball
valve shall have a teflon packing, brass packing nut and blowout-proof stem, large diameter plated
ball and a full size steel handle with vinyl grip.
2.6 GAS-FIRED BOILER/BURNER UNIT (B-#)
A. Boiler shall be wall hung, high efficiency, sealed combustion, direct vent condensing type. The
manufacturer shall be Heat Transfer Products “Modcon” or approved equal, suitable for LP gas. The
minimum rated working pressure shall be 30 psig. Boiler-burners shall be Model and size as
scheduled. Thermal efficiency shall be a minimum of 95%. Direct vent boilers shall be Energy Star
compliant.
B. Provide 6” stainless steel (AL29-4C) venting and condensate drain piping installed in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.
C. Accessories shall include wall support, 50 psig ASME rated pressure relief valves, theraltimeter,
operating aquastat, intake/exhaust roof venting, low water cut-off, condensate neutralization kit and
flow switch.
D. The boiler/burner units shall be started and adjusted by a factory representative who shall submit an
efficiency report for Engineer review.
E. Provide firestats, emergency shut-off switches, and service switches as required by NFPA 54.
2.7 FANS (EF-#)
A. Shall be model indicated. The fan shall include housing, fan wheel, shaft, bearings, inlet shroud,
motor, mounting support and mounting frame as a factory-assembled unit. An OSHA-approved
belt guard shall be included. The fan drive shall have a 1.5 service factor for the maximum rated
horsepower. Each fan shall incorporate a backdraft damper or one shall be installed at the
discharge (louver).
B. Bearings shall be precision, flange-mounted self-aligning ball bearings at inlet and discharge.
Grease lines shall extend to the exterior of the fan housing.
C. Submit sound power data for inlet and discharge sound.
D. Submit fan curves for each fan with the design operating point clearly marked.

E. Furnish accessories as noted on drawings.
F. Fans shall be Energy Star rated.
2.8 WALL HEATERS (WH-#)
A. Heater shall be Smith Environmental or Embassy, capacity scheduled on drawings. Heaters shall
be 120V with pipe mounted low-temp aquastat, fully recessed and painted with an enamel paint
(color by architect).
2.9 BLOWER COIL UNITS (BC-#)
A. Blower Coil Units: Trane. McQuay, York, Carrier or approved equal. Units shall be completely
factory assembled including hydronic heating coil, DX cooling coil, overflow safety switch,
condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in
horizontal. Units shall be UL Listed. Capabilities and performance as scheduled.
B. Casing: Units shall have rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an
enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts shall be provided for electrical power and
control wiring.
C. Coils: Capacities and pressure drops shall be rated in accordance with ARI 410. Coils shall be
pressure tested at 300 psig and shall be suitable for 150 psig service. Refrigerant coil shall be R410a
compatible.
D. Fan: Forward-curved, dynamically and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard,
fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated.
E. Controls: Low voltage terminal board, fan contactor, and check valves.
F. Filter Mixing Box: filters shall be included as standard, two inch pleated media (MERV13) type.
Furnish with two (2) spare sets per unit.
2.10 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (CU-#)
A. Shall be Lennox, York, Trane or approved equal with capacities and performance, as scheduled.
The condensing unit shall be factory assembled and wired. The structural frame shall be
constructed of minimum 14 GA. welded galvanized steel with a phosphatized and painted finish.
A decorative steel grille shall protect the condenser coils from physical damage. Refrigerant shall
be R410A.
B. The compressors shall be multiple scroll compressors, suction gas-cooled, direct-drive, operating
at 3600 RPM. The unit shall have a centrifugal oil pump, oil charging valve and oil level
sightglass.
C. The condenser coil(s) shall have configured aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing
with an integral subcooler. The condensers shall be factory leak-tested at 450 psig. The fans shall
be direct-drive vertical discharge, statically and dynamically balanced.
D. A factory provided 115v. control circuit shall include fusing and control power transformer.
Factory-wired magnetic contactors shall be provided for the compressors and high-low pressure
cut-outs. Charge isolation, reset relay and anti-recycle compressor timer(s) shall be provided.
Furnish with a weatherproof non-fused disconnect switch.
E. The condensing unit shall include a five (5) year compressor warrantee for parts and labor. Mount
units on a reinforced concrete pad.
2.12 CONSOLE-TYPE DEHUMIDIFIER (DH)

A. Shall be “Santa Fe Basement Dehumidifier” with a moisture removal capacity of 106 pints per day at
800F, 60%RH, 120V power. The unit shall be EPA Energy Star rated drawing a maximum of 6.8
amps. The unit shall be free-standing with wheels. An automatic frost sensor and hot gas defrost cycle
shall be included.
B. Accessories shall include a dehumidistat and noise muffler. The unit shall have a five (5) year
compressor warrantee.
2.13 HUMIDIFIER (HMFR-1)
A. Humidifier shall be Dri-Steem model VLC with Rapid-Sorb dispersion tubes, suitable for use with
potable water. Unit shall utilize 208V/3Ph/60Hz power and shall include insulated stainless steel
tubing between the steam generator and the dispersion tubes. Steam dispersion distance shall not
exceed 12”. Provide airflow proving switch and drane kooler for condensate disposal.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and
verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence.
2. Verify that the heating system may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and
regulations and the reviewed Submittals.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. In general, piping shall be run concealed above ceilings in occupied areas. Piping in other areas
may be run exposed. Piping shall not be exposed in occupied spaces unless written authorization
is given by the Architect.
B. Provide and erect in accordance with the best practice of the trade piping shown on the Drawings
piping in proper position to avoid other work and to allow the application of insulation and finish
painting to the satisfaction of the Architect.
C. The size and general arrangements, as well as the methods of connecting piping, valves, and
equipment, shall be as indicated, or so as to meet the requirements of the Architect.
D. Piping shall be erected so as to provide for the easy and noiseless passage of heating fluid under
working conditions. Inverted eccentric reducing fittings shall be used whenever water pipes
reduce in size.
E. Water mains shall be run level or pitch slightly upward so that no air pockets are formed in the
piping. The mains shall be set at elevations such that the runouts feeding equipment shall have no
pockets where air can collect except where vents are provided. Provide drains at low points in the
piping systems.
F. High points in water piping shall be provided with manual vents.
G. In the erection of water piping, make proper allowances for expansion and contraction. Piping
shall be anchored as necessary to control expansion. Hot water runouts to units shall be the size as
indicated on the Drawings and shall come off the main downward or off the side with a minimum
of two 90o elbows provided on runout from main.

H. Install stop valves and unions to facilitate isolation and removal of equipment. Provide final
connections for hydronic specialties furnished under other sections of the Specifications.
I. Steel piping with screwed connections. Threads on piping shall be full length and clean-cut with
inside edges reamed smooth to the full inside bore. Close nipples shall not be used. Pipe threads:
standard pipe threads, machine cut and full length. Pipe: reamed to remove burrs and up-ended
and rapped to dislodge dirt and scale. Joint compound shall be applied to male thread only. If it is
necessary to back off a screwed joint after it is made, the thread shall be cleaned and new
compound applied. Caulked threads will not be permitted.
J. Connections between copper and steel piping shall be made with bronze fittings.
K. Install thermometer wells for temperature gauges and sensors, projecting a minimum of 2" into the
pipe with extension to face of insulation. Piping 1-1/2" and smaller shall be enlarged to 2" where
wells are installed. Wells shall be installed in active sections of piping. Fill wells with heat
transfer fluid.
L. Solder joints shall be made with non-lead solder. Clean surfaces to be soldered and use a paste
flux. Wash joints with sodium bicarbonate and water to remove corrosive effects of heated solder
paste. Hot wipe solder at each fitting.
M. PVC piping shall have solvent welded joints except at connections to equipment and valves which
shall be screwed for sizes 2" and smaller and flanged for sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Solvent welded
joints: Pipe ends deburred, and beveled. Pipe end and fitting: Cleaned and dried, primed to soften
bonding surfaces. Pipe end: Apply even full layer of solvent cement after priming. Before
cement starts to set, insert pipe end into fitting and turn 1/4 turn to evenly distribute cement. Hold
joint together until cement sets-up, wipe excess cement off joint.
N. Pipe penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be in accordance with Section 15000
"Supplemental Mechanical General Requirements". Traverse points of piping shall be
escutcheoned with split chrome floor and ceiling plates and spring anchors, where visible to
occupancy.
O. Automatic Air Vents: Shall be installed with a manual isolation valve. The vent discharge shall
be piped to a local floor drain.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION PIPING
A. Provide and install refrigeration piping, hangers, and accessories as specified and required. The
piping installation shall be performed by a qualified refrigeration mechanic under the direct
supervision of the equipment manufacturer. Submit records of tests.
B. Refrigeration piping shall be Type ACR copper tube with brazed joints, nitrogen-charged equal to
BCUP-2 Classification of American Welding Society.
C. The refrigeration system shall be tested as follows:
High pressure Side 300 psi

Low Pressure Side 150 psi
D. Support risers, offsets, and equipment, in an acceptable manner.
E. Piping shall be installed to meet Codes and regulations, applicable to the installation and in
accordance with the best practice of the trade. Brazing shall be accomplished while sweeping
piping with nitrogen.

F. Refrigerant accessories shall include required valves and fittings to provide a complete installation.
Refrigerant suction piping shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Armaflex Type AP, or equal,
elastomeric unicellular insulation.
G. Parts of the system not factory charged and field installed piping of components shall be evacuated
to within .10 MM/Mercury of a perfect vacuum. Break the vacuum to 0 psig with oil-free nitrogen
before charging. Hold vacuum overnight for leak test.
H. Provide complete charges of refrigerant and oil to be maintained for the guarantee period.
I. Elbows shall be long radius.
J. The installation shall be in accordance with the above, with equipment manufacturer's instructions,
and with established recommended practices.
K. System installation shall include the following:
1. Pitch lines down in direction of flow a minimum of 1/2 inch per 10 feet.
2. Trap suction risers as verified with the equipment manufacturer.
3. Provide service valves on liquid and suction piping at air cooled condensing units.
4. Maximum filter-dryer pressure drops:
1 psi for liquid line filter-dryer.
5. Liquid line solenoid valve on each refrigeration circuit.
6. Thermal expansion valve on each refrigeration circuit.
3.4 PIPE HANGERS
A. Impact driven studs are not acceptable.
B. Pipes (copper or steel) shall be supported at intervals and rod sizes as follows, double nuts on
hangers and on beam clips.
Pipe Size Hanger Intervals Rod Sizes

1/2" 5' 3/8"
3/4" 6' 3/8"
1" 7' 3/8"
1-1/4" 8' 3/8"
1-1/2" 9' 3/8"
2" 10' 3/8"
2-1/2" 11' 1/2"
3" 12' 1/2"
C. Verticals: Supported at the base and at intervals as follows by use of clamp hangers:
Steel Pipe: Not more than 16 ft.
Copper Pipe and Tubing:
1-1/2" and larger - Not more than 12 ft.

1-1/4" and smaller - Not more than 6 ft.
D. Provide welded steel saddles at each hanger on steel piping systems 4" and larger.

E. PVC Piping: Supported at 4' intervals.
F. Spring Isolators: All piping within 20' upstream and downstream of the pumps.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF BOILERS
A. Assemble boiler sections, jacketing, burner, combustion controls, operating controls, and safety
controls per NFPA-54 and manufacturer's instructions. Provide boiler interconnecting power and
control wiring.
B. The boiler/burner units shall be started and adjusted by a factory representative in the presence of the
Architect. The factory representative shall provide a field efficiency report to the Engineer at the
completion of the start-up. The report shall include, but not be limited to:
CO2 reading (%).
Stack draft (in W.G.).
Stack temperature, room temperature.
Combustion efficiency (%).
Incorporate the field test results in the "Operations and Maintenance" manuals.
Charge hot water heating system with corrosion inhibitor per manufacturer's recommendations.
Concentrations shall be based on a system temperature of 220oF and shall be the high end of the
manufacturer's recommended concentration range.
3.6 CLOSING IN WORK
A. Cover up or enclose work after it has been properly and completely tested and reviewed.
B. No additional cost to the Owner will be allowed for uncovering or recovering any work that is
covered or enclosed prior to required test and review.
3.7 TEST AND ADJUST
A. Piping Systems: Test with water to a pressure of 75 psi and hold for a period of two hours. Repair
any leaks and retest the piping system; repeat process until systems are leak-free. Test piping
before it is insulated.
B. Before operating any system, flush the piping to remove oil and foreign materials.
C. After the installation is complete and ready for operation, test the system under normal operating
conditions in the presence of the Architect and demonstrate that the system functions as designed.
D. Demonstrate that the HVAC systems have free and noiseless circulation of water, that all air has
been purged and that systems are watertight.
E. Correct defects which develop in operational testing, conduct additional testing until defect free
operation is achieved.
F. Provide balancing and adjusting of terminal devices in accordance with Specification Section
15990.
A. Piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Dirt, dust, and debris shall be removed and the
premises left in a clean and neat condition.
B. Before covering is applied to piping systems, clips, rods, clevises and other hanger attachments,

and before uncovered piping is permitted to be concealed, corrosion and rust shall be wire brushed
and cleaned and in the case of iron products, a coat of approved protective paint applied to these
surfaces. When corrosion is from the effects of hot solder paste, the areas shall be cleaned and
polished and a wash of bicarbonate of soda and water used to neutralize the acid condition.
3.9 INSTRUCTIONS
A. On completion of the project, instruct the Owner's representative in the care and operation of the
system. The total period of instruction shall not exceed four (4) hours. The time of instruction
shall be arranged with the Owner. In addition to the prime Mechanical Contractor, the control
system Contractor, Balancing Contractor, and Owner's representative shall be present and
participate in the Owner's instruction.
3.10 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping shall be performed in accordance with Specification Section 07840 “Firestopping”.

All penetrations of fire-rated assemblies including walls and floors by mechanical system
components (piping, ductwork, conduits, etc.) shall be firestopped as specified.
* END OF SECTION *

SECTION 230500 - SUPPLEMENTAL MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. The General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Instructions to Bidders shall apply
to this work. Read these to be familiar with conditions related to the installation of the work.
1.2 WORK SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
A. The drawings accompanying this specification, as a part thereof, are working drawings indicating
the location and arrangement of the increments of the systems of this section of work. Material
deviation from this arrangement, process or means of application, shall bear the Engineer's review
stamp before the change is made on the job or materials are ordered. Changes made without such
review shall be ordered removed and items installed as specified shall be provided at no additional
expense to the Owner.
B. The drawings are not intended to show in minute detail minor items of installation or materials
such as specific fittings or findings.
1.3 MATERIALS AND LABOR
A. Furnish materials and labor necessary to deliver to the Owner a complete and operable system
installed in accordance with the contract documents.
B. Materials shall be of the best quality. Workmanship shall be of highest grade and construction
shall be done according to best practices of the trade.
C. Provide, when required, labeled samples of material or equipment specified herein or proposed to
be used in this work.
D. Where words "furnish", "provide", or "install" are mentioned, either singly or in combination,
these words are hereby interpreted to mean "furnish and install" or "provide and install", including
materials complete with connections, supplemental devices, accessories and appurtenances, unless
specifically otherwise noted. These words are likewise hereby interpreted as being prefixed to
materials, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter mentioned, either in abbreviated or scheduled
information or in the technical sections of the specifications.
1.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION IN HEATING SEASON
A. The system shall be installed such that the construction area will have sufficient heat to maintain
temperature above 40oF throughout the construction period.
1.5 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES
A. Provide information sufficiently in advance of this work, so that work by the other trades may be
coordinated and installed without delays. Furnish and locate sleeves, supports, anchors and
necessary access panels.
B. Where work is concealed, assure it does not project beyond finished lines of floors, ceilings, or
walls.
C. Equipment or piping requiring access found to be located above sheetrock ceilings shall be
brought immediately to the attention of the Architect for resolution.
230500 – Supplemental Mechanical General Requirements - Page 1 of 6

1.6 ORDINANCES, AUTHORITIES, PERMITS, AND FEES
A. Obtain necessary permits and licenses, give notices and comply with laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations or orders affecting the work, and pay fees and charges in connection therewith.
B. The "authority having jurisdiction" is the organization, office, or individual responsible for
"approving" equipment, an installation, or a procedure.
1.7 VISITING THE PREMISES
A. Visit the premises and verify existing conditions prior to submitting a bid for this project.
1.8 PROTECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS
A. Protect and care for materials delivered and work performed until the completion of the work.
Defective equipment or equipment damaged in the course of storage, installation or test shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.9 INSURANCE
A. Purchase and maintain Public Liability and Property Insurance during the progress of the work and
until completion and acceptance of the entire project by the Owner in the amounts as specified in
the General Conditions.
1.10 APPLICABLE CODES
A. Work and materials shall conform to the latest rules and regulations listed below and these rules
and regulations hereby are made part of this specification. They include, but are not necessarily
limited to the following:
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
Air Moving and Conditioning Assoc. (AMCA)
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
Local Fire Code
Local Plumbing Codes
American Welding Society
International Building Code (IBC)
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturers' data and certificates for equipment, materials and finish,
and pertinent details for each system where specified in each individual section, five (5) copies, to
be submitted to the Architect. Shop drawings will be returned "No Exceptions Taken", "Make
Corrections Noted", "Amend and Resubmit", "Submit Specified Item", or "Rejected" less two (2)
copies. Work shall progress in accordance with "Reviewed" shop drawings (ONLY).

B. Groups of similar shop drawings shall be submitted as individual bound documents with covers
and indexes. Typical similar items would be "Diffusers and Registers", "Valves and Controls".
Rejection of individual items shall not be cause for rejection of the entire document.
C. Clearly indicate item(s) to be reviewed on each submission by highlighting or underlining intended

item(s). Submissions not clearly marked shall be returned "Amend and Resubmit".
D. Shop drawings must bear the Engineer's review stamp. In the event that the Engineer returns shop
drawings "Amend and Resubmit" or "Rejected", the shop drawing must be revised and resubmitted
for review.
E. Furnishing of the specified item must still produce the results and performance, dependability and
quality reasonably to be expected within the spirit of the specifications, drawings, and the standard
of good mechanical performance normal to the trade.
1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Where the specifications allow the substitution of a product, still this product is subject to review
by the Engineer in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Shop Drawings". Review of a
substitute item is an indication only that the substitute item is compatible with the specified item as
a claim of the manufacturer. Insure dimensional propriety, performance, and quality of the
substitute item.
B. Reference in the specifications or on the drawings to any product, material, fixture, form or type of
construction, by proprietary name, manufacturer, make or catalog number, establishes a standard
of quality or design and is not meant to limit competition. Use any equivalent substitute provided
favorable written review by the Engineer is first obtained. The (ONLY) notation in the
specification is an exception to this and leaves no option.
C. For materials or equipment which are supplied with integral or factory applied finish, the colors
will be considered in evaluating substitutions.
D. For the purpose of avoiding conflicts with other trades, contracts, and adjoining work where more
than one (1) article, device, material, fixture, form or proprietary name, manufacturer, make or
catalog number, the first named shall be used as the basis of design and details. The cost of any
changes because of substituted item shall be borne by the Contractor requesting such change.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install equipment supports for mechanical equipment as required. Supports shall be
subject to review by the Engineer.
3.2 SLEEVES AND PREPARED OPENINGS
A. Coordinate cutting, patching and setting of sleeves, frames, framing and lintels for openings with
other trades. Sleeves shall be furnished by the Contractor. All penetrations through concrete shall
be sleeved as required by IBC. Penetrations of fire-rated assemblies shall be sleeved, sleeve
material shall be the same as the component penetrating the assembly.

B. Failure to give timely notice of and to locate openings and furnish sleeves shall cause no additional
expense to the Owner.
3.3 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT
A. Provide piping connections, supports, brackets, compensators or flexible connections to prevent

application of excessive stresses to equipment.
B. Equipment shall be installed with flanges or unions in such a manner as to permit disconnecting
for removal of tubes, coils, elements and other equipment for inspection, service and repairs.
3.4 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT
A. The installation of work performed shall provide reasonable accessibility for operation, inspection,
and maintenance of equipment and accessories. The Engineer shall determine the adequacy of
such accessibility.
3.5 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panels shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and as required for access to
valves and other serviceable components.
B. Access panels installed in fire-rated assemblies shall have the same fire rating as the assembly.
3.6 PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Exposed ironwork, including steel supports and hangers in unfinished spaces, mechanical rooms,
pits, and trenches shall be properly cleaned, prepared and painted with two (2) coats of black
asphaltum varnish.
3.7 GUARDS
A. Exposed moving and rotating elements of mechanical equipment items shall be protected with
suitable guards for personnel protection. Guards shall be of rigid construction, firmly positioned.
Holes shall be provided in guards at shaft centers to facilitate tachometer readings.
3.8 LUBRICATION
A. Furnish and install grease fittings for points requiring lubrication. Furnish extension type fittings
as required to provide easy access for maintenance lubrication.
B. Furnish initial charges of lubricants for equipment. Lubricants shall be in conformance with the
manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
3.9 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS
A. Unless otherwise noted, motors, motor starters and other electrical accessories which are specified
under Mechanical specifications shall be selected with characteristics as follows:
1/2 Horsepower and less - 120 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz.

3/4 Horsepower and greater - 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz.
B. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA, IEEE and ANSI Standards.
Motors shall be of the latest type and quality specified under individual items of equipment.

C. Magnetic motor starters for mechanical items of equipment shall be furnished under Division 16
unless the starter is an integral part of a factory packaged item of equipment. Each starter
furnished as an integral item of equipment shall be provided with overload heater elements.
Starters shall have single phase protection or shall have relays installed to provide this feature.
Starters shall be equipped with suitable step-down transformers to provide required control
voltage.
D. Motors shall have a minimum continuous duty service factor of 1.15. Minimum motor efficiency
shall be:
MOTOR HORSEPOWER PERCENTAGE EFFICIENCY

(1200RPM) (1800 RPM) (3600 RPM)
1 80.0 82.5 -----
1-1/2 84.0 84.0 82.5
2 85.5 84.0 84.0
3 86.5 86.5 84.0
5 87.5 87.5 85.5
3.10 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS
A. Piping systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed prior to initial operation.
B. Thoroughly clean exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing labels and foreign
substance.
C. Furnish detergents, solvents, cleaning compounds, and tools required for cleaning operations.
D. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish and at the completion of
the work, remove from the job site tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and rubbish, leaving the
work areas "broom" clean.
3.11 STARTING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Testing or starting of equipment shall be done in collaboration with trades concerned to insure safe
and proper operation of the equipment.
B. Prior to starting equipment, provide lubrication at required points. Before starting any electrical or
electric motor driven equipment, a check must be made to insure that proper heater coils are
installed in the starters and that the equipment is rotating in the proper direction.
3.12 OPERATIONAL TESTING
A. Operate systems until successful operation is demonstrated to the Engineer. This initial operation
shall be in addition to the testing of the system and shall be done after the system is cleaned and
finished.
3.13 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During construction, keep an accurate record of deviations to the installation of the work as
indicated on the drawings. Upon completion of the work, furnish a copy of this record to the
Engineer. Submit record drawings before requesting final payment.

3.14 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. As indicated in the Technical Sections of this specification or as directed by the Engineer, provide
the services of a factory trained Engineer or Technician to inspect, adjust, and place in proper
operating condition the equipment or item involved. No additional compensation will be allowed
for such service.
3.15 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide for each item of equipment or apparatus furnished, a complete set of printed instructions
obtained from the manufacturer covering proper operation, maintenance, lubrication, cleaning,
servicing, adjustment, and safety instructions.
B. Manufacturer's data shall include performance data (curves are preferred where applicable)
complete parts lists, recommended spare parts lists, piping, and wiring diagrams.
C. Arrange data in complete sets, properly indexed and marked.
D. Data shall include a complete set of shop drawings.
E. Material shall first be submitted in preliminary form for review by the Engineer. After review,
submit two (2) copies in bound volumes to the Engineer for distribution.
3.16 GUARANTEES
A. An item becomes "defective" when it ceases to conform to the Contract Documents. Guarantees
begin on the date of issuance of a certificate authorizing final payment or certificate of substantial
completion with the Owner taking occupancy or beneficial use thereafter.
B. Upon completion of the work and before applying for final payment, furnish a written guarantee,
stating that the work complies with the provisions of codes listed herein and the local enforcing
authorities, and that it will be free from defects of material and workmanship for not less than one
(1) year. Guarantee shall further state that the Contractor will, at his own expense, repair or
replace any of his material and work which may become defective during the time of guarantee,
together with other work damaged as a consequence of such defects.
C. Repeated malfunctioning or failure in service of any item or work of the system is sufficient cause
for the Engineer to order the removal of the item, and its replacement with new item at the expense
of the Contractor.
3.17 EXISTING UTILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Coordinate with existing utilities and equipment.
3.18 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping shall be performed in accordance with Specification Section 07840 “Firestopping”. All
penetrations of fire-rated assemblies including walls and floors by mechanical system components
* END OF SECTION *

SECTION 230593 - TESTING AND BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of labor, materials,
required for testing and balancing the air and water systems.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The provisions of Section 230500, "Supplemental Mechanical Requirements", apply to this section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, (e.g.,
reduce fan speed, throttling).
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches and terminals) in
accordance with specified design quantities.
C. Procedure: Standardize approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible
results.
D. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collection of test data in logical order to submission and
review. This data should also form the permanent record which shall be used as the basis for any
future testing, adjusting, and balancing required.
E. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: Submit the following:
A. Standards Compliance:
Testing Agency
Testing Agency Personnel
Professional Engineers
Instrument Calibration
1.5 TESTING AND BALANCING AGENCY
A. Air and Water Systems Testing and Balancing: Upon completion of the installation and field testing,
performance test and adjust the supply, return, make-up, and exhaust air systems, and heating water
systems to provide the air volume and water flow quantities indicated. Accomplish work in
accordance with the agenda and procedures specified and AABC 71679 and standards of the NEBB.
Correct air and water system performance deficiencies disclosed by the test before balancing the
systems.
B. Agency Qualifications: Obtain the services of a qualified testing organization to perform the testing
and balancing work as herein specified. Prior to commencing work under this section of the
specifications, the testing organization shall have been reviewed by the Architect. The criteria for
determining qualifications shall be membership in the AABC, or certification by the NEBB, or the
testing organization shall have submitted proof to satisfy the Architect that the organization meets or
exceeds the technical standards for membership of the AABC as published in the AABC 71679. The
testing organization shall be independent of both the installing contractors and equipment suppliers for
this project.
230593 – Testing and Balancing - Page 1 of 6

1.6 AGENDA
A. Preliminary Report: Review drawings and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected
system. Submit a written report to the Architect indicating any deficiencies in the system that would
preclude the proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems.
1.7 PROCEDURES, GENERAL
A. Requirements: Adjust systems and components thereof that perform as required by drawings and
specifications.
B. Test Duration: Operating tests of heating and cooling coils, fans and other equipment shall be of not
less than 4 hours duration, after stabilized operating conditions have been established. Capacities
shall be based on temperatures and air and water quantities measured during such tests.
C. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions. Furnish personnel, instruments, and equipment for tests specified herein.
D. Accuracy of Instruments: Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate. Provide calibration
histories for each instrument for examination. Calibrate each test instrument by an reviewed
laboratory or by the manufacturer. The Architect has the right to request instrument recalibration, or
the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is questionable.
E. Accuracy of Thermometers: Plus or minus one graduation at the temperatures to be measured.

Graduations shall conform with the following schedule:
Medium Design Temperature Maximum

Differential (oF) Graduation (oF)
_____________________________________________________________
Air 10 or less 1/2

Air over 10 1
Water 10 or less 1/10
Water 10-20 1/2
Water over 20 1
_____________________________________________________________
F. Flow Rate Tolerance: Values are based on discussion in ASHRAE "HVAC Applications", Chapter
34. Air filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be 80 percent of final
values.
1. Air Handling Unit CFM: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent.
2. Other Fans: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent.
3. Air Terminal Units : Minus 5 percent to plus 10 percent.
4. Minimum Outside Air (for manually set dampers): Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent.
5. Individual Room Air Outlets and Inlets, and Air Flow Rates Not mentioned Above: Minus 10
percent to plus 10 percent.
6. Heating System Pumps GPM: Minus 0 percent to plus 10 percent.
7. Other Pumps GPM: Minus 10 percent to plus 10 percent.
8. Air Handling Unit Coils GPM: Minus 5 percent to plus 10 percent.

9. Terminal Unit Coils/Elements GPM: Minus 10 percent to plus 10 percent.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Adjustments: Adjust air handling systems to provide the required design air quantity to, or through,
each component. Conduct adjusting and balancing of systems during periods of the year
approximating maximum seasonal operation.
B. Balance: Use flow adjusting (volume control) devices to balance air quantities only; i.e., proportion
flow between various terminals comprising system, and only to the extent that their adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound, i.e., in excess of specified limits.
C. Balancing Between Runs (submains, branch mains, and branches): Use flow regulating devices at, or
in, the divided - flow fitting. Minimize restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at
terminals.
D. Final Measurements of Air Quantity: Make final measurements of air quantity, after the air terminal
has been adjusted to provide the optimum air patterns of diffusion.
E. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan speeds, or
axial-flow fan wheel blade pitch. For systems with direct-connected fans (without adjustable pitch
blades), damper restrictions of a system's total flow or variable speed rheostats shall be adjusted as
appropriate.
F. Air Measurement:
1. Pitot Tube: Except as specifically indicated herein, make pitot tube traverses of each duct to
measure air flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall
conform with the ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals.
2. Pitot Tube Traverse: Pitot-tube traverse may be omitted if the duct serves only a single room
or space and its design volume is less than 2000 cfm. In lieu of Pitot-tube traverse, determine
air flow in the duct by totalling volume of individual terminals served, measured as described
herein.
3. Measurements of Air Quantity: Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less
than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals served.
G. Air Terminal Balancing: Measurement of flow rates by means of velocity meters applied to individual
terminals, with or without cones or other adapters, shall be used only for balancing.

3.2 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Adjustment: Adjust heating, water systems to provide required quantity to, or through each
component.
B. Metering: Measure water quantities and pressures with calibrated meters.
C. Water Measurements and Balancing: Use venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fittings and
pressure gages. Adjust systems to provide the design flow rates through the heat transfer equipment
prior to the capacity testing. Perform measurement of temperature differential with the air system,
adjusted as described herein, in operation.
D. Automatic Controls: Position automatic control valves for full flow through the heat transfer
equipment of the system during tests.
E. Flow: Flow through by-pass circuits at three-way valves shall be adjusted to balance that through the
supply circuit.
F. Distribution: Adjust distribution by means of balancing devices (cocks, valves, and fittings) and
automatic flow control valves. Do not use service valves for adjustment. Where automatic flow
control valves are utilized in lieu of venturi tubes, record only the pressure drop across the valve if
within the pressure drop rating on the valve tag.
G. Special Procedures: Where available, pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow requirements
of individual heat transfer units of system served, full flow may be simulated by the temporary
restriction of flow to portions of the system.
3.3 CERTIFIED REPORTS
A. Submittal: Submit three copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system
performance, air motion (fpm), to the Architect prior to final tests and inspection.
B. Instrument Records: Include types, serial numbers, and dates calibration of instruments.
C. Reports: Reports shall identify conspicuously items not conforming to contract requirements, or
obvious maloperation and deficiencies.
D. Certification: The reports shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer who
is versed in the field of air and water balancing and who is not affiliated with any firm involved in the
design or construction phases of the project.
3.4 AIR SYSTEM DATA
A. Report: The certified report shall include for each air-handling system the data listed below:
1. Equipment (fan or factory fabricated station unit):
a. Installation Data:
1) Manufacturer and Model

2) Size
3) Arrangement, Discharge, and Class
4) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, Cycles, and Full Load Amps.
5) Location and Local Identification Data
b. Design Data: Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications.
c. Fan Recorded (Test) Data

1) C.F.M.
2) Static Pressure
3) R.P.M.
4) Motor Operating Amps.
5) Motor Operating B.H.P.
2. Duct Systems:
a. Duct Air Quantities (Maximum and Minimum) - Main, Submains, Branches, Outdoor
(Outside) Air, Total-Air, and Exhaust
1) Duct size(s)
2) Number of Pitot-tube (Pressure) Measurements
3) Sum of Velocity Measurement, excluding pressure measurements
4) Average Velocity
5) Recorded (Test) C.F.M.
6) Design C.F.M.
b. Individual Air Terminals:
1) Terminal Identification (Supply or Exhaust, Location and Number Designation)

2) Type Size, Manufacturer, and Catalog Identification
3) Design and Recorded Quantities - C.F.M.
4) Deflector Vane or Diffusion Cone Settings
5) Applicable Factor for Application, Velocity, Area
6) Design and Recorded Velocities - F.P.M. (State "core" "inlet," as applicable)
3.5 WATER SYSTEM DATA
A. Report: Include data listed below:
1. Pumps:
a. Installation Data:
1) Manufacturer and Model

2) Size
3) Type Drive
4) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, and Full Load Amps.
b. Design Data:
1) G.P.M.
2) Head
3) R.P.M.
4) B.H.P. and Amps.
c. Recorded Data:
1) Discharge Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow)

2) Suction Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow)
3) Operating Head
4) Operating G.P.M. (from pump curves if metering is not provided)
5) No-Load Amps. (where possible)
6) Full-Flow Amps
7) No-Flow Amps

2. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment:
a. Design Data:
1) Load in Btu per hr

2) G.P.M.
3) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature
4) Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B.)
5) C.F.M.
6) Water Pressure Drop
b. Recorded Data:
1) Type of Equipment and Identification (location or number designation)

2) Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B.)
3) Entering and Leaving Water Temperatures
4) G.P.M. (if metered)
5) Temperature Rise or Drop
3.6 FINAL TESTS, REVIEW, AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Capacity and Performance Tests: Make tests to demonstrate that capacities and general performance
of air and water systems comply with contract requirements.
B. Final Inspection: At the time of final review, recheck, in the presence of the Engineer, random
selections of data water and air quantities and air motion recorded in the certified report.
C. Points and Areas for Recheck: As selected by the Architect.
D. Measurement and Test Procedures: As reviewed for work forming basis of certified report.
E. Selections for Recheck (specific plus random): In general, selections for recheck will not exceed 25
percent of the total number tabulated in the report.
F. Retests: If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of ten percent or more from that recorded in
the certified report listings, at ten percent or more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be
automatically rejected. In the event the report is rejected, systems shall be readjusted and tested, new
data recorded, new certified reports submitted, and new inspection tests made.
G. Marking of Settings: Following final acceptance of certified reports by the Architect, the settings of
valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked, so that adjustment can be
restored if disturbed at any time. Do not mark devices until after final review.
* END OF SECTION ***

SECTION 230700 - INSULATION
1 PART 1 GENERAL
A. The drawings and the specifications including Section 230500 “Supplemental General Mechanical
Conditions” are hereby made a part of the work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
required to insulate the heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

and the (ONLY) notation. Familiarity with this section shall be achieved before reading the
B. The items for which the submittals paragraph in Section 230500, Supplemental General Mechanical
Requirements, apply are as follows:
1. Piping insulation.
2. Duct insulation.
3. Equipment insulation.
4. Insulation application schedule.
5. Vapor barrier coating.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately
below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels, unless specifically
listed below as an unfinished space.
B. Unfinished Spaces: Mech/Elect Rooms and attic.
C. Unconditioned Spaces: Spaces exposed to near outside ambient temperatures and spaces not air
conditioned.
C. Outside: Areas beyond the exterior side of walls or above the roof, unexcavated spaces, and crawl
spaces.
D. Concealed: Not visible in finished or unfinished spaces. For example, above ceilings, below floors,
between double walls, furred-in areas, pipe and duct shafts, and similar spaces.
E. Exposed: Visible from a finished or unfinished space.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S STAMP OR LABEL
A. Packages or standard containers of insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered to
the project site for use must have the manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving name of
manufacturer, brand, and description of material. Insulation shall be asbestos-free.
1.6 FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE DEVELOPED RATINGS
230700 – Insulation - Page 1 of 6

A. Materials shall have a flame-spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not
more than 50 when tested in accordance with NFPA 255, ASTM E84, or UL 723.
B. Provide materials with flame resistant treatments not subject to deterioration due to aging, moisture,
high humidity, oxygen, ozone, or heat.
C. Materials Exempt From Fire-Resistant Rating: Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts or
equipment.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING INSULATION
A. Fiberglass: Heavy density preformed fiberglass with thermal conductivity of 0.29 Btu-in/hr-ft2-oF at
150oF mean temperature. Insulation shall conform to ASTM C547 Class I and shall be suitable for
450oF service. Fitting insulation shall be of same material used for pipe.
1. Insulation Jacket: All service (ASJ) type conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-B-100B Type I. Jacket
permeability shall not exceed 0.02 perms (ASTM E96). Pipe fitting jacket shall be factory
premolded, one-piece, PVC covers with pressure sensitive taped joints. Jackets in exposed
locations shall have a white surface suitable for field painting. Provide vapor barrier as
required by service.
B. Flexible Unicellular: Flexible unicellular with thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu-in/hr-ft2-oF at 75oF
mean temperature. Insulation shall conform to ASTM C534, Type I, Tubular and shall be suitable for
200oF service. Fitting insulation shall be of same material used for pipe. Permeability shall not
exceed 0.10 perms (ASTM E96). Insulation adhesive shall conform to Mil. Spec. MIL-A-24179A,
Type II, Class 1.
C. Fittings, Flanges, and Valves: Provide insulation for fittings, flanges, and valves premolded, precut,
or job fabricated of the same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent piping.
D. Insulation Kit: Insulate exposed supply and waste piping at handicapped accessible sinks with fully
molded insulation kit. McGuire Products ProWrap, 3/16" thick closed vinyl with anti-microbial
additive, 1.02 Btu-in/hr-F2-oF thermal conductivity, white color.
2.2 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Fiberglass (Hot Equipment): Semi-rigid fiberglass board conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-I-558B, Form
B, Type I. Thermal conductivity shall be 0.32 Btu-in/hr-ft2-oF at 150oF mean temperature (ASTM
C177), insulation shall be suitable for 650oF service. Insulation jacket shall be "all service" type
conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-I-100B Type I or II. Jacket permeability shall not exceed 0.02 perms
(ASTM E96).
B. Flexible Unicellular (Cold Equipment): Flexible unicellular with thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu-
in/hr-ft2-oF at 75oF mean temperature. Insulation shall conform to ASTM C534, Type II, sheet and
shall be suitable for 200oF service. Permeability shall not exceed 0.10 perms (ASTM E96). Insulation
adhesive shall conform to Mil. Spec. MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class 1.
2.3 DUCT INSULATION
A. Fiberglass (Ductwrap): Fiberglass duct wrap with foil-scrim-kraft facing/vapor barrier, 1.0 lb/cu.ft.
density (0.75 lb/cu.ft. for 3" thickness only), 0.29 Btu-in/hr-ft2-oF conductivity at 75°F mean
temperature, 0.05 permeance rating. Insulation shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A & B and
shall be UL rated. Provide foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) tape.
B. Fiberglass (Ductboard): Fiberglass insulation board with foil-scrim-kraft facing/vapor barrier, 3.0
lb./CF density, 0.25 Btu-in/hr-ft2-oF conductivity at 75oF mean temperature, 0.05 permeance rating.

Insulation shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and B and shall be UL rated. Provide foil-scrim-
kraft (FSK) tape.
2.5 VAPOR BARRIER COATING
A. Raw (cut) ends of fiberglass pipe insulation shall be finished (protected) with the application of a
suitable vapor barrier coating or finishing cement (mastic) to maintain the continuous visual and
functional integrity of the insulation jacket. Mastic shall be Childers “Chil-Perm” CP-30, elastomeric
resin, or approved equal, applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that
such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that the insulation systems may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and
3.2 GENERAL
A. Insulate after system tests have been completed and surfaces to be insulated have been cleaned of dirt,
rust, and scale and are dry.
B. Install insulation with jackets drawn tight and cement down longitudinal and end laps. Do not use
scrap pieces where a full length section will fit. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves, wall
and ceiling openings, except at fire dampers in duct systems and pipe penetrations through fire rated
assemblies. Extend surface finishes to protect ends, and raw edges of insulation. Apply coatings and
adhesives at the manufacturer's recommended coverage per gallon. Individually insulate piping and
ductwork. Keep insulation dry during the application of the finish. Bevel and seal the edges of
exposed insulation.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, do not insulate the following:
1. Factory pre-insulated flexible ductwork.

2. Factory pre-insulated ductwork, plenums, casings, mixing boxes, and filter boxes.
3. Chrome plated pipes and fire protection pipes.
4. Vibration isolating connections
5. Adjacent insulation
6. ASME stamps, nameplates, access plates
7. Ductwork exposed to view in a normally occupied space.
8. Hydronic specialties: Low water cutoff, relief valves, relief valve discharge piping, pressure
reducing valves, and expansion tanks.
9. Unions and flanges at equipment required for frequent service.

3.3 PIPING INSULATION
A. Pipe Insulation (Fiberglass): Place sections of insulation around the pipe and joints, tightly butt into
place. Draw jacket laps tight and smooth. Secure jacket with fire resistant adhesive, or factory
applied self sealing lap. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, not less than 3-inches wide, of
material identical to the jacket material. Overlap longitudinal laps of jacket material not less than 1-
1/2 inches. Adhesive used to secure the butt strip shall be the same as used to secure the jacket laps.
B. Flanges, Unions, Valves and Fittings Insulation (Fiberglass): Factory fabricated removable and
reusable insulation covers. Place factory pre-molded, precut or field-fabricated segmented insulation
of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation around the flange, union,
valve, and fitting abutting the adjoining pipe insulation. Install factory premolded one-piece PVC
fitting covers over the insulation and secure by stapling or with metal or plastic tacks made for
securing PVC fitting covers and secure with PVC vapor barrier tape.
C. Pipe Insulation (Flexible Unicellular): Bond cuts, butt joints, ends, and longitudinal joints with
adhesive. Miter 90-degree turns and elbows, tees, and valve insulation. Insulate flanges, unions,
valves, and fittings.
D. Where penetrating roofs and exterior walls, insulate piping to a point flush with the underside of the
deck or wall and seal with a vapor barrier coating.
E. Hangers and Anchors: Pipe insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers. Where pipe is
supported by the insulation, provide MSS SP-58, Type 40 galvanized steel shields (16 gage
maximum). For fiberglass insulation systems on pipe sizes 2 inches through 3", provide insulation
inserts at points of hangers and supports. Insulation inserts shall be of molded glass fiber (minimum
12 pcf). Insulation inserts shall cover the bottom half of the pipe circumference, 180 degrees, and be
not less than 4" long. Vapor-barrier facing of the insert shall be of the same material as the facing on
the adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into the insulation. Insulation inserts for pipe sizes 4" and larger
shall be welded pipe saddles. Install insulation in void area of saddle of same material used on
adjacent insulation. For pipe sizes 2" and smaller, insulation inserts for flexible unicellular insulation
systems shall be wooden doweling set on end of length equal to insulation thickness. Seal dowel to
insulation with adhesive.
F. PVC or Metal Jackets: Provide over insulation. Machine cut jacket to smooth edge of circumferential
joints. Overlap metal jacket not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and
secure with metal bands at not more than 9 inch centers. Overlap longitudinal joints down to shed
water. Seal circumferential joints with a coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for
weatherproofing. Solvent weld PVC jacket system to provide continuous watertight seal.
3.4 DUCT INSULATION
A. Rigid Insulation: Secure rigid insulation by impaling over pins or anchors located not more than 3
inches from joint edges of boards, spaced not more than 12 inches on centers and secure with washers
and clips. Spot weld anchor pins or attach with a waterproof adhesive especially designed for use on
metal surfaces. Each pin or anchor shall be capable of supporting a 20-pound load. Cut off
protruding ends of pins. After installing washers, provide foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) tape to seal break in
vapor barrier, tape shall extend 1" minimum around pin. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted.
Bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors. Seal joints with FSK tape. Provide
additional adhesive or staples to assist tape adhesion in difficult applications.
B. Flexible Blanket Insulation: Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Staple laps of jacket with
outward clinching staples and seal with foil scrim kraft (FSK) tape. Sagging of flexible duct
insulation shall not be permitted. For ductwork over 24-inches wide on horizontal duct runs, provide
pins, washers and clips. Install speed washers with pins and pin trimmed to washer. Cut off
protruding ends of pins after clips are secured. Seal with FSK tape, extend tape 1" minimum around
pin. Use pins on sides of vertical ductwork being insulated. Space pins and clips on 18 inch centers

and not more than 18 inches from duct corners. Carry insulation over standing seams and trapeze-type
hangers.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. General Procedures: Apply equipment insulation suitable for temperature and service to fit as closely
as possible to equipment. Join sections of insulation with adhesive. Bevel insulation around name
plates, ASME Stamp, and access plates. For insulation on equipment that must be opened periodically
for inspection, cleaning, or repair, construct insulation to be removable and replaceable without
damage. Provide vapor barrier seal at joints and seams for "cold" equipment.
B. Heating Equipment: Provide semi-rigid mineral fiber board insulation. Seal longitudinal and lateral
seams with FSK tape. Bond cuts, ends, and mitered sections with adhesive. Provide a vinyl-acrylic
mastic coating on exposed fiberglass ends.
C. Cold Equipment: Provide flexible unicellular sheet insulation, bond cuts, butt joints, longitudinal
joints and ends with vapor barrier adhesive. Vapor seal exposed edges to equipment.
3.6 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
SERVICE THICKNESS MATERIAL/JACKET
PIPING:
Domestic Cold Water Piping 1" Fiberglass w/ASJ or Flexible Unicellular
Domestic Hot Water Piping 1" Fiberglass w/ASJ or Flexible Unicellular
Domestic Water Branch Piping 1" Fiberglass w/ASJ or Flexible Unicellular

Less than 10 ft in Stud Walls
Water and Drain Piping Under ADA Insulation Kit

Handicap Accessible Fixtures
Hot Water Heating Supply 1-1/2" Fiberglass w/ASJ

and Return Piping 1-1/2”
and smaller.
Hot Water Heating Supply 2" Fiberglass w/ASJ

and Return Piping 2”
and larger.
Hot Water Heating Supply 1-1/2" Fiberglass w/ASJ

and Return Branch Piping
Less than 10 ft in Stud Walls
Condensate Drain Piping 1/2" Flexible Unicellular
Rainwater Piping 1/2" Flexible Unicellular
Refrigerant Suction and Liquid 1/2" Flexible Unicellular w/vapor barrier

Piping (outside) and PVC jacket
Refrigerant Suction and Liquid

Piping (inside) 1/2" Flexible Unicellular

SERVICE THICKNESS MATERIAL/JACKET
DUCTWORK:
Outside Air Ductwork from 3” Ductwrap, FSK (Round)

the louver to the Air Handlers 3" Ductboard, FSK (Rectangular)
Supply Ductwork from the Air 1-1/2" Ductwrap, FSK

Handlers to spaces served
Exhaust Ductwork from a 3" Ductwrap, FSK (Round)

point three (3) feet interior 3” Ductboard, FSK (Rectangular)
of the motorized control
damper or backdraft damper
to the exterior wall, roof,
or louver.
Plenums at Intake and 3" Ductwrap, FSK or

Exhaust louvers Ductboard, FSK
EQUIPMENT:
Water Meters 1/2" Flexible Unicellular
Backflow Preventer 1/2" Flexible Unicellular
Air Separators, Flexible 1" Flexible Unicellular

Connectors, Valves
3.8 FIELD INSPECTION
A. Visually inspect to ensure that materials used conform to specifications. Inspect installations
progressively for compliance with requirements.
* END OF SECTION *

SECTION 230800 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
1 PART 1 GENERAL

MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" are hereby made a part of the work of this section.
required to install the ductwork systems indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

and the (ONLY) notation. Familiarity with this section should be achieved before reading the
B. The items for which the submittals paragraph in Section 230500, Supplemental General Mechanical
Requirements, apply are as follows:
1. Ductwork.
2. Ductwork accessories.
3. Air devices.
4. Firestopping materials and methods.
5. Louvers and dampers.
6. Ductwork sealing products.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK
A. Classification of Ductwork: Low pressure ductwork: up to 2" W.G. static pressure.
B. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated low pressure ductwork shall be galvanized steel. Galvanized
sheet metal shall be new galvanized steel sheets of lock forming quality with zinc coating that will not
flake or peel under forming operation.
C. Construction for Low Pressure Round and Rectangular Ductwork:
1. Material: Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A527, weight of galvanized coating shall be
not less than 1-1/4 ounces total for both sides of one sq.ft. of a sheet. Construction, metal
gage, and reinforcements shall conform with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards" and
NFPA 90A for 2" W.G. pressure class.
2. Fittings: Shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Standards and shall be of the
types indicated (ONLY).
3. Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lockseam (ONLY). Button punch snap locks are not
acceptable.
4. Joints shall be sealed to SMACNA seal class B.

D. Construction for Spiral Seam Round and Flat Oval Ductwork:
230800 – Ductwork & Accessories - Page 1 of 6

1. Ductwork and fittings shall be United McGill Uni-seal or Uni-rib, Eastern Sheetmetal, Lindab,
Semco or Monroe Sheetmetal, galvanized steel, factory fabricated, spiral lockseam or welded
longitudinal seam, round or flat oval type, as indicated. Seams shall be solid welded or spot-
welded and factory sealed airtight. Ducts and fittings shall be specifically designed for medium
pressure application. Round or flat oval ductwork indicated as acoustically lined or double-wall
(DW) shall be United-McGill Acousti-K27, double wall medium pressure construction with solid
26 gauge sheetmetal inner liner and 1" thick fiberglass insulation. Fittings shall be furnished with
solid liners. Insulation shall be provided with thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/HR-oF-FT2-IN.
Exposed ductwork in finished spaces specified to be painted shall be “Paint-Grip” galvanized
material. Interior ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized sheetmetal. Exposed supply
ductwork shall be double-wall construction with “Paint-Grip” galvanized outer shell.
a. Sheetmetal Gauges: Per SMACNA for listed pressure class.
b. Fittings: Fittings shall be machine formed type or welded multi-segment type. All seams
shall be factory sealed or welded airtight. Tap offs shall be 90o conical type or 45o standard
type, with smooth, machine formed entrance, designed for low pressure drop and low noise
generation. 90o elbows shall be 5 piece construction (where space permits) or vaned type
mitered elbow where space is restricted. Unless specifically indicated (and field-verified)
as 5 piece construction, use vaned 90o elbows. Vanes shall be single thickness, solid-
welded in place.
c. Joints on round spiral ductwork shall be slip type, coupling type, Van Stone flanges, or
factory fabricated flange system type connectors, as standard with the manufacturer. Flat
oval joints shall be Van Stone flanges (gasketed) or factory fabricated flange system type
connectors. Joints shall be made up with joint sealer applied in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Joint sealer shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.
d. Duct and fittings shall have been tested for air friction loss and leakage in an independent
testing laboratory. Test results shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for review.
e. External reinforcing angles shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. External reinforcing angles shall be galvanized or painted with a rust
inhibiting aluminum paint. Include reinforcing data with Shop Drawing submittal. Duct
and reinforcing shall be designed for a positive static pressure of 6 inches of water gage.
f. No internal tie rod reinforcing will be allowed.
g. Hangers shall be of the clamp-on or trapeze type. Exposed ductwork shall use clamp-on
hangers only. Holes shall not be drilled through the ducts.
2.2 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Access Doors: Ruskin Model ADC2, 12"x12" size, 24 gauge galvanized steel, steel on both sides of
door, foam gasket seals, 1" insulation, 2 cam locks, no hinge.
B. Counter Balanced Dampers (CBD): Aluminum frame and blades, extruded vinyl edge seals, 2-1/4"
deep, set 0.06" WG.
C. Backdraft Dampers (BDD): Ruskin Model CBD2 or American Warming and Ventilating aluminum
frame and blades, extruded vinyl edge seals, field set at 0.10" W.G. pressure differential for full open
operation.
D. Fire Dampers: Greenheck FD-series, Ruskin Model IBD2, or Cesco, curtain type, 100% free area
(ONLY), Style C for round duct installations, and Style B for rectangular duct applications. Fire
dampers located immediately behind transfer grilles may be Style A dampers. The dampers shall be

UL rated for 1-1/2 hours and have a 165oF fusible link. Fire dampers shall comply with UL “Standard
for Safety” 555.
E. Flexible Duct Connections: Ventfabrics, Inc. neoprene coated glass fabric.
F. Drawbands for Flexible Ducts: Clinch type stainless steel with screwdriver adjustment, or nylon with
lever action tightening tool provided by the drawband manufacturer.
G. Turning Vanes: (Low Pressure):
1. Solid blade, mounted with the long edge down stream in accordance with duct construction
details indicated. Submit a 12"x12" sample elbow for review prior to fabrication.
H. Volume Dampers:
1. Factory fabricated as specified, or shop fabricated in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards".
2. Rectangular: Ruskin Model MD-35, or American Warming and Ventilating, 12 gauge

galvanized steel, locking quadrant, opposed blade over 11", single blade 11" and under.
3. Round: Ruskin Model MDRS25, or American Warming and Ventilating, 20 gauge galvanized
steel with locking quadrant (ONLY). Dampers may be provided integral with spin-in fittings.
I. Flexible Ductwork:
1. Low Pressure Duct Systems: Wiremold type WGCF, polyester core with wire helix, 1-1/2"
thick, 3/4 lb fiberglass insulation, polyolefin jacket/vapor barrier, 2" W.G. rated pressure.
J. Joint Sealer:
1. Hardcast Two-Part II DT tape with RTA-50 indoor/outdoor activator.
2. Hardcast Duct-Seal 321 water based indoor/outdoor sealant.
K. Louvers (L): Ruskin Model ELF6375DX, Greenheck, or American Warming and Ventilating.
Extruded aluminum construction, 0.081" thick, aluminum extrusions, drainable blade, 1/2" expanded
metal bird screen, size and performance as scheduled. AMCA certified leakage rate shall be a
maximum of 0.02 ounces of water per square foot of free area at 1000 FPM free area velocity.
Provide Kynar 500 finish, color selected by Architect. Provide frame styles compatible with building
construction, see architectural details. Provide concealed architectural or standard visible mullions in
multi-panel louver assemblies as indicated on the drawings. Inactive / blanked-off louvers shall have
a double wall sheetmetal closure on the interior face of the louver. The closure shall have a 2"
thickness of 1.5 pcf rigid fiberglass board insulation with a foil face. Both sides of the sheetmetal
shall be painted flat black.
L. Acoustical duct liner for rectangular ductwork shall be Type AP Armaflex SA duct liner. The liner
shall be elastomeric unicellular (closed cell) and have a thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btuh/0F.-sf-in.
and be cleanable and suitable for duct velocities of 4000 FPM. Duct liner thickness shall be 1" unless
indicated otherwise. The installation shall include 100% coverage of the manufacturer’s
recommended adhesive and protective Z-strips at all exposed upstream edges. Mechanical fasteners
shall be used in addition to adhesive. Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and be
approved by Factory Mutual. Duct dimension are net inside of liner.
M. Wall caps shall be aluminum painted to match siding or trim (per Architect’s direction).
2.3 AIR DEVICES (Krueger, Price, Metal Aire, Titus) ONLY

A. Material and Finishes: Construct diffusers, registers, and grilles of aluminum. Exterior and exposed
edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded. Steel parts shall be factory zinc-phosphate
treated prior to priming and painting or have a baked-on enamel finish. Aluminum parts shall be
finish painted. Provide frame style compatible with ceiling or wall type. Colors shall be selected by
Architect. Devices to be installed on exposed duct installations shall be furnished in primer suitable
for field application of color coat.
B. Sound Pressure Level: Manufacturer certified sound pressure level rating of inlets and outlets in
accordance with ADC 1062 R4. Conform with the permissible room sound pressure level for each
device as scheduled.
C. Throw: Defined as distance from the diffuser, register, or grille to the point which the resultant room
air velocity is 50 to 35 feet per minute.
D. Ceiling Diffusers: Equip with core styles required to provide air distribution pattern indicated.
Internal parts shall be removable through the diffuser-neck for access to the duct and without the use
of special tools. Construct each diffuser of four or more concentric elements designed to deliver air in
a generally horizontal direction. The interior elements of square and rectangular ceiling diffusers may
be square or rectangular as manufacturer's standard. Screws or bolts in exposed face of frames or core
elements are not acceptable. Diffusers shall have an opposed blade volume damper in the diffuser
neck. Diffusers shall have a 24"x24" lay-in panel for areas with acoustical ceilings and surface-mount
frame for GWB ceilings.
E. Grilles and Registers: Construction and finish as indicated, 1/2" louver spacing, 45o curved blade.
Registers shall have opposed-blade volume dampers with screwdriver adjuster. Unless otherwise
indicated, registers shall be provided.
F. General: The interior of all sheetmetal connections to grilles, registers and diffusers shall be painted
with a non-specular flat black paint so that no sheetmetal surfaces are visible from the finished space.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
2. Verify that the duct systems may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK AND AIR DEVICES
A. Provide and erect in accordance with the best practice of the trade ductwork shown on the drawings
ductwork in proper position to avoid conflicts with other work and to allow the application of
insulation and finish painting to the satisfaction of the Architect. Sizes given are "inside - clear"
dimensions and not necessarily that of sheet metal. Ducts shall be arranged to adjust to "field
conditions". The Sheet Metal trades shall coordinate his work with other trades. Work shall conform
to ASHRAE duct construction recommendations, SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards", NFPA,
and the requirements of the IBC code.
B. Joint Sealing: See PRODUCTS section.
C. Longitudinal joints: See PRODUCTS section.

D. Turns shall be made with long radius elbows or, if physically impossible to use long radius elbows,
shall be square turns with specified turning vanes. CAUTION: Turns not conforming to this
requirement shall be ordered removed and replaced with properly built turns.
E. Access Doors: Provide access doors for concealed apparatus requiring service and inspection in the
duct system including but not limited to dampers, sensors and motors, and upstream and downstream
from duct coils.
F. Duct Sleeves and Prepared Openings: Install duct sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, duct
branches, and ducts passing through walls, roofs, and ceilings. Insure the proper size and location of
sleeves and prepared openings. Allow one-inch clearance between duct and sleeve or one-inch
clearance between insulation and sleeve for insulated ducts, except at grilles, registers, and diffusers.
G. Duct Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, provide one-inch wide by 16 gage galvanized steel sheet
metal strips on each side of ducts. Anchor risers in the center of the vertical run to allow ends or riser
free vertical movements. Attach supports only to structural framing members. Do not anchor
supports to metal decking unless a means is provided (architectural review required) for preventing the
anchors from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required between structural framing
members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C clamps are used, use retainer clips.
H. Flexible Collars and Connections: Provide flexible collars between fans and ducts or casings and
where ducts are of dissimilar metals, as indicated or required. For round ducts, securely fasten
flexible connections using stainless steel clinch-type draw-band. Nylon drawbands may be used if
installed using the drawband manufacturer's lever-action tightening tool. For rectangular ducts, lock
flexible connections to metal collars.
I. Flexible Ducts: Provide where indicated. No fiberglass shall be in contact with air flow. Flexible
duct length shall not be more than 4'-0". Install with metal band hangers and without excess length,
provide maximum extension of flex duct. Securely fasten flexible ducts to metal collars using a
stainless steel or tool-tightened nylon drawband on the duct core and a second drawband on the
insulation vapor barrier. If the duct exceeds 12 inches diameter, position the drawband behind a bead
on the metal collar. Taping in lieu of drawbands is not allowed.
J. Any deviation in the duct system must be submitted as a shop drawing and stamped. CAUTION:
Any deviation not submitted and favorably reviewed will be ordered removed from the system and
replaced with that which is shown on the Drawings.
K. Discrepancies between actual field conditions and the Contract Documents shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect prior to fabrication.
L. Field Changes to Ductwork: Field changes of ducts such as those required to suit the sizes of
factory-fabricated equipment actually furnished shall be designed to minimize expansion and
contraction. Use 4:1 transitions in field changes as well as modifications to connecting ducts.
M. Transitions with a slope greater than 4 to 1 shall be ordered removed from the system and replaced
with a transition which meets this criteria.
N. Joints and seams at intake and exhaust plenums and joints on intake and exhaust ductwork for a
distance of 3 feet from the plenum shall be sealed watertight on the bottom and side joints and seams.
O. Isolation dampers at intake and exhaust louvers and vent hoods shall be sealed to the ductwork to
provide an airtight assembly with similar performance characteristics to the isolation damper.
3.3 CLOSING IN WORK
A. Cover up or enclose work after it has been properly and completely tested and reviewed.

B. No additional cost to the Owner will be allowed for uncovering or recovering any work that is covered
or enclosed prior to required test and review.
3.4 TEST AND ADJUST
A. Before operating any system, the system shall be cleaned out to remove dust and foreign materials.
B. After the installation is complete and ready for operation, test the system under normal operating
conditions in the presence of the Architect and demonstrate that the system functions as designed.
C. Correct defects which develop during the test period, conduct additional testing until defect free
operation is achieved.
A. Ductwork and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Dirt, dust, and debris shall be removed and the
premises left in a clean and neat condition.
B. Before covering is applied to duct systems, clips, rods, clevises and other hanger attachments, and
before uncovered piping is permitted to be concealed, corrosion and rust shall be wire brushed and
cleaned and in the case of iron products, a coat of approved protective paint applied to these surfaces.
3.6 INSTRUCTIONS
A. On completion of the project, instruct the Owner's representative in the care and operation of the
system. The total period of instruction shall not exceed four (4) hours. The time of instruction shall
be arranged with the Owner. In addition to the prime Mechanical Contractor, the control system
Contractor, Balancing Contractor, and Owner's representative shall be present and participate in the
Owner's instruction.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Firestopping shall be performed in accordance with Specification Section 07840 “Firestopping”. All
penetrations of fire-rated assemblies including walls and floors by mechanical system components
* END OF SECTION *

SECTION 230900 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
required to install the automatic temperature control system indicated. The system shall be a DDC
system with wall mounted human interface panel or web based access to provide the sequences as
described in these specifications. The ATC system shall be complete with required components
including, low voltage and line voltage wiring and conduit. Wiring shall be in accordance with
Division 16 of the specifications and NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
B. The automatic temperature controls system shall be provided and installed by trained control
mechanics regularly employed in the installation and calibration of ATC equipment by the
manufacturer of such equipment. Control installation by any Contractor whose principle business is
not direct manufacture and installation is prohibited.
1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Honeywell, Inc.
B. Siebe / Invensys, Maine Controls
C. Siemens
D. Johnson Controls
E. York (JCI)
F. Andover Controls, Basix Automation
G. Taco, iWorx

MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" and SECTION 260000 “ELECTRICAL” are hereby
made a part of the work of this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitutions: Your attention is directed to Section 230500 relative to competition and the (ONLY)
notation. Familiarity with this section shall be achieved before reading the PRODUCTS section of
this specification.
B. The items for which the shop drawings paragraph in Section230500, Supplemental General
Mechanical Requirements, apply are as follows:
1. Temperature control system schematic including variables, flow diagrams, ladder diagrams,
and point to point wiring diagrams, indicating set points, reset ranges, throttling ranges,
controller gains, differentials, operating ranges, normal positions, controller action, dial ranges,
voltages, currents, mounting locations, indicators, and terminal strip points.
2. Sequence of operation for each system and function.
3. Generic, functional description of each control component indicated.
4. Equipment interlocks required by sequence of operation.
5. Automatic valve schedule showing flow, Cv, and pressure drop.
230900 – Automatic Temperature Controls - Page 1 of 6

6. Manufacturer's Data:
a. Dampers, valves and operators.

b. Controllers, including wiring and connection diagrams.
c. Thermostats, temperature sensors, including wiring and connection diagrams.
d. Temperature and pressure indicators.
e. Pressure sensors, including wiring and connection diagrams.
f. Switches, relays, transmitters, transformers, including wiring and connection diagrams.
2 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL PANELS
A. In general, relays, transformers, or other control devices (not including room thermostats or duct-
mounted instruments) shall be grouped and mounted in a factory-built cabinet enclosure.
2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Automatic dampers not furnished with equipment shall be furnished under this paragraph. Automatic
dampers shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the following specifications:
1. Damper Blades: All automatic dampers, including dampers for static pressure control, shall be
of the balanced type, factory-fabricated, with fully gasketed galvanized steel airfoil blades,
mounted in welded frames. Damper blades shall be not more than 8 inches wide, shall have
interlocking edges, edge and jamb seals and be capable of operation against 4" static pressure
differential. Dampers shall be Arrow "Arrow-Foil" Model PBDAF-206, OBDAF-207, Ruskin
Model CD-60 or Tamco Series 1000.
2. Modulating Dampers: All modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type.
3. Damper Size and Bearings: Damper blades shall have steel trunnions mounted in
oil-impregnated bearings. Dampers shall be not more than 48 inches in length between
bearings.
4. Frames: Damper frames shall be of welded channel or angle-iron, with heavy steel corner
gussets and braces or stiffened with steel tie-rods where necessary. Frames shall be painted
with aluminum paint to prevent rusting.
5. Dampers shall be guaranteed to close tightly, and shall provide substantially the full area of the
opening when open. All outdoor air intakes and all exhaust ducts to outside and all fresh air,
return air and exhaust air dampers in systems shall have damper blades with inflatable seals or
other devices to guarantee low leakage, not to exceed 4 CFM/SF at 1 in. WG pressure
differential.
6. Damper Linkages: Damper-operating links shall be cadmium plated steel or brass rods,
adjustable in length with ball and socket joints and of such proportions that they will withstand,
without appreciable deflection, a load equal to not less than twice the maximum operating
force of the damper motor. Linkages shall be concealed in the frame.
B. Damper Actuators: For each automatically controlled damper, a suitable damper actuator or actuators
shall be provided in accordance with the following specifications:
1. Actuator: Damper actuators shall be electronic, direct-coupled, spring-return type and have a
rating of not less than twice the torque needed for actual operation of the damper.
2. Adjustments: Provide adjustable stops for the open and closed positions.

3. Mounting: Damper actuators shall be direct-coupled over the shaft. The damper actuators and
mounting base shall not be mounted directly on cold or insulated ducts and casings, but shall
be mounted outside the insulated covering in such a manner as to prevent sweating and
interference with the insulation.
4. Where indicated, damper actuators shall be provided with an auxiliary switch rated at 120 V
AC, and accept a 4 to 20 ma input.
2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES (HOT WATER, 250OF MAX.)
A. Valves shall have removable composition discs with monel stem. Bodies two inches or smaller shall
be bronze with screwed ends. Bodies 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be cast-iron with flanged ends.
Valve bodies, trim and stuffing boxes shall be designed for not less than 125 psi working pressure.
Valve packing shall be non-lubricated teflon packing suitable for hot water service, as required.
B. Modulating valves shall be sized for maximum pressure drop of 1.5 to 4.0 psi.
C. Automatic control valve differential shut-off pressure shall be a minimum of 35 psig.
D. Heating valves shall fail to the "normally-open" position with a manual override switch.
E. Valves shall have a clearly marked position indicator as part of the operating linkage.
F. Actuator: Shall be electronic, direct-coupled, spring-return type and have a rating of not less than
twice the torque needed for actual operation of the valve.
2.4 TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Temperature Sensors: RTD Elements, accuracy of +0.1% at 70oF, sensors shall be securely attached
to a single gang electrical box or other suitable base, securely mounted on the wall or other building
surface. Each sensor shall be located where shown or, if not shown, where it will respond to the
average temperature in the room. Sensors, generally, shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor
within ADA reach guidelines, and shall not be mounted on outside walls if other locations are
possible. If located on an outside wall, it shall have an insulated base. Sensors shall have adjustment
devices, by means of which the operating points can be adjusted through a range of not less than 10
degrees above and below the operating points specified.
B. Room temperature sensors shall be similar to Honeywell T7560 digital wall module, with setpoint
adjustment wheel, override button, networking (DDC controllable) and LCD display for temperature
and setpoint status.
C. No devices containing mercury are permitted.
2.5 SEQUENCE OF CONTROL
A. Provide and install electric/electronic or DDC components to enable the mechanical system to operate
in the following sequences:
1. Hot Water Reset: Reset the supply water temperature (primary loop) from outside air
temperature. The minimum hot water supply temperature shall be 120°F at 60°F outside air
temperature (adjustable). The maximum shall be 180°F at 0° F outside air temperature.
2. Primary Heating Hot Water Circulators (CP-1 & CP-2): Operate Lead/Lag - if lead circulator
fails the Lag circulator shall run. The lead-lag pumps shall be alternated based on runtime. At
outside air temperatures above 60oF (adj.), the pumps shall be de-energized. Pumps shall
operate continuously when the outside temperature is below 60°F (adj.). Once the pumps start

they shall operate continuously and vary flow based on system conditions as determined by
integral pump controls. They may also energize together if they determine it is more efficient.
3. Secondary Heating Hot Water Circulators (CP-3) and Boiler (B-1): On a call for heat from the
reset controller the pump shall start and the boiler shall modulate. A time delay shall keep the
pumps operating for approximately two (2) minutes after the boiler stops firing (adjustable).
During periods where there is no call for heat, the boiler shall remain off.
4. Exhaust Fans:
a. EF-1: Shall operate based on the space temperature sensor to maintain space temperature
below 80°F.
b. EF-2, EF-3, EF-4: Shall operate during the occupied mode.
c. EF-5: Shall operate based on a wall mounted switch.
5. Wall Heaters (WH-#): On a call for heat by the room thermostat, the zone valve shall open and
the fan shall operate subject to the pipe mounted aquastat to satisfy the heating setpoint.
7. Blower Coil Air Handlers (BC-1, BC-2, BC-3, BC-4, BC-5, BC-6, existing BC):
a. Supply Fan: Shall run continuously during occupied mode.
b. Outside Air Damper: Shall be open to the minimum position during occupied mode and
closed during unoccupied mode.
c. Heating: Unit shall proportion control valve to satisfy the space temperature sensor. At
outside air temperatures below 45°F, the blower coil shall maintain a minimum discharge
temperature of 65°F.
d. Cooling: Unit shall operate DX cooling to satisfy space temperature sensor.
e. Freeze Protection: A freezestat (set at 45°F) on the discharge side of the heating coil
shall de-energize fan, close the outside air damper and open the control valve to full heat.
f. Condensate Overflow Protection: Upon detection of high condensate levels in the unit
drain pan, by the condensate overflow protection switch, the fan shall be de-energized
and an alarm shall be registered at the BAS system.
g. Unoccupied Mode: The outside air and exhaust air dampers shall be closed. The supply
fan and heating coil control valve shall operate to maintain a night setback temperature.
Provide an electrical interlock to prevent condensing unit operation if air handler is not
operating.
8. Blower Coil Air Handlers (BC-7):
a. Supply Fan: Shall run continuously during occupied mode.
b. Outside Air Damper: Shall be open to the minimum position during occupied mode and
closed during unoccupied mode.
b. Unit shall proportion the control valve to satisfy the space temperature sensor. At outside
air temperatures below 45°F, the blower coil shall maintain a minimum discharge
temperature of 70°F.
c. Cooling: Unit shall operate DX cooling to satisfy space temperature sensor.

d. Dehumidification: On a call for dehumidification, the dx-cooling shall operate to satisfy

the space humidity sensor. Hydronic reheat shall be used as necessary to ensure space
temperature remains within the acceptable range.
e. Humidification: On a call for humidification by the space humidity sensor, the humidifier
shall operate to satisfy the sensor.
f. Freeze Protection: A freezestat (set at 45°F) on the discharge side of the heating coil
shall de-energize fan, close the outside air damper and open the 2-way control valve to
full heat.
g. Condensate Overflow Protection: Upon detection of high condensate levels in the unit
drain pan, by the condensate overflow protection switch, the fan shall be de-energized
and an alarm shall be registered at the BAS system.
h. Unoccupied Mode: The outside air and exhaust air dampers shall be closed. The supply
fan and heating coil control valve shall operate to maintain a night setback temperature.
Provide an electrical interlock to prevent condensing unit operation if air handler is not
operating.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Inspection:
2. Verify that the automatic temperature control and system may be installed in strict accordance
with pertinent codes and regulations and the reviewed Shop Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide wiring, and conduit to connect the ATC components for an operational ATC system. Wiring
and installation shall conform to NFPA 70.
B. Identification: Label or code each field wire at each end. Permanently label or code each point of
field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Color-coded cable with annotated cable
diagrams may be used to accomplish cable identification.
C. Temperature Sensors: Stabilize sensors to permit on-the-job installation that will require minimum
field adjustment or calibration. Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and
adaptable to each type of application to allow quick, easy replacement and servicing without special
tools or skills. Strap-on sensor mountings, using helical screw stainless steel clamps, shall be
permitted on new piping for unit heater or other on-off operation only, after pipe is cleaned to bright
metal. Strap-on bulb and pipe shall be insulated after installation. Strap-on sensor mountings are also
permitted for hot water piping sizes up to 2 inches. Other liquid temperature sensors shall be provided
with wells.
D. Duct Sensors: Provide sensors in ductwork; specific location within duct shall be selected to
accurately sense air properties. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by
ducts or equipment. Installation shall be within the vibration and velocity limits of the sensing
element. Where an extended surface element is required to sense the average or lowest air
temperature, position and securely mount sensor within duct in accordance with sensor manufacturer's
recommendations. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and

supports. Provide separate duct flange for each sensing element; securely seal ducts where elements
or connections penetrate duct. Seal penetrations of duct insulation vapor barrier with vapor barrier
coating compound to provide a vapor-tight covering. Mount sensor enclosures to allow easy removal
and servicing without disturbance or removal of duct insulation or vapor barrier. On downstream side
of each sensor, provide access doors.
E. Pipe Sensors: Provide wells for sensors measuring temperatures in pressure vessels or in pipes. Wells
shall be noncorrosive to the medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical strength to
withstand the working and test pressures and velocities. Locate wells to sense continuous flow
conditions. Do not install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are smaller than
the length of the wells, provide wells in the piping at elbows to effect proper flow across the entire
area of the well. Wells may either look upstream or downstream. Provide thermal transmission
material within the well to speed the response of temperature measurement. Provide wells with sealing
nuts to contain the thermal transmission material and allow for easy removal. Wells shall not restrict
flow area to less than 70 percent of line-size-pipe normal flow area. Increase piping size as required
to avoid restriction.
3.3 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust controls and equipment to maintain the conditions indicated, to perform the functions
indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified.
3.4 INSTRUCTING OPERATING PERSONNEL
A. Upon completion of the work and when designated by the Architect, furnish the services of a
competent technician regularly employed by the temperature control manufacturer for the instruction
of Owner in the operation and maintenance of each automatic space temperature control system. The
period of instruction shall be for not less than one 4 hour period and shall include video tape
demonstration of controllers.
3.5 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests shall be performed or supervised by employees of the ATC system or manufacturer of the ATC
system, or by an authorized representative of the ATC manufacturer. Give Architect 14 calendar days
advance written notice prior to the date of the field acceptance testing. If the Architect witnesses tests,
such tests shall be subject to approval. If the Architect does not witness tests, provide performance
certification.
B. Plan for Inspections and Tests: Furnish a written inspections and tests plan at least 60 days prior to
the field acceptance test date. This plan shall be developed by the manufacturer of the ATC system.
The plan shall delineate the inspections and testing procedures required for the ATC system to
demonstrate compliance with the requirements specified. Additionally, the test plan shall indicate
how ATC system is to be tested, what variables will be monitored during test, names of individuals
performing tests, and what criteria for acceptance should be used. Indicate how operation of H&V
system and ATC system in each seasonal condition will be simulated.
C. Field Acceptance Testing: Upon completion of 72 hours of continuous H&V and ATC systems
operation and before final acceptance of work, test the automatic temperature control systems in
service with the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements. Test controls through each cycle of operation, including simulation of each
season insofar as possible. Test safety controls to demonstrate performance of required function.
Adjust or repair defective or malfunctioning automatic space temperature control equipment or replace
with new equipment. Repeat tests to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.
* END OF SECTION *

Maine Mineral & Gem Museum
SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The work covered by this section includes the furnishing of labor and materials, equipment,
and incidentals and the performing of operations in connection with "electrical work" as
indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein and including incidental items to effect a
finished, complete and operable system as indicated. The electrical work shall include but
not be limited to:
1. Provide service conduit and conductors as indicated on the plans.

2. Perform all electrical work in accordance with requirements of 2011 NEC, NFPA 72 and
NFPA 101.
3. Provide new wiring for fixtures and receptacles as indicated. All new wiring shall be
minimum 12 ga. copper.
4. Provide new wiring and disconnects for HVAC equipment and controls as required.
5. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles in all bathrooms and kitchens in accordance
with 2011 NEC.
6. Provide new three phase overhead electrical service as indicated on plans. Comply
with utility requirements.
7. Provide new tamper resistant receptacles in public areas in accordance 2011 NEC.
8. Provide complete Addressable fire alarm system per City of Bethel ordinances.
Provide complete smoke detector coverage per NFPA 72 and City of Bethel
ordinances. Provide audio/visual alarms per NFPA 72 and City of Bridgton ordinances.
Provide tamper and flow switched on sprinkler systems and pulls stations per NFPA 72.
Contact City Of Bethel Fire Chief for inspections.
9. Provide light fixtures as indicated on the plans.
10. Provide CATV and Tel cable and jacks in all units as indicated on the plans.
11. Provide fire alarm devices per NFPA 72 and ASME A17.1 for the new elevator.
12. Provide new exterior lighting as indicated on the drawings.
13. SECURITY SYSTEM - By others.
14. All demolition required as shown on the drawings.
15. Alternate #3 – provide pricing for additional track lighting as described on drawings.
A. Work shall be subject to the conditions of the contract and shall be in strict accordance with
these plans and specifications.
B. Before submitting his/her bid, the Electrical Contractor is required to visit the site and survey
the conditions likely to be encountered in the performance of the electrical work. Failure to
familiarize himself/herself with said conditions shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for full completion of the work in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract.
C. The term "Contractor used hereinafter shall designate the Electrical Contractor.
D. Any questions regarding this specification or the Electrical Drawings must be addressed in
writing to the Architect before bids close; after close of bids, the Architect's interpretation of
the meaning and intent of the specifications and drawings shall be made according to the
provisions of the General Conditions.
26 00 00– Electrical – Page 1 of 20


A. The General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Instructions to Bidders shall
apply to this work.
B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary

Conditions and all Division 1 specification sections.
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Where referred to, published standard specifications of technical societies, trade

associations and governmental agencies codes and regulations of Underwriters and
protective organizations, Federal, State and Municipal regulations and codes and
publications of a similar nature shall be the edition current as of the date of this Specification.
B. The applicable requirements of the latest publications of the following organizations shall
apply to the work under this section as if fully written herein:
1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Associations (NEMA)
3. National Fire Codes (NFPA)
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
5. Federal, State and Municipal Building Codes, and all other Authorities having
jurisdiction.
6. National Electrical Code (NEC)
7. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials shall be of the best quality. Workmanship shall be of highest grade and
construction shall be done according to best practices of the trade.
B. Provide, when required, labeled samples of material or equipment specified herein or

proposed to be used in this work.
C. Where words "furnish", "provide", or "install" are mentioned, either singly or in combination,
these words are hereby interpreted to mean "furnish and install" or "provide and install",
including materials complete with connections, supplemental devices, accessories and
appurtenances, unless specifically noted otherwise. These words are likewise hereby
interpreted as being prefixed to materials, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter mentioned,
either in abbreviated or scheduled information or in the technical sections of the
specifications.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit to the Architect for approval not less than eight (8) sets of Shop Drawings of the
materials, fixtures and equipment to be incorporated in the work. Information shall contain
specific reference to catalog numbers and shall be qualified in writing as required. No
considerations will be given to brochure or catalog information not specifically designated or
referenced to the specification by an identifying number.
B. Shop drawings that are facsimiled, (FAX) produced, or photocopies of FAX documents will
not be considered or reviewed. Only originals and or photocopied originals, complying with
paragraph A above will be considered.

C. Before consideration, electrical submittal packages shall include cover pages for each of the
electrical equipment groups, i.e. panelboards, lighting, fire alarm, devices, emergency call
system, apartment intercom/security system.
D. Shop drawings must bear the Architect's review stamp. In the event that the Architect rejects
shop drawings, the shop drawing must be revised and resubmitted for review.
E. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
F. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit procedure for preparation and installation.
H. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Reference in the specifications or on the drawings to any product, material, fixture, form or
type of construction, by proprietary name, manufacturer, make or catalog number,
establishes a standard of quality or design and is not meant to limit competition. Use any
equivalent substitute provided favorable written review by the Architect is first obtained.
1.7 CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS
A. The installation shall comply with laws and regulations applying to the electrical installation in
effect at the site with regulations of any other governmental body of agency having
jurisdiction, and with regulations of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. Obtain and pay for permits required by the ordinances at the site. After completion of the
work, furnish the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from the Inspection
Bureau having jurisdiction.
C. Inspections and tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division One.
Rejected materials shall be removed from the site and new materials furnished, retested and
installed to the satisfaction of the Architect without additional cost to the Owner.
D. Arrange for periodic inspections by the local Electrical Inspector during construction.
1.8 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. Temporary light and power shall be installed and maintained by the Electrical Contractor for
use by all trades for the duration of construction complete with all wiring, switches, protective
devices and similar equipment as may be required. Arrangement for the temporary service
with the Power Company is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor. Power bills will be
paid by the General Contractor. Provide 120/208 volt 100 ampere, drop box similar to
standard CMP detail 980-31.1.4. Provide 150 watt long life, rough service, frosted A lamps
with plastic “cages” as needed.
1.9 ACCEPTANCE
A. Before acceptance of the work under this section, damaged or imperfect materials shall be
refinished or replaced, debris, scaffolding and tools shall be removed and premises shall be
"broom clean" to the satisfaction of the Owner.
1.10 GUARANTEE

A. This contractor shall guarantee materials and installations under normal use to be free of
defects and poor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance. Any
replacement of parts or adjustments, including labor made necessary by inherent defects,
shall be provided by the contractor without cost to the Owner within the guarantee period.
1.11 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Protect equipment and material for the electrical work after delivery, before and after
installation. This protection must be extended against pilferage, dampness and damages
from all causes until the work is accepted by the owner.
1.12 ELECTRICAL REFERENCE SYMBOLS
A. Symbols shown on the Drawings show approximate locations of fixtures, outlet boxes,
conduit runs and other equipment, unless otherwise detailed. The exact location shall be
governed by structural conditions and obstructions. This is not to be construed as to permit
redesigning systems. Outlets shall be connected from circuits as shown on the drawings.
Locate and install boxes and equipment where they will be readily accessible.
1.13 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
A. Only the best materials of each class specified shall be used and the installation shall be
made in a neat and workmanlike manner, complete in every detail, ready for immediate
satisfactory operation by the Owner.
1.14 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Trenching and backfill
B. Painting
C. Cutting and patching
D. Telephone and cable TV service entrance cable and interface.
E. Coordinate work to meet requirements of cable and telephone utilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be furnished under this specification shall be the
standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment
and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification
requirements.
B. Materials shall be delivered to the site in the original sealed containers of packages bearing
the manufacturer's name and brand designated. Materials shall be stored in a clean, well-
ventilated, warm area. Care shall be exercised in handling materials during delivery, storage
and installation. Materials damaged, in the opinion of the Architect, shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
2.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide supports including supplementary steel, channels, rods and guys required for the
proper installation, mounting and support of equipment.

B. Supports shall be firmly attached and connected to building structural elements and
constructed in an acceptable manner. Continuously threaded rods less than 3/8" in
diameter, tie wire, or metal straps are not acceptable.
C. Supports in structural systems shall be installed as an integral part of the structural system.
Explosive or cartridge driven type anchors, insert or supports are not acceptable.
D. Except as otherwise required by the Contract Documents the type and size of supports shall
be as determined by the Contractor and shall be of sufficient strength and size to allow only
a minimum deflection as required by codes or standards and the support manufacturer's
requirements for loading.
E. Inform all parties as to location, size details and method of attachment of supports and the
weight which the support is to carry, so that the installation may be coordinated.
F. Supports shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, perpendicular or parallel to

walls, floor, columns, beams or ceilings.
2.3 GROUNDING
A. Furnish and install grounding system as required by codes or standards.
B. Grounding terminal on receptacles and switches shall be bonded to outlet box with
grounding conductor to establish grounding continuity if it is metallic.
C. Flexible metal conduit and electric metallic tubing feeder raceways shall include grounding
conductor.
D. Grounding conductors shall be stranded copper wire with green color insulation. Grounding
conductors shall be run with all circuits, feeders, etc. Raceways alone will not be considered
as a grounding means.
E. Grounding bushings shall be provided for raceways where required.
F. Provide exterior inter-system ground in accordance with NFPA 70, 250.94.
G. Provide grounding electrode and connections to main service per NFPA 70, 250.
2.4 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboard cabinets shall be of the dead-front safety type, provided with the size and
number of single, double or triple pole branches as indicated in the schedule. Cabinets shall
be constructed of zinc coated sheet steel and shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc, Standard for Cabinet and Boxes. Cabinet heights shall not exceed 72" and cabinets
shall be mounted so that the distance from the floor to center of the top circuit breaker will
not exceed 6'. Cabinets shall be provided with trims having adjustable trim clamps. Trims,
unless otherwise noted, shall be fitted with hinged doors having combination lock and latch
with locks keyed alike. A typewritten directory, properly identifying the circuits, shall be
mounted in each frame. Panels shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Panelboards shall be surface or flush mounted with bolt on branch circuit breakers and main
breaker or main lugs as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
C. Branch circuit breakers installed in the panels shall have a minimum short circuit rating as
indicated on the drawings.
D. Provide Arc Flash labels in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 110.

2.5 RACEWAYS
A. Install wiring in electric metallic tubing (EMT), and or schedule 40 PVC. Schedule 40 PVC
may be used outside only, raceways within the building shall be metal.
B. Raceways and wiring, except as otherwise noted, shall be installed exposed in unfinished
areas such as electrical and mechanical rooms.
C. Electric metallic tubing shall not be installed in concrete on grade, in concrete in contact with
earth or underground.
D. Buried rigid steel conduits (RSC) shall have two coats of bituminous protection.
E. Provide EMT for elevator feeders.
2.6 CONDUCTORS - WIRE AND CABLE
A. Branch circuit conductors installed in the building shall be type “MC” cable. Panel feeders
may be type SER cable if permitted by local codes.
B. Conductor sizing shown on the Drawings is based on copper. Contractor can substitute
aluminum of equal ampacity for all panel feeders and service conductors.
C. Joints and splices shall be made in a manner equivalent electrically and mechanically to the
conductor itself.
D. Conductors shall be color coded - Phase A: black, Phase B: red, phase C: blue, Neutral:
white, Ground: green.
E. Colors, except colors for conductors No. 4 and larger, shall be factory applied the entire
length of the conductors by solid color compound, solid color coating or colored striping or
bands, 2 sets 180 degree apart. On-site coloring shall not be done, except color coding by
means of paint or tapes is acceptable only for conductors No. 4 and larger.
F. Voltage rating, manufacturers, type and conductor, AWG size indication shall be continuous,
factory applied the entire length for each conductor.
G. Wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Wires smaller than No. 8 AWG shall be solid.
H. Minimum wire size is #12 AWG per MSHA standard.
2.7 WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches, receptacles and other utilization devices shall be specification grade, grounding
type. Back and side wired. Color by Architect.
B. Receptacles and switches shall have a grounding pole and grounding terminal, which shall
be connected to the outlet box with grounding conductor to establish grounding continuity.
C. Verify mounting height of devices prior to roughing.
2.8 WIRING DEVICE PLATES
A. Provide device plates for devices, switches, receptacles, and miscellaneous outlets.
B. Plates shall be high impact nylon to match the installed device. Color by Architect.
2.9 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Pull boxes of code gauge galvanized steel with screw covers to match, shall be as required
and shall be as shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Junction Boxes in Exterior walls shall be air vapor barrier box as manufactured by LESSCO
or equal. Conductors passing through pull boxes shall be identified to indicate their origin
and termination.
2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates for panelboards, motor disconnect switches, and motor starters
designating equipment controlled and function.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic with engraved white letters. Letters shall be 1/4
inches high. Nameplates shall have identifying color background for each system.
2.11 OUTLETS
A. Outlets shall be centered in panels and spaces provided therefore. If any discrepancy is
found to exist between outlets as shown on Electrical Drawings and Architectural Drawings
notify Architect to have location verified prior to installation.
B. Verify power wiring with equipment wiring diagrams before wiring equipment. Disconnects
and starters shall have nameplates indicating the loads they control.
2.12 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
A. Fixtures shall be by the manufacturers specified or as otherwise determined by the Architect.
B. Energy Saving Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be Class P: high power factor; shall
incorporate UL listed automatic resetting protection: shall be classified for quiet operation,
"A" sound rating: shall be designed for a nominal 120 volt system as shown. Provide
Program Start ballasts for occupancy controlled fixtures. Ballast Factor shall be .88 to 1.
C. Energy saving lamps of wattage, type and color indicated shall be furnished and installed in
necessary quantity to completely lamp every fixture. Incandescent lamps installed in
permanent lighting fixtures and used for lighting during construction shall be replaced on or
just after the date of substantial completion.
D. Fixtures shall be complete with all accessories such as close nipples, extension couplings,
connecting straps, screws, locknuts, hickies, plaster rings, to provide complete fixture
installation for use with any type of standard outlet or switch box. Special fittings required to
support fixtures shall be supplied as well as wood, or metal supports or grounds to support
surface or pendant mounted fixtures.
2.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: SUPERVISED
A. The fire alarm system shall consist of the addressable fire alarm control panel, pull stations,
horns and strobes, strobes only (ADA), smoke detectors, heat detectors. Furnish and install
wire, cables, conduit and conduit fittings, wiring and wiring devices, junction boxes and outlet
boxes, fire alarm boxes, fire detectors and control equipment and accessories indicated or
specified herein for a complete fire detection installation. System shall be Notifier or equal.
B. The system shall be fully addressable, fully supervised fire alarm installed according to the
drawings and specifications and in accordance with NFPA Codes 72 and local codes and
the Bridgton Fire Department. Material shall be new, except as noted, first quality and the
best of each class specified. Work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall
present a neat appearance when completed. Equipment shall be installed in accordance

with the recommendations of the manufacturer and best standard practice for this type of
work.
C. Require the manufacturer of the equipment to include the battery calculations for standby
batteries. The furnishing of complete installation Drawings and Riser Diagram and
connection diagrams and catalog cuts of components shall also be required of the
manufacturer by the contractor.
D. Provide the services of the manufacturer of the equipment to supervise the installation, to
adjust and test the system, to assure a complete and fully operative facility in accordance
with the Specifications and to instruct designated personnel in the operation, adjustment,
testing and maintenance of the system.
E. Notify the Architect, Owner and Bridgton Fire Department when the system is ready for final
approval tests. The system shall be considered ready for such testing only after all
necessary preliminary tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected
to the satisfaction of the equipment manufacturer's technical representative. Two copies of
the test report shall be submitted to the Owner.
F. Furnish and install a complete 24VDC closed circuit, electrically supervised, addressable,
annunciated fire alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. The
system shall include but not to be limited to all control equipment, power supplies, signal
initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and other
accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. The system shall operate
as a non-coded, continuous sounding system.
G. Provide and install required equipment and accessories necessary for the proper operation
of the system.
H. Fire system equipment shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name and logo to assure the
integration of the complete system.
I. Wiring for the fire alarm system shall be subject to the same restriction as herein before
specified for light and power circuitry. (NEC Article 760) Raceways containing conductors
shall not contain any other conductors and no A.C. conductors will be allowed in the same
raceway with the D.C. fire alarm detection and signaling conductors. Plenum rated fire
alarm cable may be used if allowed by the authority having jurisdiction.
J. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or approved by Factory Mutual

or as accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. The catalog numbers specified are those
of Notifier Fire Alarm Systems. The fire alarm system in its entirety shall be in compliance
with all applicable fire and electrical codes and comply with the requirements of the local
authority having jurisdiction over said systems.
K. General requirements as follows:
1. A riser diagram of the complete fire alarm system extension, (Typical riser diagrams
are not acceptable).
2. A complete point-to-point installation diagram for the extension. (Typical wiring

diagrams are not acceptable).
3. A complete list of current drain requirements during normal supervisory, trouble and
alarm condition.
4. Battery standby calculations showing total standby power required to meet the
specified system requirements.

L. The operation of any manual station or automatic activation of any smoke detector, or water
flow device shall cause:
1. Fire alarm horns to sound in the building.
2. Evacuation lamps to flash in the building.
3. Automatically shut down fans and/or close doors to prevent the re-circulation of
smoke.
4. Notify the Bridgton Fire Department via a digital communicator via monitoring
company.
5. Elevator recall shall be initiated by activation of any elevator lobby smoke detector, the
smoke detector in the Elevator Machine Room or the smoke detectors in the elevator
shaft and pit. Elevator recall shall cause the elevator to go to the First Floor (Main
Egress Level) or alternate floor if the First Floor detector is in alarm. Provide all
programmable relay modules.
6. Operation of the 120 volt dual contact heat detector in the elevator Shaft, Elevator Pit
or Elevator Machine Room shall cause the shunt trip on the elevator feeder breaker to
trip and disconnect electric power to the disconnect switch prior to water flow from the
sprinkler system and initiate an alarm in the Elevator Zone of the Fire Alarm System.
Provide programmable control relay modules.
7. Detectors for the Elevator shall be programmed separately from detectors throughout
the building. Only elevator lobby smoke detectors will initiate special “Fire Service”
elevator operation.
M. Each initiating circuit shall be represented on the zone cards in the control panel by an
amber trouble LED and a red alarm LED. The LED's for each zone shall be identified on the
control panel by custom lettering showing the zone designation. Circuit trouble shall be
indicated by the amber LED. Audible trouble and alarm devices shall be supervised.
Flashing lights to be supervised.
N. Each initiating circuit shall be electrically supervised for opens and ground faults in wiring,
and for short circuit faults and shall be so arranged that a fault condition in any circuit or
groups of circuits will not cause an alarm to be sounded. The occurrence of any fault will
light a trouble LED and sound the sonalert but will not interfere with the proper operations of
any circuit which does not have a fault condition.
O. The installer shall coordinate the installation of the fire alarm equipment with the
manufacturer. Conductors and wiring shall be installed per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. It shall be the installer’s responsibility to coordinate with the
manufacturer the correct wiring procedures in accordance with the latest revisions of the
appropriate NFPA pamphlets, the requirements contained herein, National Electrical Code,
local and state regulations, the requirements of the fire department and other applicable
authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). Pigtail connections between circuit wires and detector
terminals are not acceptable. Devices shall be connected to the circuit line wires.
P. Guarantee equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a
period of one year from date of the final acceptance. Before the installations shall be
considered completed and acceptable by the awarding authority, a test on the system shall
be performed as follows: The contractor’s job foreman, in the presence of a representative
of the manufacturer, a representative of the owner, and the fire department shall operate the
building annunciator and control panel. One half of all tests shall be performed on battery
standby power. Where applying heat would destroy any detector, they may be manually
operated. The initiating circuit and the signaling circuits shall be opened in at least two

locations per zone to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry. When the
testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both the contractors job foreman and the
representatives of the manufacturer and owner, a notarized letter co-signed by each
attesting to the satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to the owner and
the fire department. The contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working order
and without additional expense to the owner, shall replace any defective materials or
equipment provided by him under this contract within one year from the date of final
acceptance by the awarding authority. Prior to final test, the fire department must be notified
within a reasonable time of test date (at least 24 hours). The contractor shall provide the
necessary personnel and equipment to conduct the tests outlined above.
Q. Detection and signaling circuits shall be run separate from all other conductors. Wiring shall
be number 14 solid.
R. Connection within the control equipment and devices shall be made with T and B "stakon"
spade terminals. Wiring within the control equipment shall be secured with T and B "tyraps"
and placed in wired gutters.
S. No fire panel shall have locked programming codes. Any qualified service professional must
be able to reprogram the panel without needing assistance from the supplying vendor or
manufacturer.
T. No fire panel shall contain parts or components that are not readily available from multiple
competitive suppliers on the local market and the internet.
U. Part numbers specified are for Notifier. Fire alarm system components shall be as follows:
1. Fire alarm control panel: Notifier AFP-200 addressable panel, supply with all modules
and relays for complete operational system. Supply with NFPA required battery back-
up and charger located in electrical room. Provide digital alarm communicator
transmitter and all associated telephone interface hardware. Contractor responsible
for complete operational system.
2. System Smoke Detectors: Notifier FSP-751 low profile, intelligent, addressable

photoelectric head with B710LP base - Provide quantity as shown on the plans and at
least one over the fire alarm control panel and power extender modules for NFPA
compliance. Smoke detectors within apartments shall be system connected but shall
not trip the building fire alarm system.
3. Manual Pull Stations: Notifier NBG12LX - addressable, dual action, key reset station
with integral LED visible from the front of the pull station that blinks when the pull
station is addressed by the control panel.
4. Horn/Strobe Alarms: Notifier NS-24-MC-WFR series with adjustable candela settings

and adjustable volume taps. Provide synchronized strobes in rooms where more than
2 strobes are visible within the same sightlines, provide Notifier DSM12/24R
synchronization modules as required. Provide wire guards for gym horn/strobes.
Provide the proper candela strobes for the room sizes as follows:
Room Size Candela Rating
20' x 20' 15/75 cd
30' x 30' 30/75 cd
40' x 40' 75 cd

50' x 50’ 110 cd
Use equivalent ratings for larger rooms per NFPA 72 Code.
5. Strobe Only Alarms: Notifier RSS-24-MC-WFR remote strobes with adjustable

candela settings. Provide proper candela for each rooms as outlined above under
horn/strobes. Provide wire guards for gym strobes.
6. Duct smoke detectors: Notifier for AHU in attic by manufacturer.
7. Heat detectors: Provide Notifier FST-751 (135 fixed temp) or FSD-751R (combination
135 fixed temp and rate of rise) heat detector heads with B-710LP addressable or HD-
604 (200 fixed temp) wired to FMM-101 monitor module.
8. Sprinkler devices: Provide Notifier FMM-101 monitor module for each sprinkler alarm
or tamper switch.
9. Control relay modules: Provide Notifier FRM-1 programmable relay modules as

required to perform other specified or code required contacts to control other life
safety alarm function in the building including elevator emergency signal light in cab.
10. Qty (1) Knox Box - #3270 recessed provided and installed by EC. Install where
indicated and in accordance with the requirements of the City of Bridgton Fire
Department.
11. Provide Single Station Smoke Detectors 120Volt with Battery Back Up and
interconnected in units to all go into alarm simultaneously. Detectors shall be
approved by the City of Bridgton. This system is independent of the supervised
system.
12. Provide Single Station Carbon Monoxide Detectors 120Volt with Battery Back Up and
interconnected in units to all go into alarm simultaneously. Detectors shall be
approved by the City of Bridgton This system is independent of the supervised
system. Provide a distinct alarm tone from the supervised or single station smoke
alarms.
V. Contractor shall supply and install radio fire alarm master box manufacturer by AES with
antenna per City of Bridgton Fire Alarm Standards. Type of master box shall comply with
City of Bridgton and be installed at the location specified by the Bridgton Fire Department.
2.14 MECHANICAL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
A. Connect mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings. Control wiring shall be furnished
and installed by the Mechanical Contractor.
2.15 TELEPHONE/DATA
A. Provide and install telephone backboard in electrical room and each floor. Twisted pair
cabling inside building and phone/data or phone only jacks where indicated on the drawings.
Punch down blocks, etc. for an operational system.
B. Telephone equipment (phones, processors, etc.) by others.
C. Provide CAT 5E cable, jacks, plates, terminations and testing for complete operational
system. All cables shall be run to electrical room tel backboard.
2.16 CABLE TELEVISION

A. Provide and install cabling, jacks and plates inside building where indicated on drawings.
Cabling layout on each floor shall go back to closest com closet. Cabling shall terminate on
in comm closets and main electrical rooms. Coordinate with Time Warner cable. All cable
and jacks interior to the building by contractor. Comm closets provided on each floor.
2.17 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
A. Main service and distribution equipment suppressors: Combination Surge and Lighting
Arrestor. The AC voltage SPD's shall be a high speed, high current device designed to
protect electrical systems and electronic equipment from transient over-voltage. The SPD
shall provide continuous bi-polar, bi-directional, non-interrupting protection and be capable
of instant reset with no degradation in protection. Gas tubes are not acceptable. The SPD
shall utilize SAD or Selenium Based MOV technology. It shall start to suppress at a
minimum of 115% of the peak voltage of the sine wave. At maximum surge current
dissipation, the device shall not exceed the maximum voltage protection level. The SPD
shall be installed in parallel with the service main disconnect, distribution or branch panel
main lugs as shown. Connect SPD to over current protection sized as shown with an AIC
rating equal to panel rating. The suppressor shall have status indicator lights, dry contacts
with remote alarm capabilities and an audible alarm. Suppressors shall be assembled as
modular units to permit quick, easy replacement of failed components. The product shall
Comply with UL 96, UL 1449 and ANSI/IEEE 62.34.
1. Electrical Service:
a. Voltage shall be as indicated on drawings.

b. Frequency -- 50/60 Hz
c. Phases -- 3 phase
d. Wiring configuration -- as indicated
2. IEEE 62.41 Categories unless otherwise indicated on drawings:
a. Service entrance sizes

b. 600A B3/C1
c. > 600A to 1.2 KA C2
d. > 1.2 KA C3
e. Distribution or sub-panels B2
3. Electrical Performance:
a. Response time < 5 nanoseconds

b. MCOV 115% minimum
c. Shortwave test- surge current
d. (6kv, 1.2/50usec; 3ka 8/20µsec) 5000 surges
4. Minimum surge current:
a. Service Entrance 410,000 Amps/Phase

b. Distribution and Sub-panels 210,000 Amps/Phase (No Unit Panelboards)
5. Suppression system protected modes shall be L-N, L-G, N-G for Wye Systems and L-L,
L-G for ungrounded Delta Systems.
6. Power on indicators and failure detection: A lighted panel on the cover shall provide
indication that the suppressor is properly activated and shall also indicate mode failure. If
the suppressor fails, an isolated contact shall close. In addition, an audible alarm shall be
provided with manual reset.

7. Failure mode - SPD's shall be designed to fail shorted. Any fuses in series with the SPD's
shall not open during a surge event.
B. Disconnect: Main service suppressors shall be provided with an integral fused disconnect
switch or dedicated circuit breaker as shown or required by UL. Breakers and suppressors
shall have an AIC fault withstand rating equal or greater than the AIC rating of the
equipment to which it is connected. The length of wiring from the tap at the service
conductors to the suppressor being protected, however, shall not exceed the maximum
length permitted by manufacturer, to maintain the maximum voltage protection level.
Suppressors may be installed within switchgear or panel boards where UL label or listing is
not affected, suppressors are completely and easily accessible, indicator lights are visible
and audible alarm can be easily heard.
C. Enclosures: Enclosures for main service suppressors shall be as follows;
1. Minimum, 14 gauge painted steel or suitable enclosure to meet the NEMA selected
requirements as listed.
D. Operation Status Indicator: Audible Remote Signaling and Visual Systems:
1. Visual System:
a. Protection: Suppressor Working - Green LED's

b. Warning/Fault: Suppressor Failure - Red LED's
c. LED's shall be field replaceable
d. Other visual indicators where approved.
2. Remote Signaling: Relay with Auxiliary for C contacts: Two sets @ 2 ampere, 120 volts
each. 1 Set N.O. and 1 set N.C. to operate upon failure of suppression module, blown
fuse or tripped circuit breaker in suppressor module or in disconnect switch for alarm
connection to remote location
3. Audible: The audible alarm shall activate upon a fault condition within the suppressor.
An alarm silence/reset switch and push-to-test switch shall be provided.
E. Bonding and Grounding Conductors and Materials for Main Service Suppressors:
1. Size: Conductors utilized for surge suppressor connections to service conductors shall
be a minimum of #6 AWG stranded insulated copper unless otherwise specified.
2. Bus: Ground bus or strip material where used shall be copper, a minimum of ¼ inch
thickness and two inches wide unless otherwise specified. Bus materials shall be
secured to surfaces with appropriate insulators and mechanical fasteners. Bus
connections shall be bolted and reinforced as necessary to provide a permanent and
secure connection.
3. Connections Compliance: Connectors, splices, and other fitting used to interconnect

grounding conductors, bonding to equipment or ground bars, shall comply with
requirements of the National Electric Code and be accepted by Underwriters'
Laboratories for the purpose.
4. Connectors: Connectors and fitting for grounding and bonding conductors shall be of the
compression type in above grade locations. Connections below grade shall be
exothermically welded.
5. Dissimilar Materials: Bonding connections between electrically dissimilar metals shall be

made using exothermic welds or using bi-metal connectors designed to prevent galvanic
corrosion.

2.18 ENCLOSED DISCONNECTS
A. Disconnect Switches:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Square D
b. Westinghouse
c. Eaton (CH)
d. General Electric
2. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; quick-make, quick-break, load

interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent
opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class R or J fuses as applicable.
3. Non-Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; quick-make, quick-break,

load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to
prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF
position.
4. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; as indicated on Drawings. Provide labels for all disconnects

describing loads served. Provide Arc Flash labels in accordance with NFPA 70,
Article 110.
B. Fuses:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Buss
b. Chase Shawmut
c. Cooper
2. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198C, Class J; ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK1;
RK5; dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250 or 600 volt as
indicated or required.
3. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
4. Provide spare fuses as indicated.
2.19 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Combination Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Controller: Factory-assembled combination of

reduced-voltage solid-state controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2. Main Distribution: Service Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with

available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted,
field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.
d. N.C. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.
e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)
rating to 100 kA.
B. Enclosures:
1. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at

installed location.
a. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
c. Kitchen Areas: Type 4X.
d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
C. Accessories as specified:
1. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory
installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
a. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type.
1) Push Buttons: Recessed type; maintained as indicated.

2) Pilot Lights: LED type; colors as indicated.
3) Selector Switches: Rotary type.
b. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; non-resettable.
c. Meters: Panel type, 2 ½” minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or
minus two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switches with an
off position.
2. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).
3. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.
4. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Under-voltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-

state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide
adjustable under-voltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings. Motors over 50HP.
5. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.
2.20 SELF CONTAINED 400A METER SOCKET
Provide meter enclosure as indicated on the drawings:

Three Phase(120/208 volts)
Buss Amperes as indicated
5 Jaw Meter Socket
Provide main circuit breaker in meter enclosure.
Overcurrent devices with AIC ratings as indicated.
Coordinate work with the utility
.

2.21 – SECURITY SYSTEM - By others.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LICENSE
A. Electrical work shall be installed by persons duly licensed by the Electricians Board of the
State of Maine.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. It shall be the responsibility of this contractor to coordinate his work with other trades to
insure that his work is terminated is a satisfactory manner.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND PREPARATION
A. Work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner by experienced electricians in accordance

with the most modern engineering practice and shall present a neat appearance when
completed. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and where cutting, channeling,
chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, and ceiling or other surfaces is necessary for
the proper installation, support or anchorage of the conduit, raceways or other electrical
work, this work shall be carefully done and any damage to the building, piping or equipment
shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. After installation, electrical equipment shall be protected to prevent damage during the
construction period. Openings in conduits and boxes shall be closed to prevent entrance of
foreign materials. The interior of boxes and cabinets shall be left clean, exposed surfaces
shall be cleaned and plated surfaces polished.
3.4 OBTAINING INFORMATION
A. Obtain information from the manufacturers of the apparatus which is to be provided for the
proper methods of installation. Also obtain information from the General Contractor and
other Sub-Contractor which may be necessary to facilitate work and the completion of the
whole project.
3.5 PROVIDING INFORMATION
A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the shape, size and position of
openings and foundations required for his apparatus and shall give full information to the
General Contractor sufficiently in advance of the work so that such openings and foundation
may be built in advance. Also furnish supports herein specified so the General Contractor
may build same in place. In the case of a failure on the part of the Contractor to give proper
information as noted above, he shall assume the cost of having the work done.
3.6 RACEWAYS
A. Raceways, where applicable, shall be supported and secured at intervals of not more than
10 ft. with minimum of two supports shall be provided if required. Tie wire or perforated
metal straps shall not be used to support or secure raceways or other equipment. Electric
metallic tubing shall be supported within 18: of each coupling or connector. In finished
areas, furnish and install escutcheons for exposed conduit passing through or entering
finished floors or walls.
B. Expansion coupling shall be provided in each raceway crossing building expansion joint and
when length of raceway requires expansion coupling, expansion coupling shall have a total

minimum expansion of 4" and shall have a flexible bonding conductor. Setting of expansion
coupling shall be a function of the temperature at the time of installation. Flexible couplings
shall be provided where required.
C. Raceways shall have runs installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or
intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. Field-made bends and offsets shall be avoided
where possible, but where necessary, shall be made within an approved hickey or conduit
bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. Trapped raceways
shall be avoided. Care shall be taken to prevent the lodgement of plaster, dirt or trash in
raceway boxes, fittings and equipment during the construction. Clogged raceways shall be
entirely free of obstructions or shall be replaced. Wooden plugs inserted in concrete or
masonry are not acceptable as a base for raceway fastenings nor shall raceways or pipe
straps be welded to steel structures. Raceways shall be secured by pipe straps or shall be
supported by wall brackets, strap hangers or ceiling trapeze fastened by wood screws on
wood, toggle bolts on hollow units, expansion bolts on concrete or brick and machine screws
or welded studs on steel work.
3.7 OUTLETS
A. Each outlet in the wiring or raceway systems shall be provided with an outlet box to suit the
conditions encountered. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number
of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical
Code. Boxes shall not be less than 1-1/2" deep unless shallower boxes are required by
structural conditions and are specifically approved.
B. Ceiling and bracket outlet boxes shall be not less than 4" except that smaller boxes may be
used where required by the particular fixture to be installed. Boxes shall be installed in a
rigid and satisfactory manner and shall be fastened directly with wood screws on wood, bolts
and expansion shield on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and
machine screws or welded threaded studs on steel work.
3.8 FIXTURES
A. Incandescent and fluorescent fixtures shall be supported by building structural elements

independent of furred or suspended ceilings.
B. Subsequent to review of shop drawings and prior to ordering fixtures, verify voltage at each
fixture, also consult with others to determine the type of ceiling and ceiling suspension
system in each and every room and order fixtures to suit and fit the particular ceiling and
ceiling suspension system. Any extra costs because of failure on the part of this Contractor
to verify voltage or ceiling requirements shall be paid for by this Contractor. It is not the
intent of fixture catalog numbers shown to classify the voltage, ceiling or ceiling suspension.
3.9 WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches and convenience outlets shall have a rating as indicated on the drawings. Light
switches shall be silent type. Outlets connected to exposed conduits shall be installed in a
surface mounted, conduit device box, 4-1/2" long by 2-1/8" wide and with a suitable cover for
the device to be installed (box shall be galvanized). Plates on finished walls and on boxes
connected to concealed cable and conduits shall be as noted in the specifications.
3.10 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A. It is not intended that the drawings show in detail every conduit, junction box, etc., but
material necessary to complete the electrical system in accordance with the best practices of
the trade and to the complete satisfaction of the Architect, shall be furnished without
additional recompense under this section of the specifications. No deviation from the layout
shall be made without written approval from the Architect.

3.11 GROUND RESISTANCE TEST REPORT
A. Use IEEE 81-1983 for industry standard three point or fall of potential test
B. No current shall be flowing on the ground
C. The furthest test probe (C2) must go out at least 3-5 times the size of the system or a
minimum of 100’ in at least two directions.
D. Use a ground test instrument specifically designed for electrical ground testing
E. Instrument shall be calibrated within the past 12 (twelve) months The report shall consist of
the following:
1. Provide: A sketch showing building/structure and test directions & distances

2. Model of Test instrument
3. Serial number of the test instrument
4. Proof of calibration within the past year (Test Certification or paid invoice)
5. Date of test
6. Test readings at 52%, 62%, 72% of the C2 distances
If the average of the 62% values of the tests exceeds the 25-ohm value for power
systems or 5-10 ohms for low voltage systems or static grounding systems, the engineer
shall be informed immediately.
A “Megger” ground probe may also be used to determine the system resistance.
Disregard low readings where the conductors are “looped”. The utility neutral shall be
disconnected for any test to eliminate stray currents.
3.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the progress of the work, keep a set of drawings marked up to record deviations and
changes from the Contract Drawings due to field conditions, change orders, amendments,
revisions, addenda and other reasons to represent an accurate record of all work as actually
installed. Include an accurate layout of all in-slab, under-slab, and buried conduits.
B. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be approved by the Architect before
installation.
C. At the completion of the work, furnish to the Architect a complete set of prints of the original
Contract Drawings on polyester film, corrected in a neat manner to reflect all the above
changes and representing an accurate record of all work as actually installed.
D. The record drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval and corrected as
deemed necessary.
E. After approval, the record drawings shall become the property of the Owner.
3.12 INSTRUCTIONS, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. A the completion of the work, turn over to the Owner, one (1) set of operating and
maintenance instructions of equipment and systems. Submit name and address of nearest
available source of repair service and replacement equipment and parts to the Owner and
Architect. Explain and demonstrate the operation of the fire alarm system and the apartment
intercom/security system to the Owner's representative. The manufacturer's field technician
shall be present at this demonstration.
B. Arrange data in complete sets, properly indexed and marked.
C. Data shall include a complete set of shop drawings.

D. Material shall first be submitted in preliminary form for review by the Architect. After review,
submit two (2) copies in bound volumes to the Architect for distribution.
**END OF SECTION**

SECTION 31 20 00
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations

or dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation and remedial work
shall be at Contractor's expense.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner. Provide temporary
utility services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS (refer to MDOT specs and use most stringent requirements).
A. Satisfactory Soil: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM;
free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetation, or other deleterious matter.
B. Unsatisfactory Soil: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT.
C. Foundation backfill: minimum granular borrow.
D. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve
and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Bedding: Subbase materials with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8
percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel, ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 5
percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
G. Any over-excavated areas shall be filled with (minimum) granular borrow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK

MAINE, MAINE
A. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by water, freezing
temperatures, or frost.
B. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
C. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of character of materials and obstructions

encountered.
D. Excavate for structures, building slabs, pavements, and walkways. Trim subgrades to required
lines and grades.
E. Utility Trenches: Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations.
Maintain 12 inches of working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
1. Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous support for pipes and
conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized
excavations.
2. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of
particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Place
and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
F. Plow strip or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal to receive fill.
G. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for
fill, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil, and recompact.
H. Place backfill and fill in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth at optimum moisture
content. Compact each layer under structures, building slabs, pavements, and walkways to 95
percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698; elsewhere to 90 percent.
I. Grade areas to a smooth surface to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Grade lawns,
walkways, and unpaved subgrades to tolerances of plus or minus 1-1/4 inch and pavements and
areas within building lines to plus or minus 1/2 inch.
J. Under paved parking areas and driveways place 15” of MDOT type D subbase and 3” of
MDOT type A base on prepared subgrades and compact at optimum moisture content to
required grades, lines, cross sections, and thicknesses.
K. Under paved walkways, place 12” of MDOT type A base on prepared subgrades and compact at
optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thicknesses.
L. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage fill on prepared subgrade and compact to required cross
section and thickness.
M. Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer and verify
compliance with requirements.
N. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

MAINE, MAINE
SECTION 31 25 13
EROSION CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes temporary and permanent erosion control measures, features, and associated
work.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Maine Department of Environmental Protection Best Management Practices for Erosion

Control and Sedimentation, current edition.
B. Maine Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, current
edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data on features and measures including manufacturer, local
supplier, and details.
B. Samples: Submit one sample of riprap material, minimum 1 ton. Provide one sample in place at
construction site. Construction site sample may be incorporated into the Work. Samples will be
used as reference for judging size, and graduation of rock supplied and placed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INLET PROTECTION
A. Siltsack or equivalent.
2.2 SEDIMENT BARRIERS
A. Siltsack or equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE STABILIZATION
A. Incorporate erosion control devices indicated on the Drawings into the Project at the earliest
practicable time.
B. Construct, stabilize and activate erosion controls before site disturbance within tributary areas
of those controls.
C. Isolate and stabilize stockpile and waste piles. Slope stockpile sides at 2:1 or flatter.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EROSION CONTROL DEVICES 31 25 13 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
D. Stabilize diversion channels, sediment traps, and stockpiles immediately.
E. Install inlet protection in catch basins concurrent with structure installation.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EROSION CONTROL DEVICES 31 25 13 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 32 12 16
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product Data and hot-mix asphalt design mixes.
B. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to standard specifications of the State of Maine
Department of Transportation Standard Specifications Highways and Bridges, Latest Edition.
C. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having
jurisdiction, designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types,” and in accordance with Paragraph 1.1, B.
B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt,
slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
C. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with FS TT-P-115, Type I or AASHTO M 248, Type N.
D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
1. Color: White
E. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive

strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and
drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PAVING
A. Tack coat existing asphalt or concrete surfaces and allow tack coat to cure undisturbed.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
B. Place hot-mix asphalt to required grade, cross section, and thickness. Promptly correct surface
irregularities in paving course.
1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
C. Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in
areas inaccessible to rollers. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F
(85 deg C).
D. Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge.
Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and
smoothness.
E. Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still
hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been
uniformly compacted to 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041.
F. Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
G. Remove and restore paved areas that are defective or contaminated.
H. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to a minimum wet film thickness of
15 mils.
I. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with two galvanized steel dowels embedded in
precast concrete.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 32 16 00
CURBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes curbing, granite and concrete.
1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
2. Section 02 41 13 – Site Demolition.
3. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
4. Section 32 12 16 – Bituminous Pavement
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Maine Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, current
edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit unit configuration, dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CURBING
A. Granite curbing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify location is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as
indicated on drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate.
B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage curbing or impede consistent
backfilling or compaction.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CURBING 32 16 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units.
B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work.
END OF SECTION
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM CURBING 32 16 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 32 92 00
LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product certificates and planting schedule.
B. Sod: Comply with TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for
Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass
Sodding."
C. Maintenance: Water, fertilize, weed, mow, trim, and establish lawns. Replant nonuniform,
bare, or eroded grassed areas and remulch. Maintain for not less than 90 days.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRASSES
A. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species, as follows:
1. Seed Mixture: Native grass to be selected
B. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds,

diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod
Materials" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding."
1. Species: Native grass to be selected
2.2 SOILS AND AMENDMENTS
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, free of stones 1 inch or larger.
B. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone.
C. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8.
D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of

uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
E. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer, consisting of 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of

actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM LAWNS AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
F. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potassium; 20 percent nitrogen; 10 percent phosphorous; and 10 percent
potassium; by weight.
G. Straw Mulch: Clean, mildew- and seed-free salt hay or threshed straw.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Loosen subgrade, remove stones, sticks, existing grass, vegetation, and other extraneous
materials.
1. At newly graded subgrades, spread planting soil mixture to a depth of 6 inches but not
less than required to meet finish grades.
2. At unchanged grades, apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil
mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous
mixture of fine texture.
B. Grade lawn areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Moisten before
planting.
3.2 PLANTING
A. Seeding Lawns: Evenly distribute seed by sowing with a spreader or a seeding machine. Rake
seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. Protect seeded
areas by spreading straw mulch 1-1/2 inches in loose depth.
1. Seeding Rate: 3 to 4 lb/1000 sq. ft.
B. Sodding Lawns: Lay sod with tightly fitted joints, offsetting joints in adjacent courses. Tamp
and roll lightly to form a smooth surface. Fill minor cracks between pieces of sod with soil or
sand. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs. Saturate sod with fine water spray
within two hours of planting. During first week, water daily.
C. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM LAWNS AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 2

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 32 93 00
EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Product certificates and planting schedule.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with
applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
C. Maintain trees and shrubs for 12 months. Maintain ground covers and plants for 12 months.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTING MATERIALS
A. Tree and Shrub Material: Nursery-grown, with healthy root systems, well-shaped, fully
branched, healthy, and free of insects, eggs, larvae, defects, and disfigurement.
1. Provide balled and burlapped trees and shrubs.
B. Ground Covers and Plants: Established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat
pots.
2.2 SOIL AND AMENDMENTS
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, free of stones 1 inch or larger.
B. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone.
C. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8.
D. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially
decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity
of 1100 to 2000 percent.
E. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of

uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
F. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent
phosphoric acid.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM EXTERIOR PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
G. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available
phosphoric acid.
H. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer, consisting of 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of

actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
I. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,

phosphorus, and potassium; 5 percent nitrogen; 10 percent phosphorous; and 5 percent
potassium; by weight.
J. Organic Mulch: Ground or shredded bark, black color.
K. Weed-Control Barrier: Polypropylene or polyester nonwoven fabric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ground Cover and Plant Bed Preparation: Loosen subgrade to a depth of 6 inches. Remove
stones sticks, roots, and rubbish. Spread planting soil mixture to a depth of 12 inches but not
less than required to meet finish grades. Work first layer into top of loosened subgrade.
B. Trees and Shrubs: Excavate pits with sides sloped inward and with bottom of excavation
slightly raised at center to assist drainage. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball
diameter. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Set trees and shrubs plumb and in center of pit with top of ball raised above adjacent
finish grades.
2. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but do not
remove from under balls. Carefully remove root balls from containers without damaging
root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during
planting operation.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing
remainder of backfill. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil
mix.
4. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs after planting.
C. Plant ground cover and plants in holes 24 inches apart, dug large enough to allow root spread.
Plant stock working soil around roots and leave a slight saucer around plants to hold water.
Water after planting. Do not cover plant crowns with wet soil.
D. Mulching: Before mulching, install weed-control barriers. Apply organic mulch, 3 inches
thick and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
E. Edgings: Install edgings and anchor with stakes driven below top elevation of edging.
F. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

BETHEL, MAINE

BETHEL, MAINE
SECTION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes storm drainage piping, fittings and accessories.
1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
2. Section 02 41 13 - Site Demolition
3. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M36 (American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials) -

Metallic (Zinc or Aluminum) Coated Corrugated Steel Culverts and Underdrains.
B. AASHTO T180 (American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials) -

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and an 18-in. (457 mm)
Drop.
C. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
D. ASTM C12 - Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines.
E. ASTM C14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
F. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
G. ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings.
H. ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.
I. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
J. ASTM C924 - Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low Pressure Air Test
Method.
K. ASTM C969 - Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast
Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines.
L. ASTM C1103 - Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Pipe Sewer Lines.
M. ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 Kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.
N. ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54 Kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.
MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM STORM DRAINAGE 33 40 00 - 1

BETHEL, MAINE
O. ASTM D2321 - Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic
Sewer Pipe.
P. ASTM D2729 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
Q. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
R. ASTM D3033 - Type PSP Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
S. ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
T. ASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated.
U. ASTM D2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
V. ASTM D3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe and pipe accessories and structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Storm Drain Pipe:

1. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2751, SDR [23.5] [35] [42], Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) material.
2. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3033, Type PSP, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material.
3. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2729, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, expanding and contracting sleeve, ribbed gasket for
positive seal.
B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanout Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, manufactured by LeBaron or equivalent.
2.4 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. See Section 31 20 00, Earthwork.

BETHEL, MAINE
2.5 STRUCTURES
A. Precast concrete structures in accordance with the Construction Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify trench is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as
indicated on [layout] drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with fine aggregate.
B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent
backfilling or compaction.
3.3 BEDDING
A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 20 00, Earthwork. Hand trim excavation
for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
B. Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer.
C. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction density.
3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM C12 and ASTM D2321. Seal
joints watertight.
B. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings with maximum variation from indicated slope of
1/8 inch in 10.
C. Connect to storm drain system.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Request inspection prior to [and immediately after] placing aggregate cover over pipe.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
1. Take care not to damage or displace installed pipe and joints during construction of pipe
supports, backfilling, testing, and other operations.
2. Repair or replace pipe that is damaged or displaced from construction operations.
END OF SECTION

BETHEL, MAINE

Maine Mineral and Gem Museum Bethel, Maine

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Maine Mineral and Gem Museum Bethel, Maine

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM

99 and 103 Main Street

August 31, 2012

SECTION 1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

1-A Instructions to Bidders

SECTION 2 CONTRACT FORMS

00 11 13 Notice to Building Contractors

SECTION 3 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

SECTION 4 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 OF 5

DIVISION 6 WOODS AND PLASTICS

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

08 14 33 Stile & Rail MDF Doors

09 29 00 Gypsum Board Assemblies

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 OF 5

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14 24 23 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13 Fire Suppression Systems

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 OF 5

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving

33 10 00 Water and Sewer Distribution

T1.1 Title Sheet

C1 Site Plan & Details

A1.1 Basement Floor Plan

S1.1 Foundation Plan and Details

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 OF 5

M1.1 Basement Mechanical Plan

E1.1 Basement Electrical Plan

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 OF 5

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM

Original Contract Amount Per Day

More than $10,000 and less than $100,000 $100.00

10. Any proposal that contains an Escalation Clause will be invalid.

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM

MAINE MINERAL AND GEM MUSEUM

Allowances are included on this project.

Plaster Patch Allowance of 400 sf $

2. Alternate bids are included on this project.

Alternate No. Title of Alternate Dollar amount

2 Add Alternate - Replace existing windows on Oddfellows $ ____________________

3 Add Alternate - Additional Exhibit Hall Track Lighting $ ____________________

(formerly Section 2-B)

Addendum No. ____ Dated: ________

4. Bid security is required on this project.

5. Filed Sub-bids are not required on this project.

(formerly Section 2-B)

7. This bid is hereby submitted by:

Printed name and title: _______________________________________________________________

Company name: _______________________________________________________________

Mailing address: _______________________________________________________________

City, state, zip code: _______________________________________________________________

Phone number: _______________________________________________________________

Email address: _______________________________________________________________

List of all partners,

(formerly Section 2-B)

§ 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

Addendum No. Dated: ____

this the __ day of _ _, 20___